FLOW-I Service Manual

Service manual
Flow-i Anesthesia System

System version 4.7
Table of contents
Table of contents 1
1 Important 13
1.1 General 13
1.1.1 System version and system software version 14
1.1.2 Serial number 14
1.2 Symbols used in this manual 14
1.3 Hazard notices 15
1.4 Installation 16
1.5 System checkout 16
1.6 Service 16
1.7 To the responsible service personnel 17
1.8 Conditions for displayed measured values 17
1.8.1 BTPS, Body Temperature and Pressure Saturated 17
1.8.2 ATPD, Ambient Temperature and Pressure Dry 17
1.9 Environmental declaration 17
1.9.1 Components with special environmental concern 17
1.9.2 Printed circuit boards 17
1.9.3 Other electronics 18
1.10 Construction materials 19
1.10.1 Metal – total 70% 19
1.10.2 Polymeric material – total 10% 19
1.10.3 Electronics – total 20% 19
1.10.4 Others – very small amounts 20
1.11 Articles of consumption 20
1.12 Power consumption 21
1.13 Packing materials 22
1.14 Disassembly and disposal instructions 22
2 Introduction 23
2.1 General 23
2.2 Functional units 23
2.2.1 Front side of the system 24
2.2.2 Rear side of the system 26
2.3 Optional equipment 27
2.4 Electronic structure 27
2.4.1 General 27
2.4.2 CAN bus 28
© 2019, Maquet Critical Care AB. Flow-i Anesthesia System Service Manual. Publ. No. 6676980, rev. 17 Page 1 (of 369)
Table of contents
2.4.3 Electronic subsystems 29

3 Description of functions 31
3.1 About this chapter 31
3.2 Memory types 31
3.3 Pneumatic component abbreviations 31
3.4 Default positions of the pneumatic valves 32
3.5 Gas distribution section (1) 33
3.5.1 Version C 34
3.5.2 Version A and Version B 37
3.5.3 Common functionality 38
3.6 Drive gas supply section (2) 39
3.6.1 Version C 39
3.6.2 Version A and Version B 41
3.7 Gas control section (3) 44
3.7.1 Schematic view and parts 45
3.7.2 Manual ventilation switch 50
3.7.3 Vaporizer 1 lock pilot valve 50
3.7.4 Vaporizer 2 lock pilot valve 50
3.8 Fresh gas supply (4) 54
3.9 Vaporizer Valve Section (5) 59
3.9.1 Vaporizer 1 and 2 pressure valves 61
3.9.2 Vaporizer 1 and 2 scavenging valves 61
3.9.3 Vaporizer inlet, outlet and bypass valves main parts 61
3.9.4 Vaporizer inlet and outlet valves 61
3.9.5 Vaporizer bypass valve 61
3.9.6 Fresh gas filter 62
3.9.7 Vaporizer 1 and 2 locking device 62
3.9.8 PC 1909 Vaporizer adapter board 63
3.10 Vaporizer (6) 63
3.10.1 General description 63
3.10.2 EMC gasket 66
3.10.3 Docking valve OV9 66
3.10.4 Drive gas filter 66
3.10.5 Vaporizer lid 66
3.10.6 Safety fill valve 66
3.10.7 Vaporizer liquid container 66
3.10.8 Level indicator 67
Page 2 (of 369) © 2019, Maquet Critical Care AB. Flow-i Anesthesia System Service Manual. Publ. No. 6676980, rev. 17.
Table of contents
3.10.9 Liquid agent filter 67

3.10.10 Drain plug 67
3.10.11 Gas escape pipe 67
3.10.12 Gas escape pipe filter 67
3.10.13 Vaporizer pressure transducer 67
3.10.14 Vaporizer safety valve 68
3.10.15 Vaporizer injector 68
3.10.16 Vaporizer injection detection 68
3.10.17 Vaporizing chamber 68
3.10.18 Vaporizing chamber temperature sensor 68
3.10.19 Vaporizer heating foil 69
3.10.20 Vaporizer heating foil temperature sensor 69
3.10.21 Fresh gas inlet and outlet filters 69
3.10.22 PC 1910 vaporizer controller board 69
3.10.23 PC 1911 vaporizer connector board 69
3.10.24 PC 1912 vaporizer liquid detector board 69
3.10.25 PC 1913 vaporizer liquid level detector board 70
3.10.26 PC 1914 vaporizer spray LED board 70
3.10.27 PC 1926 vaporizer spray detector board 70
3.10.28 PC 1931 vaporizer lid sensor board 70
3.11 Safety valve (7) 70
3.12 Patient cassette (8) 72
3.12.1 Inspiratory and expiratory valves 73
3.12.2 Absorber bypass valves 74
3.12.3 Expiratory flow transducer 74
3.12.4 Manual ventilation valve 74
3.12.5 APL/PEEP valve 74
3.12.6 Expiratory outlet one-way valve 75
3.12.7 PC 1917 expiratory channel cassette board 75
3.13 Patient cassette lid (9) 75
3.13.1 Inspiratory and Expiratory sample filter holders 77
3.13.2 PC 1918 Expiratory channel connector board 77
3.14 Gas analyzer section (10) 77
3.14.1 Gas analyzer section - main components 78
3.14.2 PGA - Common functionality 81
3.14.3 PGA - O2 Sensor 83
3.14.4 Water trap receptacle 85
3.14.5 Water trap 86
3.15 CO2 absorber (11) 87
© 2019, Maquet Critical Care AB. Flow-i Anesthesia System Service Manual. Publ. No. 6676980, rev. 17. Page 3 (of 369)
Table of contents
3.15.1 Safety aspects 88

3.15.2 CO2 absorber 89
3.15.3 Absorber sensor 89
3.16 Volume reflector (12) 89
3.16.1 Reflector adaptor 91
3.16.2 PC 1781 (R) reflector pressure transducer board 91
3.17 Reflector gas supply (13) 91
3.17.1 Reflector gas module 92
3.17.2 Gas inlet 94
3.17.3 Filter 95
3.17.4 Temperature sensor 95
3.17.5 Supply pressure transducer 95
3.17.6 Flow transducer 95
3.17.7 Nozzle unit with valve diaphragm 95
3.17.8 Solenoid 95
3.17.9 ID/Status PROM 95
3.17.10 Gas module key 95
3.18 Manual ventilation section (14) 95
3.18.1 Manual ventilation valve actuator PP3 96
3.18.2 Manual ventilation bag 97
3.19 Emergency manual ventilation section (15) 97
3.19.1 Version C and version B 98
3.19.2 Version A 101
3.20 System checkout valve section (16) 104
3.20.1 Test plug 105
3.20.2 Systems without System checkout valve 105
3.21 EVAC (17) 105
3.21.1 EVAC reservoir 106
3.21.2 AGSS flow indicator 107
3.22 Control panel (18) 107
3.22.1 Control Panel – main components 108
3.23 Power section (19) 110
3.23.1 AC/DC converter 112
3.23.2 PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board 113
3.23.3 Start-up safety feature 113
3.23.4 PC 1903 external connectors board 113
3.23.5 Fan 114
3.23.6 Power backup battery 115
3.23.7 LED lamp 115
Table of contents
3.24 Power connection (20) 115

3.24.1 Mains power inlet 116
3.24.2 PC 1938 mains power connection board 117
3.24.3 Isolation transformer fuses 117
3.25 Power On/Off and Vaporizer PC board section (21) 117
3.25.1 PC 1927 O2 flush board 118
3.25.2 PC 1928 Power On/Off board 119
3.25.3 Power button 119
3.26 PC 1984/PC 1919 expiratory channel board (22) 119
3.26.1 PC 1781 (F) fresh gas pressure transducer board 121
3.26.2 PC 1781 (I) inspiratory pressure transducer board 121
3.27 PC 2060/PC 1920 control board (23) 121
3.28 PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board (24) 123
3.29 PC 1922 panel board (25) 124
3.29.1 RS-232 connector pin configuration 127
3.30 PC 1900 main backplane board (26) 127
3.31 Lift (27) 128
3.31.1 AC/DC converter 128
3.31.2 Lift actuator 129
3.32 AFGO (Option) (28) 129
3.32.1 Version B 130
3.32.2 Version A 131
3.33 Extra mains power outlets (Option) (29) 133
3.33.1 IEC power outlets 133
3.33.2 US 5-15R power outlets 134
3.33.3 CEE 7/4 (Type F) 135
3.33.4 Isolation transformer 136
3.34 Auxiliary O2 and Suction module (30 ) 136
3.34.1 Auxiliary O2 regulator 138
3.34.2 Suction unit 138
3.35 Backup gas rack (Option) (31) 138
3.35.1 Backup gas trolley 139
3.35.2 Inlet pressure and Pressure regulator 140
3.35.3 Safety valves 141
3.35.4 Gas tube connections 141
3.35.5 PC 1916 Cylinder pressure connection board 141
3.36 Backup gas holder (option) (32) 141
3.36.1 Inlet pressure and Pressure regulator 142
Table of contents
3.36.2 Safety valve 143

3.36.3 Pressure transducer 143
3.36.4 Gas tube connections 143
3.37 MSync (Option) (33) 143
3.38 Patient monitor mounting kit (option) (34) 144
4 Disassembling and assembling 147
4.1 General 147
4.2 Hazard notices 147
4.3 Vaporizer handling 148
4.4 PC boards and electrical components 148
4.4.1 Replacing electrical components 148
4.4.2 Handling PC boards 148
4.4.3 Replacing PC boards 148
4.4.4 Additional actions when replacing PC boards 149
4.4.5 Information stored on the PC boards 149
4.5 Assembling guidelines 150
4.5.1 Tightening torques 150
4.5.2 Thread locking adhesives 150
4.5.3 Special grease 151
4.6 Internal tubing 151
4.6.1 Collar nuts – installation 151
4.6.2 Pressure transducer tubing – installation 152
4.6.3 Sampling tubing – installation 152
4.6.4 Sampling tubing – removal 152
4.7 Control panel 152
4.7.1 Control panel – removal 153
4.7.2 Control panel – disassembly 153
4.7.3 Rotary encoder – replacement 155
4.8 Fan filter – replacement 156
4.9 EVAC filter and holder– replacement 156
4.9.1 Filter – replacement 156
4.9.2 Filter holder – replacement 157
4.10 Patient cassette lid 157
4.10.1 Inspiratory sample filter holder – removal 157
4.10.2 Expiratory sample filter holder – removal 158
4.11 Patient cassette 159
4.11.1 Patient cassette – removal 159
4.11.2 Absorber valves – removal 160
4.11.3 Absorber valves – installation 160
Table of contents
4.11.4 APL/PEEP valve membrane – removal 161

4.11.5 APL/PEEP valve membrane – installation 161
4.11.6 Expiratory outlet one-way valve OV12 – removal 162
4.11.7 Expiratory outlet one-way valve OV12 – installation 163
4.11.8 Inspiratory and expiratory valve – removal and disassembly 164
4.11.9 Inspiratory and expiratory valve – assembly and installation 164
4.12 Drawers and rails 166
4.12.1 Drawer rail guide – installation 166
4.13 Covers and chassi parts 167
4.13.1 Front door – opening 167
4.13.2 Front door – closing 168
4.13.3 Rear cover – removal 169
4.13.4 Side cover – removal 170
4.14 Sampling line Nafion – replacement 170
4.15 Gas modules 173
4.15.1 Gas module – removal 173
4.15.2 Gas module – disassembly 173
4.15.3 Filter – replacement 174
4.15.4 Nozzle unit – replacement 175
4.15.5 O-rings on gas module docking – replacement 176
4.15.6 PC 1906 gas block board – removal 176
4.16 Gas control section 177
4.16.1 Pilot valves – removal 177
4.16.2 PC 2057 valve drivers board – replacement 178
4.16.3 PC 1907 valve drivers board – replacement 178
4.16.4 Regulators REG1 – REG4 – replacement 179
4.16.5 Double channel plate 180
4.17 PC boards 182
4.17.1 PC 1984/PC 1919, PC 2060/PC 1920, PC 2061/PC 1921, PC 1922, PC 2063/PC
1923 – removal 182
4.17.2 PC 1903 external connectors board – replacement 183
4.17.3 Memory backup battery – replacement 184
4.18 Gas analyzer section 186
4.18.1 Water trap receptacle – removal 186
4.18.2 O-rings for Water trap receptacle – replacement 186
4.18.3 AION Platinum gas analyzer – removal 187
4.18.4 Gas analyzer AION ADS – replacement/upgrade 188
4.18.5 O2 sensor bracket – installation (AION ADS only) 189
4.18.6 Control Gas Analyzer (CGA) – removal 190
4.18.7 MAN/AUTO switch – replacement 193
Table of contents
4.18.8 Power button – removal 201

4.18.9 Emergency ventilation 202
4.19 Power backup battery – replacement 209
4.19.1 General 209
4.19.2 General prerequisite tasks – all systems 209
4.19.3 Batteries 209
4.19.4 Battery mounting devices 210
4.19.5 Power backup battery – replacement, Version A and Version B, C20/C30 210
4.19.6 Power backup battery – replacement, Version C, C40 212
4.19.7 Power backup battery – replacement, Version D, C40 214
4.19.8 Power backup battery – replacement, Version E, C20/C30 216
4.19.9 Power backup battery – replacement, Version F, C40 217
5 Service procedures 221
5.1 Service key 221
5.2 Tools 221
5.2.1 Gas analyzer tool 222
5.2.2 Vaporizer tool 222
5.2.3 AGC tool 223
5.3 Service & Settings 223
5.3.1 Logging in to Service & Settings 223
5.3.2 Status 225
5.3.3 Logs 226
5.3.4 Tests 227
5.3.5 Calibration 231
5.3.6 Patient O2 sensor check and calibration 237
5.3.7 Service functions 243
5.3.8 Service report 245
5.3.9 Startup configuration 245
5.3.10 Settings 246
5.4 Sampling line pressure drop test 246
5.4.1 General 246
5.4.2 Test description 246
5.4.3 Sampling line pressure drop test procedure 247
5.5 System software and vaporizer software installation 248
5.5.1 General 248
5.5.2 System software installation procedure 249
5.5.3 Possible failures/problems during system software installation 252
5.5.4 Vaporizer software installation procedure 253
5.6 Software option installation 255
Table of contents
5.6.1 General 255

5.6.2 Software option installation procedure 255
5.7 Leakage detection 257
5.7.1 General 257
5.7.2 Required equipment 257
5.7.3 Test sequence flowchart 258
5.7.4 Test case 1: Patient tubing 258
5.7.5 Test case 2: CO2 absorber 259
5.7.6 Test case 3: Patient cassette 261
5.7.7 Test case 4: Vaporizers 261
5.7.8 Test case 5: Fresh gas line 262
5.7.9 Test case 6: Reflector gas line 263
5.7.10 Test case 7: Reflector 263
5.7.11 Test case 8: APL/PEEP valve coil, Manual ventilation valve actuator and Fresh gas
safety valve 264
5.7.12 Test case 9: Patient cassette lid and sample filters 266
5.7.13 Test case 10: Manual ventilation valve actuator 267
5.7.14 Test case 11: System checkout valve 268
5.7.15 Test case 12: Fresh gas line tests 268
5.7.16 Test case 13: Reflector gas line tests 282
5.7.17 Test case 14: Reflector and reflector adaptor 286
5.7.18 Test case 15: Manual breathing bag and tubes 287
5.8 Pressure regulators 287
5.8.1 General 287
5.8.2 Version B 288
5.8.3 Version A 289
5.9 Mechanical APL calibration (emergency ventilation) 291
5.9.1 General 291
5.9.2 Required equipment 291
5.9.3 Check procedure 291
5.9.4 Calibration procedure, Version B 292
5.9.5 Calibration procedure, Version A 293
5.10 Adjusting Manual ventilation valve actuator PP3 294
5.10.1 Procedure 294
5.11 Adjustment of friction joints 295
5.11.1 Control panel and Patient monitor 295
5.11.2 Additional table and Adjustable arm for parameter modules 296
5.12 Model C40 – Transportation and prerequisites 297
5.12.1 General 297
5.12.2 Interhospital transportation of the C40 unit 297
Table of contents
5.12.3 Transportation with the Service trolley 298

5.12.4 Transportation without Service trolley 298
5.12.5 Before mounting the C40 unit on the ceiling pendant 299
5.13 Installation of optional equipment 299
5.13.1 Maximum weight, number, and position of accessories 300
5.13.2 Interchangeability – Control panel and Patient monitor 300
5.14 Functional check of backup gas supply 301
5.14.1 Performing the Functional check 301
6 Troubleshooting 303
6.1 General 303
6.2 System checkout 304
6.2.1 Preparations prior to System checkout start 306
6.2.2 Initial Gas supply test 306
6.2.3 O2 flush test 307
6.2.4 Insp. and Exp. valves test 308
6.2.5 Internal tests 308
6.2.6 Barometer test 310
6.2.7 Gas supply pressure test 310
6.2.8 Pressure transducer tests 311
6.2.9 Safety valve tests 312
6.2.10 Vaporizer inlet/outlet valve test 312
6.2.11 Flow transducer tests 313
6.2.12 AUTO ventilation leakage test 315
6.2.13 MAN ventilation leakage test 316
6.2.14 Gas analyzer test 316
6.2.15 Battery test 318
6.2.16 Vaporizer 1 and 2 test 318
6.2.17 Technical alarms test 320
6.3 Technical error codes and messages 320
6.3.1 General 320
6.3.2 Initial troubleshooting 321
6.3.3 Troubleshooting vaporizer and anesthetic agent delivery 321
6.4 PC board LED indicators 321
6.4.1 PC 2057 valve drivers board 322
6.4.2 PC 1907 valve drivers board 323
6.4.3 PC 1984/PC 1919 expiratory channel board 324
6.4.4 PC 2060/PC 1920 control board 325
6.4.5 PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board 326
6.4.6 PC 1922 panel board 327
Table of contents
6.4.7 PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board 327

6.5 Other errors and remedies 329
6.5.1 System 329
6.5.2 Suction unit 332
6.5.3 Emergency ventilation section 333
7 Preventive maintenance 335
7.1 General 335
7.2 Preventive maintenance intervals 335
7.2.1 Preventive maintenance (PM) 335
7.2.2 Preventive maintenance + (PM+) 335
7.2.3 Additional maintenance actions 335
7.3 Preventive maintenance actions (PM and PM+) 336
7.4 Required equipment 338
7.5 Accessories, spare parts and maintenance kits 338
7.5.1 Flow family maintenance kit 24 months 338
7.5.2 Flow family maintenance kit cassette 24 months 338
7.6 Preventive maintenance 339
7.6.1 Preparation 339
7.6.2 Parts to be cleaned (PM+) 340
7.6.3 Parts to be replaced (PM+) – overview 341
7.6.4 Parts to be replaced (PM+) – details 343
7.6.5 Parts to be checked 348
7.6.6 Safety inspection 353
7.6.7 Completing the Preventive maintenance 353
7.6.8 Power backup battery 354
7.6.9 Memory backup battery 354
8 Index 355
9 Revision history 363
9.1 System revision history 363
9.2 Service Manual revision history 367
9.2.1 Service Manual revision 15 367
9.2.2 Service Manual revision 16 367
10 Diagrams 369
1 Important
1.1 General
The information in this Service Manual covers Flow-i anesthesia system up to system version 4.7. Unless
otherwise stated, the Service Manual is also valid for system versions below 4.7.
The information in this manual refers to different models or versions of the Flow-i anesthesia system. These
models are mapped to their serial numbers (see section 1.1.2 on page 14). In order to recognize the manual
information referring to a certain model in an easy way, this manual is provided with labels indicating the
model described in the following paragraph. Where applicable, there is a table of content in the beginning of
each section, giving an overview where in the section to find the information referring to a certain model.
For some sections the information instead is mapped to the software version, the system version or to a
specific version of a component.
Unless otherwise stated all figures show Flow-i system with S/N > 20 000.
Note: Not all Products (Device types), System versions, System software versions and Software options
described in this document are available in all countries. For details, contact your Getinge representative.
Service documentation for the Flow-i anesthesia system consists of:
 User’s Manual including Cleaning and Maintenance manual. The User’s Manual is an indispensable
complement to the Service Manual for proper servicing.
 Service Manual
 Description of error codes
 Installation Instructions
 Spare parts information
 Documentation for all optional equipment included in the system
 Product End-of-Life Disassembly Instructions (Disassembly and Disposal Instructions)
Contact MCC HSC or your local Getinge representative for more information.
Maquet Critical Care AB, part of Getinge, is the legal manufacturer of the Flow anesthesia systems. Maquet
Critical Care AB is referred to as “manufacturer” in this document.
 The Flow-i anesthesia system is referred to as “the system” in this document.
 The Flow-i anesthesia system User’s Manual is referred to as “the User’s Manual” in this document.
 Maquet Headquarter Support Center is referred to as “MCC HSC” in this document. Note that MCC HSC
is available only for the Getinge service organization and authorized distributors. For other service
organizations, such as hospital biomedical departments, technical support is provided by the local
Getinge representative.
In addition to important information given here and in the related documents, always pay attention to
applicable local and national regulations.
Responsibility for the safe functioning of the equipment reverts to the owner or user in all cases in which
service or repair has been done by a non-professional or by persons who are not employed by or authorized
by Getinge, and when the equipment is used for other than its intended purpose.
The system complies with standards and requirements as stated in the User’s Manual.
Chapter 1 – Important
 References to IEC 60601-1 in the Service Manual refer to edition IEC 60601-1:2005 + A1:2012.
 References to EN 80601-2-13 in the Service Manual refer to edition ISO EN 80601-2-13:2012 +
A1:2015.
 References to IEC 60601-1-2 in the Service Manual refer to edition EN 60601-1-2:2015.
WARNING! Do not modify this equipment without authorization of the manufacturer.
1.1.1 System version and system software version

 To see the system version number, push the Menu button on the control panel and go to System info.
Make sure that the version of the User’s Manual is the same as the system version.
 To see the system software version number, push the Menu button on the control panel and go to
System info. For functionality enhancement, the latest released system software version is
recommended.
1.1.2 Serial number
The system serial number is printed on a label that is affixed on the lower right part of the system, close to
entry of the mains power cable.
To display the serial number on the control panel, push the Menu button and go to System Info.
1.2 Symbols used in this manual

WARNING! Indicates critical information about a potential serious outcome to the patient or the
user.
CAUTION: Indicates instructions that must be followed in order to ensure the proper operation
of the equipment.
ESD sensitive components. When handling ESD sensitive devices, established procedures
must be observed to prevent damage.
Special waste. This product contains electronic and electrical components. Discard disposable,
replaced and left-over parts in accordance with appropriate industrial and environmental
standards.
Recyclable material. Recycling must be performed in accordance with appropriate industrial

and environmental standards.
Trained and authorized personnel. Only personnel trained and authorized by Getinge shall be
permitted to perform installation, service or maintenance of the system.
1.3 Hazard notices

Before disassembling or assembling, make sure that:
1. Mains power cable is disconnected.
2. Power button is set to off. If the power button is set to on, the power backup battery supplies power to all
electrical components in the unit.
 When the power button is set to off, the listed items are still energized by the power backup battery:
o PC 1900 main backplane board
o PC 1903 external connectors board
o PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board
o Emergency ventilation switch
o Power button
 The power backup battery can be disconnected by:
o Disconnecting the battery cables at the battery terminals, or
o Disconnecting the battery cables (Battery and battery sense) at PC 1903 external connectors board.
3. Gas supply is disconnected, central gas supply and backup gas supply.
4. The system, including all gas conveying parts, is cleaned. Refer to instructions in the “User’s Manual –
Cleaning and Maintenance”.
Ensure cleanliness when performing service on parts that come into contact with oxygen pressure greater
than 3000 kPa.
WARNING! With power supply connected to the system, there are energized electrical
components inside the unit. All personnel must exercise extreme caution if fault tracing or
adjustments are performed with power supply connected and with covers removed.
CAUTION: With gas supply connected to the system, there are pressurized components inside
the unit. All personnel must be very cautious if fault tracing or adjustments are performed with
gas supply connected and with covers removed.
Some items, e.g., gas modules, are still under pressure when gas supply is disconnected.
1.4 Installation
Only personnel trained and authorized by Getinge shall be permitted to install the system. The
installation and handing-over procedures are described in the Installation Instructions.
1.5 System checkout

WARNING! After any installation, maintenance or service intervention in the system, perform a
System checkout and a manual check of Emergency ventilation system according to instructions
in the User’s Manual.
1.6 Service
The system must not be serviced or maintained while in use with a patient, with the exception to fill a
vaporizer.
ESD sensitive components. When working with ESD sensitive components, always use a
grounded wrist band and a grounded work surface. Adequate service tools must always be
used.
ESD sensitive components. PC boards (spare parts) must always be kept in a package for
sensitive electronic devices. Getinge will not otherwise assume responsibility for the materials
used, the work performed or any possible consequences of same.
Special waste. This product contains electronic and electrical components. Discard disposable,
replaced and left-over parts in accordance with appropriate industrial and environmental
standards.
Recyclable material. Recycling must be performed in accordance with appropriate industrial

Trained and authorized personnel. The system must be serviced at regular intervals by
personnel trained and authorized by Getinge. It is recommended that service and maintenance
is done as a part of a service contract. Any maintenance or service must be noted in a log book.
Note: All repair or service requests resulting from a device failure to perform their intended function shall be
submitted as complaints. Please report a potential complaint to your local Getinge representative as soon as
possible for further processing.
Maintenance of the system must be performed by personnel trained and authorized by Getinge with the
following intervals:
 Preventive maintenance (PM): At least once a year, or every 5000 hours of operation, whichever comes
first.
 Preventive maintenance + (PM+): At least every second year.
 The power backup battery shall be replaced every three or four years, depending on model.
 The memory backup batteries on PC 1922 panel board, PC 2060/PC 1920 control board, and
PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board shall be replaced every four years.
 Only original spare parts from Getinge must be used in the system.
1.7 To the responsible service personnel

Trained and authorized personnel. Only personnel trained and authorized by Getinge shall be
permitted to perform installation, service or maintenance of the system.
The contents of this document are not binding. If any significant difference is found between the system and
this document, please contact Getinge for further information.
We reserve the right to modify the system without amending this document or advising the user.
1.8 Conditions for displayed measured values

1.8.1 BTPS, Body Temperature and Pressure Saturated
The standard ISO 80601-2-13, which is harmonized with the standard IEC 60601-1 requires all
measurements and settings of gas volumes and flows for the anesthetic breathing system to be expressed
using BTPS reference conditions, i.e., 37 °C and ambient pressure saturated with water vapor.
The system uses BTPS reference conditions when presenting:
 Gas volumes, flows and leakages for the anesthetic breathing system
 CO2 concentration
In practice this will mean that:
 In volume-based modes, the delivered volumes will decrease by approx. 11 % compared to previous
versions.
 In pressure-based modes, the delivered volumes measured and presented on the User Interface will
increase by approx. 11 % compared to previous versions.
1.8.2 ATPD, Ambient Temperature and Pressure Dry

All gas concentrations, except for CO2, are referenced to dry gas conditions.
When using Vaporizer tool, Gas analyzer tool or tests in the technical part of Service & Settings menu, AP21
reference conditions are still used for measured flow and volume values.
1.9 Environmental declaration

This environmental declaration applies to the System.
1.9.1 Components with special environmental concern

Components listed below shall be disposed of in accordance with appropriate industrial and environmental
standards.
1.9.2 Printed circuit boards

 PC 1781 pressure transducer board, 4 units
 PC 1900 main backplane board
 PC 1903 external connectors board
 PC 1906 gas block
 PC 1909 vaporizer adapter board
 PC 1917 expiratory channel cassette board (one in each patient cassette)
 PC 1918 expiratory channel connector board

 PC 1984/PC 1919 expiratory channel board
 PC 1922 panel board
 PC 1924 display connection board
 PC 1925 display CPU board
 PC 1938 mains connection board
 PC 2057/PC 1907 valve drivers board
 PC 2060/PC 1920 control board
 PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board
 PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board
 PC 1928 power on/off board
 PC 1927 O2 flush board
 Water trap detector
One vaporizer contains:
 PC 1910 vaporizer controller board
 PC 1911 vaporizer connector board
 PC 1912 vaporizer liquid detector board
 PC 1913 vaporizer liquid level detector board
 PC 1914 vaporizer spray LED board
 PC 1926 vaporizer spray detector board
 PC 1931 vaporizer lid sensor board
1.9.3 Other electronics

 Gas module, containing multiple PC boards, 4 each
 Electromechanical valves (EMV), 14 each
 Multigas analyzer (AION), 1 alt. 2 each
 O2 sensor (Servomex), 1 alt. 2 each in systems with Patient gas analyzer AION ADS
 Fresh gas safety valve pull magnet
 Expiratory flow transducer (in each patient cassette)
 APL/PEEP valve coil
 LED lamp
 AC/DC Converter, containing PC boards
 Power backup battery (lead)
 Memory backup battery (lithium), 3 each
 Fan
 TFT panel assembly including backlight
 Touch screen (glass)
 Power button
 APL knob
 MAN/AUTO switch
 O2 flush valve
 Emergency ventilation switch

 Lift (version C30)
 Extra mains power outlets (option)
 Isolation transformer (option)
 Internal cabling. Shall be handled as electronic waste.
1.10 Construction materials

Construction materials used in % of the total weight:
1.10.1 Metal – total 70%

 Aluminum
Steel, zinc, brass, lead, copper, neodymium.
1.10.2 Polymeric material – total 10%

 ABS (Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene)
 EPDM (Ethylene propylene diene monomer rubber )
 FFKM (Perfluoroelastomer)
 FKM (Fluoroelastomer)
 NBR (Nitrile rubber)
 PA (Polyamide)
 PBT (Polybutylene terephthalate)
 PC (Polycarbonate)
 PE (Polyethylene)
 PEEK (Polyether ether ketone)
 PES (Polyethersulfone)
 PET (Polyethylene terephtalate)
 POM (Polyoxymethylene)
 PP (Polypropylene)
 PPSU (Polyphenylsulfon)
 PS (Polystyrene)
 PTFE (Polytetrafluoroethylene)
 PUR (Polyurethane)
 PVC (Polyvinyl chloride)
 PVDF (Polyvinylidene fluoride)
 SBC (styrene-butadiene copolymer)
 SEBS (Styrene Ethylene Butylene Styrene)
 SI (Silicone)
 TPE (Thermoplastic elastomer)
 TPU (Thermoplastic polyurethane)
1.10.3 Electronics – total 20%

 Power backup battery (lead-acid)
 Printed circuit boards, cables, etc.
1.10.4 Others – very small amounts

 Borosilicate glass
 StabOx® E-Clay
 Loctite® 243™
 Sterile filter paper of fiberglass
1.11 Articles of consumption

Item Parts to be replaced Qty Interval
1 Water trap 1 According to hospital routines or at least

once a month, or if the message Replace
water trap alarm appears.
2 Patient suction collection bag. Applicable 1 After each patient.

only if used during treatment.
3 Vacuum- and serial tubing used with the 1 After each patient.
suction module. Applicable only if used
during treatment.
4 Gas sampling line (single use). 1 After each patient if no filter is used at the
Y-piece.
5 Exp. connection bacterial filter. 1 After each patient if no filter is used at the
Y-piece.
6 Heat and moisture exchanger (HME) 1 After each patient.
7 Patient tubing 1 According to manufacturer’s instructions

or hospital routines.
8 Suction unit bacterial/viral filter 1 Once every three months, or according to

hospital routine. Replace if contaminated.
9 CO2 absorber 1 When exhausted.
10 Filter in Gas module 4 24 months
11 Nozzle unit in Gas module 4 24 months
12 O-ring in docking 4 24 months
13 Exp. sample filter holder 1 According to hospital routines or at least

every 24 months.
14 Insp. sample filter holder 1 According to hospital routines or at least

every 24 months.
151 APL/PEEP valve membrane 1 24 months
1
Must also be replaced on any extra patient cassettes.
Item Parts to be replaced Qty Interval
162 Absorber valve 2 24 months
17 Dust filter for fan 1 24 months
18 Rotary encoder 1 24 months
19 Filter set for Yoke. Cylinder gas supply 2 24 months

(option).
20 Seal for Yoke. Cylinder gas supply 2 24 months

(option).
21 Power backup battery 1 3 or 4 years, depending of model

(see section 4.19.3 on page 209)
22 Memory backup battery 3 4 years
23 EVAC filter 1 24 months
1.12 Power consumption

The power consumption depends on the operating mode and system configuration. The values listed below
are measured in Off, Standby and Operational mode. All other values are calculated maximum values for the
system.
Operating mode and system Power consumption Total power Total power
configuration added consumption for a consumption for a
230 V / 50 Hz 110 V / 60 Hz
system system
Off Measured mean value 30 VA 25 VA
Standby Measured mean value 81 VA 75 VA

 No vaporizer heating
 No battery charging
Operational mode with average Measured mean value 87 VA 83 VA

settings
 No anesthesia agent delivery
 No vaporizer heating
2
Must also be replaced on any extra patient cassettes.
Operational mode with average Measured mean value 107 VA 103 VA

settings Max 85 VA 172 VA 168 VA
 Anesthesia agent delivery
 Operational heating of one
vaporizer
Preheating of a second, not Max. 30 VA 202 VA 198 VA

selected vaporizer
Max. power backup battery charging Mean: 90 VA 200 VA 200 VA
Peak: 90 VA 260 VA 260 VA
Extra mains power outlets Max. continuous: 1200 VA 1500 VA 1500 VA
1.13 Packing materials

The amount of packing materials will vary depending on customer adaptation.
Materials for packing:
 Plywood box including pallet.
 Stretch film of polyethylene, PE
 Shock-absorbing material of expanded polyethylene, EPE, or expanded polypropylene, EPP
1.14 Disassembly and disposal instructions

For disassembly and disposal instructions, refer to the document Flow-i Anesthesia System – Product End-
of-Life Disassembly Instructions.
Chapter 2 – Introduction
2 Introduction
2.1 General
The System is intended for use in administering anesthesia while controlling the entire ventilation of patients
with no ability to breathe, as well as in supporting patients with a limited ability to breathe.
 The system is intended for use by healthcare professionals, trained in the administration of anesthesia.
 The system is intended for use on neonate to adult patient populations.
 The system is intended for use in hospital environments, except MRI and radiation environments.
When not in operation, the system is designed for in-hospital transport.
2.2 Functional units

 The numbers in Figure 2-1/Table 2-1 and in Figure 2-2/Table 2-2 refer to the position numbers for
schematic overviews of these items in the system overview. The system overview is located in section
10, Diagrams starting on page 369.
Each item is described in depth in section 3, Description of functions starting on page 31.
2.2.1 Front side of the system
Figure 2-1: Front side of the system. Figure shows Flow-i system with S/N > 20 000.
Table 2-1: Description of callouts in Figure 2-1.
Ref. no. Description
1 Control panel
See section 3.22 on page 107.
2 Gas analyzer section

3 EVAC
4 MSync (option)
5 Volume reflector
6 Power on/off and Vaporizer PC board section

7 Emergency manual ventilation section

8 Vaporizer
9 AFGO (option)
10 System checkout valve

11 CO2 absorber
12 Manual ventilation section

13 Patient cassette
14 Patient cassette docking

15 Safety valve
16 Auxiliary O2 and suction unit (option)

2.2.2 Rear side of the system
Figure 2-2: Rear side of the system.
17 Drive gas supply section

See section 3.6, on page 39.
18 Gas distribution section

19 Reflector gas supply

20 PC 1900 main backplane board

21 Gas control section

22 PC 1984/PC 1919 expiratory channel board

23 PC 2060/PC 1920 control board

24 PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board

25 PC 1922 panel board

26 Power section
27 Fresh gas supply

28 Backup gas rack (option)

29 Power connection
30 Extra mains power outlets (option)

2.3 Optional equipment

Contact MCC HSC or your local Getinge representative for more information.
2.4 Electronic structure

2.4.1 General
The system consists of several subsystems, where different software is executing on different computer
nodes, PC boards.
The main subsystems are:
Subsystem Location (PC board)
Control PC 2060/PC 1920 control board
Expiratory flow meter PC 1984/PC 1919 expiratory channel board
Monitoring PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board
Panel PC 1922 panel board
The communication link between the computer nodes above is CAN bus.
The system software is installed with a Getinge approved USB memory stick. Separation of the software
subsystems is handled by the installation program, refer to section 5.5.2, System software installation
procedure on page 249.
2.4.2 CAN bus

Internal communication via CAN bus protocol (CAN = Controller Area Network). The CAN bus is a simple
two-wire differential serial bus system. In the system configuration, the bus bandwidth is 500 kbit/sec.
Figure 2-3: Software subunits.
2.4.3 Electronic subsystems
2.4.3.1 Expiratory Flow meter

The main responsibilities for the Expiratory Flow meter subsystem are:
 flow measurement
 patient cassette handling.
Expiratory flow meter system: Responsibility for the flow measurement performed by the Expiratory flow
transducer in the Patient cassette.
Patient cassette: Responsibility for Patient cassette handling.
2.4.3.2 Control
The main responsibility for the Control subsystem is patient treatment, how to regulate the inspiratory and
expiratory gas flow.
Breathing: Responsible for all modes of ventilation and delivery of anesthetic agents and gas mixtures.
Ventilator settings: Responsible for all ventilator settings.
Persistent storage: Maintain a persistent data storage area used to save parameter settings.
Metrics: Contains several metrics for various types of information.
System settings: Responsible for some of the system settings, e.g., storing default patient category and
default mode of ventilation. The system settings will be stored in persistent memory.
2.4.3.3 Monitoring
The main responsibilities for the Monitoring subsystem are:
 alarm
 monitoring functions.
Alarms: Responsible for detecting and handling alarm situations.
Metrics: Responsible for monitoring the system behavior.
Persistent storage: Maintain a persistent data storage area to save Alarm settings.
Internal network supervision: CAN bus-master responsible for connection of all nodes in the system and
supervision of the CAN network.
System settings: Responsible for some of the system settings, e.g., default alarm limits.
Supervision of anesthesia delivery: Responsible for supervision of the anesthetic agent concentration.
Optional functions: Responsible for optional functionality in the system. An option is marked in the
backplane EEPROM and can enable functions such as a ventilation mode or other features.
2.4.3.4 Panel
The main responsibility of the Panel subsystem is to enable the user to interact with the system.
Presentation and modification of ventilator settings: Responsible for implementing mechanisms to let
the users modify the ventilator and anesthesia settings, as well as displaying the ventilator and anesthesia
settings to the user.
Presentation of real-time metrics: Responsible for presentation of real-time metrics generated from
measurements in the Monitoring subsystem.
Presentation of alarms: Responsible for presentation of alarms generated by the Monitoring subsystem.
Drawing primitives and fonts: Will use its own graphics library that includes functions such as draw line,
draw text and draw circle.
Persistent storage: Maintain a persistent data storage area to save Log data.
Event logging: Responsible to maintain an Event log. Some of the information in the log will be generated
by the other subsystems. Date and time will always be stored together with the events.
Typical events saved in the log are:
 Alarm activations
 Changes in ventilator settings
 Alarm limit changes
 Activation of System checkout
 Apnea periods
Activation of immediate functions, e.g., O2 flush
System diagnostics logging: Responsible for maintaining a system Service log. The Service log is divided
into five different logs and generated from all subsystems. Date and time will always be stored together with
the events as well as some identifier of the subsystem generating the event.
Typical events saved in the logs are:
1. Test results:
o System checkout results
o Individual test results
o Calibration results
2. Technical alarms:
o Details about technical alarms.
3. Configuration:
o Details about the systems startup configuration.
4. Installation:
o Installation version history.
5. Service report:
o Service notes created by the service technician.
o Calibration results.
FCI protocol: Responsible for the external communication protocol FCI (Flow Communication Interface).
3 Description of functions
3.1 About this chapter

The information in this chapter refers to the System Overview in section 10, Diagrams starting on page 369.
Note that the number in parentheses in each heading represents the position number in System overview.
3.2 Memory types

There are four different types of memories used in System:
1. Flash memory used for:
o System software storage. Present on PC 1984/PC 1919 expiratory channel board, PC 2060/PC
1920 control board, PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board, PC 1922 panel board, PC 2063/PC 1923
power control board and PC 1925 display CPU board. The System software can be reinstalled or
updated with a system software installation.
o Vaporizer software storage. Present on PC 1910 vaporizer controller board. The Vaporizer software
is part of the System software. The Vaporizer software will be copied to the CompactFlash card on
PC 1922 panel board during System software installation. The Vaporizer software can then be
reinstalled/updated either by a System software installation or by a separate Vaporizer software
installation.
o For PC board information, configuration, calibration data, etc. Present on PC 1910 vaporizer
controller board, PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board and PC 1925 display CPU board.
2. RAM: For temporary storage of software and data. Present on PC 1910 vaporizer controller board, PC
1984/PC 1919 expiratory channel board, PC 2060/PC 1920 control board, PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring
board, PC 1922 panel board, PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board and PC 1925 display CPU board.
3. Non-volatile memory: RAM with memory battery backup. For settings, trends and logs. Present on
PC 2060/PC 1920 control board, PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board and PC 1922 panel board.
4. EEPROM: For PC board information, configuration, calibration data, etc. Present on PC 1900 main
backplane board, PC 1903 external connectors board, PC 1906 gas block, PC 2057/PC 1907 valve
drivers board, PC 1917 expiratory channel cassette board, PC 1984/PC 1919 expiratory channel board,
PC 2060/PC 1920 control board, PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board, and PC 1922 panel board.
3.3 Pneumatic component abbreviations

 EMV: Electro-Mechanical Valve. Pneumatic valve that distributes gas flow or gas pressure to different
parts of the system. Controlled by an electric signal.
 OV: One-way Valve. Valve that allows gas flow only in one direction. Controlled by the gas flow.
 PP: Pneumatic Piston. Moving piston that actuates other components. Controlled by an EMV.
 PV: Pneumatic Valve. Valve that leads fresh gas or expiratory gas through the system. Controlled by an
EMV or a PP.
 REG: Pressure regulator. Reduces the gas pressure to a preset value. Factory preset or manually
adjusted using a manometer.
 SV: Safety Valve. Valve that opens and releases the gas pressure at a preset value. Factory preset.
 T: Pressure test point. Gas outlet connector to be used during manual adjustment of a pressure regulator
REG1 – REG4.
 VI: Vaporizer Injector. Valve in the vaporizer that injects anesthetic agent into the fresh gas. Controlled
by an electric signal.
Chapter 3 – Description of functions
3.4 Default positions of the pneumatic valves

In the table below the default positions for the pneumatic valves in off or standby are defined. The control
signals to all EMV valves are indicated by LEDs on PC 2057/PC 1907 valve drivers board. Refer to section
6.4, PC board LED indicators on page 321.
Valve ID Valve name Valve position
OFF STANDBY
1 Fresh gas module O2 Closed Closed
2 Reflector gas module O2 Closed Closed
3 Fresh gas module Air Closed Closed
4 Fresh gas module N2O Closed Closed
EMV2 Manual ventilation pilot valve Closed Closed
EMV3 System checkout pilot valve Closed Closed
EMV4 Vaporizer bypass pilot valve Closed Open
EMV5 Vaporizer 2 selection pilot valve Closed Closed
EMV6 Vaporizer 1 selection pilot valve Closed Closed
EMV9 Vaporizer 1 pressure valve Closed Closed
EMV10 Vaporizer 1 scavenging valve Closed Closed
EMV11 Vaporizer 2 pressure valve Closed Closed
EMV12 Vaporizer 2 scavenging valve Closed Closed
EMV18 AFGO pilot valve Closed Closed
O2+ O2 flush Closed Closed
PP3 Manual ventilation valve actuator Inactive Inactive
PP4 System checkout valve actuator Inactive Inactive
PV1 Vaporizer 1 inlet valve Closed Closed
PV2 Vaporizer 1 outlet valve Closed Closed
PV3 Vaporizer 2 inlet valve Closed Closed
PV4 Vaporizer 2 outlet valve Closed Closed
PV5 Vaporizer bypass valve Closed Open
PV6 System checkout valve Closed Closed
PV7 Additional fresh gas outlet valve Patient cassette Patient cassette
SV1 Fresh gas safety valve Closed Closed
SV2 Vaporizer safety valve Closed Closed
- Emergency APL actuator Inactive Inactive
- Manual ventilation valve Open Open
- APL/PEEP valve coil Inactive Inactive
- APL/PEEP valve Open Open
3.5 Gas distribution section (1)

The gas distribution section contains all inlets and outlets for distributing gas to and from the system. Gas is
supplied from the central gas supply at the hospital, or, from gas cylinders connected to the Backup gas
rack.
Figure 3-1: Three-dimensional view of the Gas distribution section.
The main functions are:

 Three gas inlets to connect O2, Air and N2O from the hospital central gas supply.
 Three gas inlets to connect O2, Air and N2O cylinder gas from the optional Backup gas trolley, Backup
gas rack and Backup gas holder.
 PC 1906 Gas block mounted on the block measures the hospital central gas supply pressures (except
for N2O pressure, that is measured after the regulator).
 Gas delivered to the Reflector gas supply section (O 2 or Air) is manually pre-selected by the Reflector
gas selector valve (ref.no 3 in Figure 3-6 on page 37). The default setting is O2 (selector in its upper
position) and O2 must be used as reflector gas. Version A only.
 Gas outlet for connection of the AGS.
There are three different versions of the Gas Distribution Section:
Serial number Comments
Version C See section 3.5.1 on page 34.
Version B
See section 3.5.2 on page 37.
Version A
Common functionality, see section 3.5.3 on page

38.
3.5.1 Version C
Figure 3-2: Schematic view of the Gas distribution section.
3.5.1.1 Gas inlets and outlets
Figure 3-3: Three-dimensional view of the gas inlets and outlets.

1 Internal outlet to Auxiliary O2 supply
2 Internal outlet for Air to suction unit
3 N2O gas from central gas supply
4 O2 gas from optional Backup gas rack
5 Air from optional Backup gas rack
6 N2O gas from optional Backup gas rack
7 O2 gas from central gas supply
8 Air from central gas supply
9 Outlet to Anesthesia Gas Scavenging System, AGSS.
3.5.1.2 Gas module docking

The gas module docking is the T-shaped metal block on the rear side of the gas block. The gas module
docking contains channels for distributing gas from the gas block to the four gas modules.
Figure 3-4: Three-dimensional view of the gas module docking.

1 Fresh gas module O2
2 Reflector gas module O2
3 Fresh gas module Air
4 Fresh gas module N2O
5 Gas module docking
6 Anesthetic Gas Scavenging System, AGSS, outlet
7 PC 1906 gas block board
The O-rings on the gas module docking must be replaced during Preventive maintenance + (PM+).
3.5.2 Version A and Version B
Figure 3-5: Schematic view of the Gas distribution section, Version A (left) and Version B (right).
3.5.2.1 Gas inlets and outlets
Figure 3-6: Three-dimensional view of the

gas inlets and outlets
1 PC 1906 Gas block (behind the cover plate)
2 Gas module docking
3 Reflector gas selector valve (Version A only)
4 EVAC connector
5 N2O regulator
3.5.2.2 Gas module docking

The gas module docking is the T-shaped metal block on the rear side of the gas block. The gas module
docking contains channels for distributing gas from the gas block to the four gas modules. The docking is
performed in the same way as described for Version C, see section 3.5.1, Version C, on page 34.
The O-rings on the gas module docking must be replaced during Preventive maintenance + (PM+).
3.5.2.3 Reflector gas selector (Version A only)
The gas delivered to the Reflector gas module can be set to O2 or Air. This is controlled by the Reflector gas
selector (ref.no 3 in Figure 3-6 on page 37). The default setting is O2 (selector in its upper position) and O2
must be used as reflector gas.
Note: The Reflector gas selector setting must not be changed.
3.5.3 Common functionality
3.5.3.1 Anesthetic Gas Scavenging System, AGSS, outlet

The Anesthetic Gas Scavenging System, AGSS, outlet is located on the gas block and connected to the
internal EVAC system. The internal EVAC system is connected to the anesthesia gas scavenging system at
the hospital and evacuates gases from the:
 Expiratory outlet, OV12
 Fresh gas safety valve, SV1
 Drive gas safety valve, SV3
 Vaporizer 1 scavenging valve EMV10
 Vaporizer 2 scavenging valve EMV12
3.5.3.2 PC 1906 gas block

The gas distribution section also contains a PC board, PC 1906 gas block. The PC board is mounted on the
gas block. There are three pressure transducers with amplifiers on the PC board, one for each gas inlet; O2,
Air and N2O. The pressure transducers measure the pressure of the gases flowing from the inlets. PC 1906
gas block also contains an NTC resistor, a temperature sensor for measuring the temperature in the gas
distribution section. The output signal from the temperature sensor controls the fan.
3.6 Drive gas supply section (2)

The Drive gas supply section distributes O2 (O2 and air for S/N < 20 000) gas to serve as drive gas for
various purposes in the system. There are three versions, depending on the system serial number:
Version C See section 3.6.1 on page 39
Version B
See section 3.6.2 on page 41
Version A
3.6.1 Version C
Figure 3-7: Schematic view of the Version C drive gas supply section.
The main purposes are to supply drive gas to the:

 vaporizers, at a pressure of 120 kPa.
 pressure supply pilot valves, at a pressure of 240 kPa.
 O2 flush valve, at a pressure of 240 kPa.
 emergency manual ventilation.
Figure 3-8: Three-dimensional view of the Version C Drive gas supply section.
Table 3-4: Description of call-outs in Figure 3-8.
Ref. no. Description Ref. no. Description
1 Drive gas to Emergency manual 6 SV3 (drive gas safety valve)

ventilation
2 REG3 (pilot valve pressure regulator) 7 REG1 (vaporizer pressure regulator)
3 T2 (pressure test point no. 2) 8 V1 (drive gas to vaporizer)
4 PV1 pilot valve 9 T1 (pressure test point no.1)
5 Drive gas to O2 flush connector 10 OV7 (O2 drive gas one-way valve)
3.6.1.1 Vaporizer pressure regulator (REG1)

Vaporizer pressure regulator REG1 regulates the pressure in the Vaporizer drive gas delivered to the
Vaporizer pressure valves EMV9 and EMV11. REG1 is supplied with O2 at a pressure of 240 kPa from Pilot
valve pressure regulator REG3. The preset output pressure from REG1 is 120 kPa. Test point 1 (T1) is used
for testing the pressure.
REG1 must be checked during Preventive maintenance + (PM+).
3.6.1.2 Pilot valve pressure regulator (REG3)

Pilot valve pressure regulator REG3 supplies Vaporizer pressure regulator REG1 with O 2 gas. REG3 also
controls the pressure in the Pilot valve drive gas, by pressurizing EMV2 – EMV6 and EMV18. The preset
output pressure from REG3 is 240 kPa. Test point 2 (T2) is used for testing the pressure.
3.6.1.3 Drive gas one-way valve (OV7)

The purpose of the drive gas one-way valve (OV7) is to secure enough pressure for internal valves to
function in the case of a short and temporary pressure drop below 2 bar.
3.6.1.4 Drive gas safety valve (SV3)

The output channel from Pilot valve pressure regulator REG3 is equipped with a drive gas safety valve, SV3.
SV3 controls that the drive gas pressure is limited in case pressure regulator REG3 fails and the output
pressure exceeds 240 kPa, drive gas safety valve SV3 opens at a pressure of 300 kPa.
SV3 outlet is connected to the AGSS outlet to evacuate gas released from the safety valve SV3.
3.6.1.5 Pressure test points (T1 and T2)

The pressure test points T1 and T2 are used for checking and, if needed, for adjusting REG1 and REG3. T1
checks that REG1 supplies O2 at a pressure of 120 kPa ±5 kPa. Pressure test point T2 checks that the O2 is
supplied at a pressure of 240 kPa ±10 kPa.
3.6.2 Version A and Version B
Figure 3-9: Schematic view of the Version A drive gas supply section.
Figure 3-10: Schematic view of the Version B drive gas supply section.
The main purposes are to supply drive gas to:

 Vaporizer at 120 kPa (O2 and/or Air).
 Supply pilot valve at 200 kPa (O2 and/or Air).
 O2 flush valve, at a pressure of 200 kPa
 Emergency manual ventilation section.
Figure 3-11: Three-dimensional view of the Version A (left) and Version B (right) Drive gas supply sections.
1 REG1 (vaporizer pressure regulator) 6 T4 (pressure test point number 4)
2 REG2 (pilot valve pressure regulator) 7 T2/T3 (pressure test points number 2
and 3)
3 SV3 (drive gas safety valve) 8 OV7 (drive gas one-way valve O2)
4 REG3 (pilot valve pressure regulator) 9 T1 (pressure test point no. 1)
5 REG4 (instant O2 supply pressure 10 OV8 (drive gas one-way valve Air)
regulator)
3.6.2.1 Vaporizer pressure regulator (REG1)

The Vaporizer pressure regulator REG1 regulates the pressure in the Vaporizer drive gas delivered to the
Vaporizer pressure valves. REG1 is supplied with gas at 200 kPa from REG2/REG3, i.e. Air and/or O2.
The output flow from REG1 at V1 is regulated to max. 10 l/min by a flow restrictor mounted at the V1
connector. This is a safety feature in case of a major O2 leakage e.g. disconnected or broken tubing.
The preset output pressure is 120 kPa ±5 kPa. Use Pressure test point 1 (T1) to check or adjust the
pressure.
3.6.2.2 Pilot valve pressure regulator (REG2/REG3)

The Pilot valve pressure regulators REG2/REG3 regulates the pressure in the Pilot valve drive gas delivered
to the Pressure supply pilot valves (EMV2-EMV8 and EMV18). REG2 is supplied with Air while REG3 is
supplied with O2, both gases at gas inlet pressure from the Gas inlets.
The O2 supply to REG3 is routed via a gas reservoir. The gas pressure built up in this reservoir will assure
drive gas supply from REG2/REG3 also in case of short pressure drops in the gases delivered from the Gas
distribution section.
REG2 and REG3 are connected to the same output channel. With this design, the gas with the highest
output pressure will automatically be used as Pilot valve drive gas and drive gas will still be supplied if one of
the gases is lost. If the output pressure from REG2 and REG3 is the same, a mix of Air and O2 may be used
as Pilot valve drive gas.
The output from REG2/REG3 is also used to supply REG1.
The output flow from REG2/REG3 at PV1 is regulated to max. 10 l/min by a flow restrictor mounted at the
PV1 connector. This is a safety feature in case of a major O2 leakage e.g. disconnected or broken tubing.
The preset output pressure is 200 kPa ±10 kPa. Use Pressure test point 2/3 (T2/T3) to check or adjust the
pressure.
REG2/REG3 must be checked during Preventive maintenance + (PM+).
3.6.2.3 Drive gas one-way valve (OV7)

Air from REG2 and O2 from REG3 are connected to the same output channel. To prevent leakage between
the two gases (backwards through the pressure regulators), the gas channels are equipped with one-way
valves:
 O2 drive gas one-way valve OV7.
 Air drive gas one-way valve OV8.
3.6.2.4 Drive gas safety valve (SV3)

The output channel from REG2/REG3 is equipped with a Drive gas safety valve SV3. SV3 is preset to open
if the output pressure from REG2/REG3 exceeds 240 kPa ±10 kPa.
The SV3 outlet is connected to the AGS outlet to evacuate gas released from SV3.
3.6.2.5 Instant O2 supply pressure regulator (REG4)

The Instant O2 supply pressure regulator REG4 regulates the pressure in the O2 gas delivered to the O2 flush
valve and to the Emergency manual ventilation section. REG4 is supplied with O2 at gas inlet pressure from
the Gas inlets.
The preset pressure is 200 kPa ±10 kPa. Use Pressure test point 4 (T4) to check or adjust the pressure.
3.6.2.6 Pressure test points (T1 – T4)

There are three Pressure test points intended for check/adjustment of REG1–REG4:
T1 to check/adjust REG1 (120 kPa ±5 kPa).
T2/T3 to check/adjust REG2 resp. REG3 (200 kPa ±10 kPa). It is only possible to check/adjust one regulator
at a time. Disconnect the other gas at the Gas inlet during this procedure.
T4 to check/adjust REG4 (200 kPa ±10 kPa).
To check or adjust the pressure, connect the Connector kit for pressure gauge and the pressure gauge to
the Pressure test point. This connector kit will allow the approx. 100 ml/min flow required during
check/adjustment of the regulator.
3.7 Gas control section (3)

The main functions of the gas control section are:
 Controlling the pneumatic valves and pistons in the system.
 Electrically connecting and controlling all electro-mechanical valves (EMV) in the system.
 Connecting the Absorber sensor, AFGO pilot valve, Manual ventilation switch and the APL
potentiometer.
The Vaporizer valve block contains the pneumatic actuator (pistons and cylinders) of valves PV1–PV5.
The actuators are spring-loaded and closed when not activated. The valves are pneumatically controlled by
the pilot valves EMV4–EMV6.
Note: The vaporizer valve functionality is integrated in the Gas control section for S/N > 20 000. However,
for S/N < 20 000 the Vaporizer valve section is a separate section and therefore it is described separate, see
section 3.9, Vaporizer Valve Section (5), page 59.
Common functionality, see page 51.

Also see section 3.9, Vaporizer Valve Section (5),
page 59.
See page 45.
See page 48.
3.7.1 Schematic view and parts
Figure 3-12: Schematic view of the Gas control section.
Figure 3-13: Three-dimensional view of the vaporizer valve block.

1 EMV5 vaporizer 2 selection pilot valve
2 EMV11 vaporizer 2 pressure valve
3 EMV12 vaporizer 2 scavenging valve
4 EMV4 vaporizer bypass pilot valve
5 EMV6 vaporizer 1 selection pilot valve
6 EMV3 system checkout pilot valve
7 EMV10 vaporizer 1 pressure valve
8 EMV9 vaporizer 1 scavenging valve
9 EMV18 AFGO pilot valve
10 EMV2 manual ventilation pilot valve
11 PC 2057 valve drivers board
12 PC 1781 (E) expiratory pressure transducer board
Figure 3-14: Three-dimensional cross-section view of the vaporizer valve block.
Table 3-7: Description of callouts in Figure 3-14
1 PV1 Vaporizer 1 inlet valve
2 PV2 Vaporizer 1 outlet valve

3 PV3 Vaporizer 2 inlet valve
4 PV4 Vaporizer 2 outlet valve
5 PV5 Vaporizer bypass valve
6 PV7 Additional fresh gas outlet (AFGO) valve
Not shown PC 1909 Vaporizer adapter board
3.7.1.1 Manual ventilation switch

The MAN/AUTO ventilation switch is an electrical switch for selecting manual or automatic ventilation.
There are two parallel contacts in the switch. The output signals are compared to determine the position of
the switch and to detect a possible malfunction in the switch.
MAN
The Manual ventilation valve opens and the manual ventilation bag is enabled. During the MAN mode the
APL potentiometer is connected and enables APL regulation by the APL/PEEP valve.
AUTO
The Manual ventilation valve closes and the manual ventilation bag is disabled. The APL potentiometer is
disabled and the APL/PEEP valve is controlled by the PEEP setting on the control panel.
Figure 3-15: Schematic view of the Gas control section
Figure 3-16: Three-dimensional view of the vaporizer valve block

Ref. no. Description3
1 EMV 2
2 EMV 3
3 EMV 4
4 EMV 5
5 EMV 6
6 EMV 7
7 EMV 8
8 PC 1907 Valve drivers

9 PC 1781 Expiratory pressure transducer
3
See section 3.7.5.1, Pressure supply pilot valves, on page 52 for detailed description.
3.7.2 Manual ventilation switch

The MAN/AUTO ventilation switch is an electrical switch used to select manual or automatic ventilation.
Figure 3-17: The MAN/AUTO ventilation switch. Version A (left) and Version B (right)
There are two versions of the switch:

 The Version A Man/Auto switch has a bayonet mounted connector housing (ref.no.1).
 The Version B Man/Auto switch has two separate micro switches and was introduced in production
during Q3 2017.
MAN setting will open the Manual ventilation valve and connect the Manual ventilation bag to the breathing
system. This setting will also connect the APL potentiometer to enable APL regulation via the APL/PEEP
valve.
AUTO setting will close the Manual ventilation valve and disconnect the Manual ventilation bag. The APL
potentiometer will be disabled and the APL/PEEP valve will be controlled via the PEEP setting on the Control
panel.
There are two parallel contacts in the switch. The output signals are compared to determine switch position
and to detect a possible malfunction in the switch.
3.7.3 Vaporizer 1 lock pilot valve

Connected to the Vaporizer 1 locking device PP1. When an anesthetic agent is set and accepted for
Vaporizer 1, EMV7 will open and supply pressure to PP1. This will push out the pneumatic piston in PP1 and
lock the Vaporizer 1 release handle.
Note: The Vaporizer 1 lock pilot valve is deactivated for systems that are upgraded to software version 4.5.1
or higher.
3.7.4 Vaporizer 2 lock pilot valve

Connected to the Vaporizer 2 locking device PP2. When an anesthetic agent is set and accepted for
Vaporizer 2, EMV8 will open and supply pressure to PP2. This will push out the pneumatic piston in PP2 and
lock the Vaporizer 2 release handle.
Note: The Vaporizer 2 lock pilot valve is deactivated for systems that are upgraded to software version 4.5.1
or higher.
3.7.5.1 Pressure supply pilot valves

The Pressure supply pilot valves are electrically controlled pilot valves located on the vaporizer valve block.
The valves are supplied with O2 gas at a pressure of 240 kPa from gas inlet PV2 (S/N < 20 000: drive gas is
O2/Air at a pressure of 200 kPa). The valves are spring-loaded and will switch off the drive gas supply
through the valve if not electrically activated. The following PP or PV will be depressurized and the drive gas
evacuated to room Air.
The pilot valves are connected to the PC 2057/PC 1907 valve drivers board.
EMV2
Manual ventilation pilot valve EMV2 is connected to the Manual ventilation valve actuator PP3.
When the Manual ventilation switch is set to AUTO, pilot valve EMV2 opens and supplies pressure to PP3.
This will close the Manual ventilation valve inside the Patient cassette and disable the Manual ventilation
bag.
When the Manual ventilation switch is set to MAN, pilot valve EMV2 closes. The valve actuator PP3 is
depressurized and the Manual ventilation valve opens to enable the Manual ventilation bag.
EMV3
System checkout pilot valve EMV3 is connected to the System checkout valve PV6 through gas channel
PP4.
At System checkout, the Y-piece is connected to the System checkout valve PV6. During most of the
subtests the valve is closed, i.e., the Y-piece is plugged. During parts of the Gas analyzer and Vaporizer
tests the Gas analyzer is used to measure concentrations of either O 2 or anesthetic agent in the fresh gas
flow. In order to enable quicker changes of gas concentrations, thus shortening the System checkout time,
the pilot valve EMV3 opens, supplies pressure and opens PV6. This will open a bypass channel from the
Inspiratory outlet to EVAC.
EMV4
Vaporizer bypass pilot valve EMV4 is connected to the Vaporizer bypass valve PV5. If no vaporizer is
connected or a connected vaporizer is switched off, pilot valve EMV4 is open, supplies pressure and opens
PV5, allowing fresh gas to pass through the bypass channel inside the vaporizer valve section. No
anesthetic gas is added to the fresh gas. If a vaporizer is connected and activated/switched on, EMV4 is
closed and PV5 disables the bypass channel. The fresh gas flows to the vaporizer, adding anesthetic gas
before the gas mix enters the Patient cassette.
EMV5
Vaporizer 2 selection pilot valve EMV5 is connected to Vaporizer inlet valve PV3 and Vaporizer outlet valve
PV4. When anesthetic agent is present in the vaporizer, EMV5 opens and supplies pressure to PV3 and PV4
to open, and fresh gas passes through the vaporizer.
EMV6
Vaporizer 1 selection pilot valve EMV6 is connected to Vaporizer inlet valve PV1 and Vaporizer outlet valve
PV2. When anesthetic agent is present in the vaporizer, EMV6 opens and supplies pressure to PV1 and PV2
to open, and fresh gas passes through the vaporizer.
EMV18
AFGO pilot valve EMV18 controls the AFGO valve.
3.7.5.2 Vaporizer pressure and scavenging valves
EMV9 and EMV11

Vaporizer pressure valves EMV9 and EMV11 pressurize the Vaporizer chamber with drive gas at 120 kPa
when the Vaporizer is turned on.
EMV10 and EMV12

Vaporizer scavenging valves EMV10 and EMV12 open to de-pressurize the Vaporizing chamber when the
Vaporizer is turned off. The drive gas (possibly containing fumes of agent) is evacuated to EVAC via the E2
channel.
Pneumatic valves
Vaporizer 1 inlet and outlet valves (PV1 and PV2) distribute fresh gas via Vaporizer 1.
Vaporizer 2 inlet and outlet valves (PV3 and PV4) distribute fresh gas via Vaporizer 2.
Vaporizer bypass valve (PV5), distributes fresh gas when the vaporizers are disabled.
The AFGO valve PV7 controls the supply of fresh gas from the vaporizer, either to the patient cassette or to
the AFGO connector. With AFGO enabled, fresh gas will be supplied to the AFGO connector.
3.7.5.3 PC 1909 Vaporizer adapter board

Described in section 3.9.8, PC 1909 Vaporizer adapter board, page 63.
3.7.5.4 PC 2057 and PC 1907 valve driver’s board

PC 2057 (S/N > 20 000) and PC 1907 (S/N < 20 000) valve driver’s board is mounted on the vaporizer valve
block. The main functions of the PC board are:
 To supply power to the Pressure supply pilot valves EMV2–6.
 To supply power to the AFGO pilot valve EMV18.
 To supply power to the Vaporizer pressure and scavenging valves EMV9–12.
 To connect and control the:
o Manual ventilation switch
o Absorber sensor
o APL potentiometer
 To connect to PC 1781 (E) expiratory pressure transducer board.
There are two NTC resistors for measuring the temperature in the Gas control section. The output signals
are used for controlling the fan.
There are green LED lights on PC 2057/PC 1907 valve driver’s board that indicate if a control signal to a
valve is enabled. The LED lights are described in section 6.4, PC board LED indicators on page 321.
Information from the ID/Status PROM is read by the system.
3.7.5.5 PC 1781 (E) expiratory pressure transducer board

PC 1781 (E) expiratory pressure transducer board is mounted on PC 2057/PC 1907 valve drivers’ board.
The pressure transducer is pneumatically connected to the expiratory channel in the patient cassette through
a gas pressure tube, and electrically connected to PC 2057/PC 1907 valve drivers’ board. The gas is
conveyed from the patient cassette to the pressure transducer and measured with differential reference to
the ambient pressure. The output signal is proportional to the measured pressure giving a linear
measurement in the range:
–40 cmH2O to +140 cmH2O (inaccuracy ±5% or ±1 cmH2O).
3.7.5.6 APL potentiometer

The APL potentiometer adjusts the APL (Adjustable Pressure Limit) regulation of the APL/PEEP valve. APL
can be set between spontaneous breathing (fully open) and 80 cmH2O. When fully open, the internal
resistance of the system is equal to approx. 2 cmH2O.
The APL potentiometer is enabled only during Manual ventilation.
A calibration of the APL potentiometer is required e.g., after replacement. Refer to chapters Disassembling
and assembling and also Service Procedures.
3.7.5.7 O2 flush valve

The O2 flush valve (a push-button marked O2+) is used to manually supply the fresh gas with an additional
O2 gas supply of minimum 40 l/min and maximum 65 l/min. This gas supply will not go through the vaporizer.
The O2 flush gas supply will continue as long as the button is depressed.
The O2 flush valve is electrically connected to PC 1927 O2 Flush and the system detects if the O2+ push-
button is pressed. If so, ventilation continues without changes in the fresh gas delivery; the anesthetic flow is
not recalculated to adjust to the new higher flow and the vaporizer continues to deliver the same anesthetic
concentration.
If the O2 flush button is pressed during inspiration in automatic ventilation, the system will stop the inspiration
and switch to expiration with maintained PEEP level. When the O2 flush button is released, ventilation will
resume. If the button is stuck, or kept pressed, ventilation will automatically resume after 60 s.
The O2 delivery from the O2 flush valve is not dependent on any electric function and additional O 2 can be
supplied also in case of a power failure.
O2 with pressure regulated to 240 kPa by REG3 (S/N < 20 000: 200 kPa, regulated by REG4) is delivered
from the Drive Gas Supply Section to the O2 flush valve.
3.8 Fresh gas supply (4)

Fresh gas to the vaporizer is supplied from this section. The three gas modules O2, Air and N2O regulate the
fresh gas flow and mixture. Only two of them may be active at the same time, O2/Air or O2/N2O. A pressure
transducer is used to measure the fresh gas pressure in order to regulate the inspiratory pressure correctly
(in cooperation with the reflector gas module).
Common functionality, see page 57.
See page 54.
See page 56.
Figure 3-18: Schematic view of the fresh gas supply.
Figure 3-19: Three-dimensional view of the fresh gas supply.

1 Fresh gas module, O2
3 Fresh gas module, Air
4 Fresh gas module, N2O
Figure 3-20: Schematic view of the fresh gas supply.
Figure 3-21: Three-dimensional view of the fresh gas supply


2 Fresh gas module O2
3 Fresh gas module Air
4 Fresh gas module N2O
LED
Figure 3-22: Functional view of the fresh gas module.

1 Gas inlet
2 Filter. Replaced during Preventive maintenance + (PM+).
3 Temperature sensor
4 Supply pressure transducer
5 Flow transducer (delta pressure transducer and net)
6 Nozzle unit with valve diaphragm. Replaced during Preventive maintenance + (PM+).
7 Solenoid
8 Gas module key
3.8.1.1 Gas inlet

When a gas module is inserted into the gas module docking on the gas block, the gas inlet channel in the
filter cover is connected to a channel inside the gas module docking. The filter housing and the filter cover
are provided with matching guide pins. The pins prevent incorrect mounting of a filter cover on a fresh gas
module.
3.8.1.2 Filter
The filter protects the system from particles in the gas delivered to the fresh gas modules. The filter must be
replaced during Preventive maintenance + (PM+).
3.8.1.3 Temperature sensor

The temperature sensor in each gas module is placed in the gas flow and measures the temperature of the
supplied gas.
The output signal from the temperature sensor is used for compensating for the gas density variations due to
the actual temperature.
3.8.1.4 Supply pressure transducer

The Supply pressure transducer measures the pressure of the supplied gas. The output signal from the
Supply pressure transducer is amplified and used for calculating the absolute pressure of the gas to
compensate for gas density variations due to the actual pressure.
3.8.1.5 Flow transducer

The gas flows through a net (flow resistor) which causes a pressure drop. The pressure is measured on both
sides of the net and the differential pressure value is proportional to the flow through the net. The output
signal is amplified and used for regulating the gas flow through the gas module.
3.8.1.6 Nozzle unit with valve diaphragm

The plastic nozzle unit contains a valve diaphragm. The valve diaphragm is controlled by the solenoid and
regulates the gas flow through the gas module.
The nozzle unit with valve diaphragm must be replaced during Preventive maintenance + (PM+).
3.8.1.7 Solenoid
The solenoid regulates the gas flow through the gas module. The current supplied to the solenoid is
regulated so that the gas module delivers a gas flow according to settings on the control panel.
3.8.1.8 ID/Status PROM

3.8.1.9 Gas module key

Each gas module is provided with a mechanical key to prevent that a module is mounted in the wrong slot.
The mechanical key consists of a plastic guide mounted underneath the module with a corresponding guide
mounted in the gas module compartment.
3.9 Vaporizer Valve Section (5)

Fresh gas to Vaporizer is supplied to this section from Fresh Gas Supply. The Vaporizer Valve Section
delivers fresh gas either via one of the Vaporizers or through the Vaporizer bypass valve.
Note: For S/N > 20 000 the Vaporizer valve section is integrated in the gas control section, see section 3.7,
page 44.
The main functions are:
 Vaporizer 1 and 2 pressure valves (EMV9 and EMV11), to pressurize the Vaporizer liquid containers.
 Vaporizer 1 and 2 scavenging valves (EMV10 and EMV12), to de-pressurize the Vaporizer liquid
containers.
 Vaporizer 1 inlet and outlet valves (PV1 and PV2), for fresh gas distribution via Vaporizer 1.
 Vaporizer 2 inlet and outlet valves (PV3 and PV4), for fresh gas distribution via Vaporizer 2.
 Vaporizer bypass valve (PV5), for fresh gas distribution when the vaporizers are disabled.
 Vaporizer 1 and 2 locking device (PP1 and PP2), to secure the vaporizer to the vaporizer slot when the
vaporizer is activated.
Note: PP1 and PP2 are disabled for software version 4.5.1 or higher.
 PC 1909 Vaporizer adapter, to electrically connect the vaporizers.
Figure 3-23: Schematic view of the Vaporizer valve section.
Figure 3-24: Three-dimensional view of the Vaporizer valve block.
Table 3-12: Description of the callouts in Figure 3-24.
1 EMV9 vaporizer 1 pressure valve 6 PV2 Vaporizer 1 outlet valve
2 EMV10 Vaporizer 1 scavenging valve 7 PV3 Vaporizer 2 inlet valve
3 EMV11 Vaporizer 2 pressure valve 8 PV4 Vaporizer 2 outlet valve
4 EMV12 Vaporizer 2 scavenging valve 9 PV5 Vaporizer bypass valve
5 PV1 Vaporizer 1 inlet valve 10 Double channel plate
3.9.1 Vaporizer 1 and 2 pressure valves

Vaporizer 1 pressure valve EMV9 and Vaporizer 2 pressure valve EMV11 will supply Vaporizer drive gas at
120 kPa to the Vaporizer liquid containers. The valves are electrically controlled and connected to PC 1907
Valve drivers. Only one Vaporizer can be pressurized at a time.
When an anesthetic agent is set and accepted on:
 Vaporizer 1: EMV9 will open and supply Vaporizer drive gas pressure to Vaporizer 1 liquid container.
 Vaporizer 2: EMV11 will open and supply Vaporizer drive gas pressure to Vaporizer 2 liquid container.
The Vaporizer drive gas is routed to the vaporizer via the docking pipe. This pipe will mechanically open the
Docking valve OV9 when a vaporizer is docked.
3.9.2 Vaporizer 1 and 2 scavenging valves

Vaporizer 1 scavenging valve EMV10 and Vaporizer 2 scavenging valve EMV12 will de-pressurize the
Vaporizer liquid containers. The valves are electrically controlled and connected to PC 1907 Valve drivers.
When turning off the anesthetic agent delivery on:
 Vaporizer 1: EMV10 will open and de-pressurize Vaporizer 1 liquid container.
 Vaporizer 2: EMV12 will open and de-pressurize Vaporizer 2 liquid container.
The EMV10/ EMV12 outlets are connected to the AGS outlet to evacuate gas from the vaporizer liquid
containers.
3.9.3 Vaporizer inlet, outlet and bypass valves main parts

The Vaporizer inlet, outlet and bypass valves main parts are:
 Vaporizer valve block. Contains the pneumatic actuator (pistons and cylinders) of valves PV1–PV5.
The actuators are spring-loaded and closed when not activated. The valves are pneumatically controlled
by the pilot valves EMV4–EMV6.
 Double channel plate. Contain fresh gas channels, valve stems and valve seats for valves PV1–PV5.
The Double channel plate is mechanically connected to the Vaporizer valve block and each valve stem is
hooked onto its corresponding actuator.
3.9.4 Vaporizer inlet and outlet valves

The Vaporizer inlet valves and outlet valves will open the fresh gas distribution via one of the vaporizers.
 Vaporizer 1: When an anesthetic agent is set and accepted on Vaporizer 1, EMV6 will open and supply
pressure to PV1/PV2. This will open PV1/PV2 and allow fresh gas to pass through Vaporizer 1.
 Vaporizer 2: When an anesthetic agent is set and accepted on Vaporizer 2, EMV5 will open and supply
pressure to PV3/PV4. This will open PV3/PV4 and allow fresh gas to pass through Vaporizer 2.
3.9.5 Vaporizer bypass valve

Vaporizer bypass valve PV5 allows fresh gas distribution when the vaporizers are disabled.
As long as the vaporizers are switched Off, EMV4 will be open and supply pressure to PV5. This will keep
PV5 open and allow fresh gas to pass through the bypass channel inside the Double channel plate. When an
anesthetic agent is set and accepted on a vaporizer, EMV4 will close and thus close PV5.
3.9.6 Fresh gas filter

The purpose of this filter is to collect any impurities in the fresh gas.
The Fresh gas filter contains steel wool that is covered by filter cloth. The Fresh gas filter is a complete unit
and must not be disassembled.
A check of the pressure drop in the fresh gas should be performed during Preventive Maintenance. Pressure
values are stored in the Test log. If the pressure drop is outside the approved limits, the filter may be clogged
and must be replaced.
3.9.7 Vaporizer 1 and 2 locking device
Figure 3-25: Schematic view of the vaporizer locking device

1 Vaporizer
2 Pressure supply from EMV7/EMV8
3 Vaporizer 1 and 2 locking device
4 PP1/PP2
5 Vaporizer release handle
The Vaporizer locking device will lock the activated vaporizer in its position.
When an anesthetic agent is set and accepted on:
Vaporizer 1: EMV7 will open and supply pressure to Vaporizer 1 locking device PP1. This will push out the
pneumatic piston in PP1 and lock the Vaporizer 1 release handle.
Vaporizer 2: EMV8 will open and supply pressure to Vaporizer 2 locking device PP2. This will push out the
pneumatic piston in PP2 and lock the Vaporizer 2 release handle.
Note: PP1 and PP2 are disabled for software version 4.5.1 or higher.
3.9.8 PC 1909 Vaporizer adapter board

The vaporizers are connected to the system via the interconnection board PC 1909 Vaporizer adapter board.
The main functions are to:
 Connect the power transmission to the vaporizers
 Connect the communication signals to/from the vaporizers.
There are no active components on PC 1909.
For proper connection between the vaporizers and PC 1909, it is important that PC 1909 is correctly
mounted. The service tool ‘Vaporizer alignment tool’ can be used to assure proper connection between the
vaporizers and PC 1909.
Two new versions of PC 1909, Version A and Version B, with improved connection to the vaporizers was
introduced Q4 2016 for the following serial numbers:
Version A Version B
S/N < 4 265 S/N > 5 406
S/N 4 270 – 4 319 S/N 4 265 – 4 269

S/N 5 381 – 5 406 S/N 4 320 – 5 380
3.10 Vaporizer (6)

3.10.1 General description
Fresh gas is delivered either to the vaporizer, if it is turned on and contain anesthetic agent, or directly to the
patient cassette through the Vaporizer bypass valve (PV5).
There are three vaporizers available, adapted for three anesthetic agents:
 Isoflurane
 Sevoflurane
 Desflurane
The vaporizers contain different filling devices adapted to the specifications from the manufacturer of the
anesthetic agent, e.g., Getinge filling, QUIK FIL®, Baxter Safe-Fil®, etc.
Referring to Figure 3-27 on page 65, the vaporizer liquid container located inside the vaporizer contains the
liquid anesthetic agent. When the vaporizer is activated the container is submitted to a pressure of 120 kPa
from the vaporizer drive gas. The anesthetic agent is led through a channel in the base plate of the
vaporizer, passes by the vaporizer safety valve, to the vaporizer injector. The vaporizer injector opens in
controlled pulses to achieve the desired dose of liquid anesthetic agent. A nozzle plate at the top of the
vaporizer injector enables the liquid to form into a spray into the vaporizing chamber. The vaporizing
chamber is heated to promote the conversion from spray into gas. The temperature is set to 37 °C for
Desflurane and 47 °C for Isoflurane and Sevoflurane. The vaporizer pressure transducer measures the
pressure of the liquid entering the vaporizer safety valve. If the pressure is too high the safety valve cuts off
the supply of liquid as a safety measure. An optical vaporizer injection detector monitors the presence of
spray inside the vaporizing chamber.
The fresh gas delivered from the fresh gas modules enters the vaporizer through the inlet into the vaporizing
chamber where the fresh gas is mixed with the anesthetic agent.
The gas mixture is led to the Patient cassette or to the AFGO.
Sintered metal filters protect the system from particles entering into the vaporizer. An optical Liquid level
sensor measures the liquid level in the Liquid indicator glass tube. The agent is filled into the container
through a key filling valve. The mechanism is protected by a lid with a Lid sensor.
 Handle the vaporizer with care.
 Never turn a vaporizer containing anesthetic agent upside down or lay it sideways, as the agent can leak
out.
 The vaporizer is factory calibrated and leakage tested.
 The vaporizer must not be disassembled.
 In case of malfunction, repair or service must be carried out by the manufacturer only.
 Perform an RMA procedure when returning a vaporizer to the manufacturer.
 If the vaporizer is dropped, it must be serviced by the manufacturer to ensure proper functionality.
 The vaporizer must be emptied before it is returned to the manufacturer. Refer to emptying instructions
 Note that there may be small amounts of anesthetic agent in the vaporizer even when the indicator
shows that the vaporizer is empty.
 The same type of vaporizer is used in all systems.
Figure 3-26: Schematic view of the vaporizer.
Figure 3-27: Three-dimensional view of the vaporizer.

1 Safety fill valve
2 Vaporizer liquid container
3 Vaporizer pressure transducer
4 Vaporizer safety valve
5 Vaporizer injector
6 Fresh gas outlet
7 Vaporizing chamber
8 Fresh gas inlet
9 Docking valve OV9
3.10.2 EMC gasket

The EMC gasket is a metal blade located in the Vaporizer drive gas inlet. This metal blade will ensure
ground connection between the docking pipe and the vaporizer when docking the vaporizer.
3.10.3 Docking valve OV9

The Docking valve OV9 is a one-way valve located in the Vaporizer drive gas inlet. The Vaporizer drive gas
docking pipe on the Vaporizer valve section will mechanically open OV9 when the vaporizer is docked.
When the vaporizer is disconnected, OV9 will close and thus close the vaporizer pressure channel. This will
keep the Vaporizer liquid container closed.
3.10.4 Drive gas filter

The Drive gas filter protects the vaporizer from particles in the supplied Vaporizer drive gas.
3.10.5 Vaporizer lid

The Vaporizer lid covers the Safety fill valve. The lids position is monitored by a reflective object sensor (opto
switch) on PC 1931 vaporizer lid sensor board.
The lid must be closed, or near closed position, in order to activate the vaporizer. If the lid is detected as
open, the vaporizer will be de-activated and thus depressurized.
3.10.6 Safety fill valve

The vaporizer is equipped with Safety fill valves adapted to different anesthetic agents and to manufacturer’s
specifications. The Safety fill valve is designed to handle the pressure inside the vaporizer. For filling
instructions, refer to the User’s Manual.
Available filling systems are:
 Isoflurane (Getinge filling)
 Sevoflurane (Getinge filling, QUIK FIL®, and Baxter SAFE-T-SEAL®)
 Desflurane (Baxter SAFE-T-FIL®)
3.10.7 Vaporizer liquid container

The Vaporizer liquid container volume is 300 ml but is indicated as full at 260 ml. This volume (260 ml)
corresponds to 100% as monitored by the electronic Level indicator. Do not overfill!
When the vaporizer is activated, the Vaporizer liquid container will be pressurized to 120 kPa by the
Vaporizer drive gas.
3.10.8 Level indicator

The anesthetic agent level in the liquid container is indicated in two different ways:
1. A float in the level meter tube shows the anesthetic agent level. The float is visible in the level meter tube
through the illuminated vaporizer window. The four white LEDs that light up the window are located on
PC 1912 vaporizer liquid detector board.
2. The anesthetic agent level is also monitored by LEDs on PC 1912 vaporizer liquid detector board
(sending) and PC 1913 vaporizer liquid level detector board (receiving). These LEDs are mounted on six
different levels corresponding to 5%, 10%, 25%, 50%, 75% and 100%. With this design, the following
anesthetic agent levels will be shown on the Control Panel:
 Level <5%
 Level 5–10%
 Level 10–25%
 Level 25–50%
 Level 50–75%
 Level 75–100%
 Level > = 100%
This monitoring function is controlled by PC 1910 vaporizer controller board.
The vaporizer liquid level alarms are:
 Low priority clinical alarm when the liquid level is below 10%
 Medium priority clinical alarm when the liquid level is below 5%.
The vaporizer will not switch off when empty, but it is not recommended to run the vaporizer dry.
Note: There may be small amounts of anesthetic agent remaining in the vaporizer, although the indicator
shows that the vaporizer is empty.
3.10.9 Liquid agent filter

The anesthetic agent supplied to the Vaporizer injector passes the Liquid agent filter. This protects the
injector from particles down to 130 µm in the anesthetic agent.
3.10.10 Drain plug

The vaporizer is equipped with a Drain plug. This Drain plug is intended for Getinge service only and must
not be removed during field service. Use a bottle with filling adapter to empty the vaporizer. Refer to
emptying instructions in the User’s Manual.
3.10.11 Gas escape pipe

Gas bubbles in the anesthetic agent may interfere with the function of the Vaporizer injector. To remove such
bubbles, the vaporizer is equipped with a Gas escape pipe. This pipe will evacuate gas bubbles from the
agent before they reach the injector. The pipe ends at the gas escape pipe filter at the top end of the
container.
3.10.12 Gas escape pipe filter

The Gas escape pipe filter is mounted at the end of the Gas escape pipe at the top end of the container. It
will filter agent that may escape “backwards” through the pipe, e.g., when filling or moving the vaporizer.
3.10.13 Vaporizer pressure transducer

The Vaporizer pressure transducer is an electronic device that monitors the anesthetic agent’s pressure. The
transducer is located next to the Vaporizer safety valve.
3.10.14 Vaporizer safety valve

The Vaporizer safety valve SV2 is located between the Vaporizer liquid container and the Vaporizer injector
VI. It is placed very close to the injector to minimize the volume between them.
The Vaporizer safety valve is closed when the vaporizer, or the complete system, is in Off or Standby. The
safety valve will also close, and stop the anesthetic agent delivery, in case of technical errors in the
vaporizer.
PC 1910 vaporizer controller board contains valve drivers for the Vaporizer safety valve.
3.10.15 Vaporizer injector

The Vaporizer injector VI supplies anesthetic agent into the fresh gas. Depending on the set and the
measured concentration, it injects the agent in very short pulses:
 The injector delivers 0.8 µl agent/ms (µl = microliter, ms = millisecond).
 Pulse time varies between 2 and 10 ms (5 and 10 ms for DES).
 Volume injected agent/pulse is thus between 1.6 and 8 µl (4.0 and 8.0 µl for DES).
The injected agent speed is approx. 10 m/s. A built-in filter in the injector separates particles down to 32 µm
in the anesthetic agent.
As the injector technology creates a high and disturbing sound, the vaporizer is designed to reduce this
sound. The injector itself has a flexible mounting inside the vaporizer. The injector is also equipped with a
free weight to reduce the injector’s oscillation.
PC 1910 vaporizer controller board contains drivers for the Vaporizer injector.
3.10.16 Vaporizer injection detection

The Vaporizer injection detection contains two PC boards:
 PC 1914 vaporizer spray LED board
 PC 1926 vaporizer spray detector board
These PC boards are mounted over the injector nozzle to detect when an anesthetic agent is injected into
the Vaporizing chamber. PC 1914 vaporizer spray LED board contains a sending IR diode and PC 1926
vaporizer spray detector board contains the corresponding receiving IR photo transistor.
3.10.17 Vaporizing chamber

The Vaporizer injector VI supplies anesthetic agent into the Vaporizing chamber. Fresh gas to vaporizer,
supplied by the Fresh gas modules, is routed into the Vaporizer via the Vaporizer inlet valve PV3. The fresh
gas enters the Vaporizing chamber where it is mixed with the vaporized anesthetic agent.
The mixed Fresh gas from vaporizer exits the Vaporizer via the Vaporizer outlet valve PV4 and is routed to
the Patient cassette (or AFGO).
3.10.18 Vaporizing chamber temperature sensor

The Vaporizing chamber is heated by the Vaporizer heating foil and the vaporizing chamber temperature is
monitored by the Vaporizing chamber temperature sensor. The function contains two separate sensors; both
located on PC 1910 vaporizer controller board.
If the vaporizing chamber temperature is above 60 °C, or if the temperature measured by the two sensors
differ more than 5 °C, the vaporizer will be switched off (electrically and pneumatically) and a Technical
alarm is activated.
3.10.19 Vaporizer heating foil

The electric Vaporizer heating foil is mounted on the Vaporizing chamber. Heating of the Vaporizing
chamber will make vaporizing of the anesthetic agent more effective.
PC 1910 vaporizer controller board contains drivers for the heating foil.
3.10.20 Vaporizer heating foil temperature sensor

The Vaporizer heating foil temperature is monitored by the Vaporizer heating foil temperature sensor. The
sensor is located in the heating foil.
If the heating foil temperature is above:
 140 °C, the heating foil will be switched off. No alarm is activated. When the temperature drops, the
heating foil will be switched on again.
 170 °C, the vaporizer will be switched off (electrically and pneumatically). A Technical alarm is activated.
3.10.21 Fresh gas inlet and outlet filters

The Fresh gas inlet filter is a dust filter that protects the Vaporizing chamber inlet from particles down to
550 µm.
3.10.22 PC 1910 vaporizer controller board

PC 1910 vaporizer controller board is the main board in the vaporizer. It supplies power and controls the
vaporizer functions. Main functions are:
 Microcontroller
 Flash memory for configuration
 Sensor amplifiers/conditioners
 Signal measurements
 Driving/controlling IR diodes
 Drivers for injector, safety valve and heating foil.
 The chamber and heating foil temperature sensors.
 Power supply and reference voltages for the vaporizer functions
 The Flash memory of the CPU on PC 1910 vaporizer controller board contains ID information that can
be read by the system.
Note: Vaporizer software is stored on PC 1910 vaporizer controller board. A Technical alarm will be
displayed if the System software in System is incompatible to the System software in the connected
vaporizer. Refer to section 5.5, System software and vaporizer software installation on page 248. The
Vaporizer software will be copied to the CompactFlash card on PC 1922 panel board during System
software installation. The Vaporizer software can then be reinstalled/updated either by a System software
installation or by a separate Vaporizer software installation.
3.10.23 PC 1911 vaporizer connector board

The vaporizer is connected to the system via the interconnection board PC 1911 vaporizer connector board.
There are no active components on PC 1911 vaporizer connector board.
3.10.24 PC 1912 vaporizer liquid detector board

PC 1912 vaporizer liquid detector board contains LEDs and IR diodes.
 Four white LEDs illuminate the vaporizer window.
 Six sending IR diodes used to monitor the anesthetic agent level in the level meter tube. The diodes
position corresponds to 5%, 10%, 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% contents in the container according to the
level meter tube. Receiving transistors located on PC 1913 vaporizer liquid level detector board. The
agent level can be shown on the Control Panel.
3.10.25 PC 1913 vaporizer liquid level detector board

PC 1913 vaporizer liquid level detector board contains six receiving transistors corresponding to the sending
IR diodes on PC 1912 vaporizer liquid detector board.
3.10.26 PC 1914 vaporizer spray LED board

PC 1914 vaporizer spray LED board contains one sending IR diode to detect anesthetic agent spray
produced by the Vaporizer Injector. Receiving transistor located on PC 1926 vaporizer spray detector board.
3.10.27 PC 1926 vaporizer spray detector board

PC 1926 vaporizer spray detector board contains receiving transistor corresponding to the sending IR diode
on PC 1914 vaporizer spray LED board.
3.10.28 PC 1931 vaporizer lid sensor board

PC 1931 vaporizer lid sensor board contains a reflective object sensor (opto switch) to detect that the
vaporizer lid is closed or near closed position.
3.11 Safety valve (7)

The safety valve protects the patient from high pressures. If the pressure is too high the safety valve opens
and fresh gas is let out to EVAC to decrease the inspiratory pressure.
The safety valve SV1 is a spring-loaded solenoid valve. The valve is connected to the channel delivering
fresh gas from the vaporizer to the patient cassette. The safety valve membrane is easy to remove for
inspection and cleaning.
A gas channel for reflector gas is integrated in the safety valve but the channel is not connected to the safety
valve function.
The safety valve solenoid is electrically controlled by PC 1984/PC 1919 expiratory channel board.
When the solenoid is not electrically activated, the spring inside the valve housing closes the safety valve.
When the solenoid is electrically activated, the safety valve will open and excess gas is led to EVAC
enabling a decrease of pressure in the patient circuit.
Figure 3-28: Schematic view of the Safety valve.
Figure 3-29: Three-dimensional view of the Safety valve.

1 Reflector gas channel (from gas module)
2 Fresh gas channel (from vaporizer)
3 Safety valve membrane housing
4 Connector to EVAC
5 Connector to expiratory outlet on cassette
6 Fresh gas safety valve
Opening conditions for the safety valve:

 If the measured pressure in the patient circuit is 5 cmH2O above the upper pressure limit. This condition
is controlled by the Monitoring subsystem. Applicable only in AUTO mode.
 If the measured pressure in the patient circuit is 7 cmH2O above the upper pressure limit. This condition
is controlled by the Control subsystem. Applicable only in AUTO mode.
 If the measured pressure in the patient circuit is above:
o 20 cmH2O if the APL is set between SP and 12 cmH2O. Redundant opening condition at 25 cmH2O.
Applicable only in MAN mode.
o Set APL +7 cmH2O if APL is set between 13 and 49 cmH2O. Redundant opening condition at
12 cmH2O. Applicable only in MAN mode.
o Set APL +10 cmH2O if APL is set between 50 and 80 cmH2O. Redundant opening condition at
15 cmH2O. Applicable only in MAN mode.
 High continuous pressure-alarm (PEEP level +15 cmH2O for more than 15 s). Applicable only in AUTO
mode.
 If the measured pressure in the patient circuit is above 117 ±7 cmH2O. This condition is controlled by
calibrated electronics and calibration to 117 ±3 cmH2O is performed during each System checkout. This
condition will also open the APL/PEEP valve and is an extra safety function and the situation will
normally not occur. Applicable in AUTO and MAN mode.
3.12 Patient cassette (8)

The patient cassette is the main interface for distributing gas to and from the patient. The patient cassette is
a removable easy-to-clean unit.
The gas flow to the patient is controlled by the gas modules and the unidirectional valves in the patient
cassette.
The gas flow is controlled with regard to:
 The selected breathing system
 The selected ventilation mode
 The breath cycle
Figure 3-30: Schematic view of the patient cassette.
Figure 3-31: Three-dimensional view of the patient cassette.

1 Inspiratory valve containing valve seat and valve cage.
2 Silicone gasket towards sample filters for Insp. gas sampling (S1). Currently not used.
3 Silicone gasket towards sample filters for Insp. gas sampling return (R1). Currently not used.
4 Silicone gasket towards sample filters for Insp. pressure sampling (Pi).
5 Silicone gasket towards sample filters for Exp. pressure sampling (Pe).
6 Silicone gasket towards sample filter for Exp. gas sampling return (R3)
7 Expiratory valve containing valve seat and valve cage.
8 Silicone gaskets towards Reflector.
9 Silicone gaskets towards Safety valve
10 Expiratory outlet one-way valve OV12
11 Manual ventilation valve membrane
12 Absorber valves. Replaced during Preventive maintenance + (PM+).
13 APL/PEEP valve membrane. Replaced during Preventive maintenance + (PM+).
3.12.1 Inspiratory and expiratory valves

The unidirectional inspiratory and expiratory valves control the gas flows in the cassette. The ceramic valve
discs are visible inside the transparent plastic covers. The discs are kept in position by a valve cage. The
disc and valve cage is a complete unit.
3.12.2 Absorber bypass valves

The absorber connections (Inlet and Outlet) are equipped with spring-loaded cut-off valves that will
automatically close the absorber connections when the CO 2 absorber is lowered. With the absorber
connections closed, the bypass channel inside the cassette will be open.
The CO2 absorber valves must be replaced during Preventive maintenance + (PM+).
3.12.3 Expiratory flow transducer

The Expiratory flow transducer is a measuring device for the expiratory gas flow, using ultrasound technique
with two ultrasonic transducers/receivers. The measuring process is controlled from PC 1984/PC 1919
expiratory channel board.
During controlled ventilation, the flow transducer measures the expiratory flow. During manual ventilation it
also measures the inspiratory flow. The flow transducer is bi-directional, and practically unaffected by
different gas concentration. The flow transducer delivers an analog voltage which is proportional to the flow.
All necessary compensations are made by the subsystem itself.
The Expiratory flow transducer contains two identical transducers. One of the transducers sends out
ultrasonic sound downstream that is received by the other transducer. The time from sending to receiving
ultrasonic sound in downstream expiratory gas flow is measured. Then the ultrasonic sound direction is
switched; the transducer earlier receiving is sending out ultrasonic sound upstream the expiratory gas flow.
The ultrasonic sound is received by the transducer now acting as a receiver. The time from sending to
receiving ultrasonic sound in upstream expiratory gas flow is measured. The time difference between the
downstream and the upstream time measurements provides flow information. The measuring rate is 200 Hz.
To reduce water condensation in conjunction with the transducers, the flow transducer is heated. A heating
foil is mounted close to each transducer.
The expiratory gas temperature will differ within the breathing system; the gas will e.g., be cooled down in
the Volume reflector. These temperature variations will affect the gas flow calculations and thus also the
volume measuring. A temperature sensor, located close to the expiratory inlet, measures the temperature of
the gas flow from the patient.
3.12.4 Manual ventilation valve

The Manual ventilation valve connects the Manual ventilation bag. The Manual ventilation valve consists of a
membrane in the cassette that is operated by the axis of the Manual ventilation valve actuator PP3.
The valve is fully open as long as no Pilot valve drive gas is supplied to PP3 via EMV2. A magnet mounted
on the PP3 axis will attract the metal washer on the membrane. This will keep the membrane in contact with
the axis to prevent valve closing in case of negative pressure.
3.12.5 APL/PEEP valve

The APL/PEEP valve limits the Airway pressure to the level set by the operator.
The APL/PEEP valve consists of a membrane in the cassette that is operated by the axis of the APL/PEEP
valve coil. The axis can be activated (pushed up) into desired position in two different ways:
 During automatic and manual ventilation, power supply to the coil is regulated so that the Airway
pressure in the patient system is kept on the APL/PEEP level set by the operator.
 During emergency manual ventilation, the axis is pushed up into desired position (Mechanical APL level
set by the operator) by the Emergency APL actuator mounted underneath the APL/PEEP valve coil. The
axis is pushed up by a mechanical mechanism.
The APL/PEEP valve is fully open as long as the axis is not activated.
The APL/PEEP valve membrane must be replaced during Preventive maintenance + (PM+).
There is also a counter for the breathing cycles. Operating capacity for the membrane is estimated to
10 000 000 breathing cycles. If this limit is passed, or if the membrane for some reason has become
defective, it must be replaced. Remaining capacity (in %) for the membrane can be shown in the Service &
Setting’s Status window. The remaining capacity meter must be reset after replacement of the membrane.
3.12.6 Expiratory outlet one-way valve

The exhaust gas leaves the cassette via the Expiratory outlet one-way OV12 valve mounted in the expiratory
outlet.
This valve prevents:
 Gas from EVAC to mix with the breathing gas. This may create an incorrect gas mix and a cross-
contamination risk.
 Backflow via EVAC during spontaneous breathing.
 Pressure drops that may cause pressure triggering.
3.12.7 PC 1917 expiratory channel cassette board

The PC 1917 expiratory channel cassette board is a connection board, integrated into the Patient cassette,
for the Expiratory flow transducer, temperature sensors and for the heating foil. It connects to PC 1918
expiratory channel connector board mounted in the Patient cassette lid.
Information from breath cycle counter is stored on PC 1917 expiratory channel cassette board. This
information is used to calculate remaining capacity for the Expiratory membrane (APL/PEEP valve
membrane).
3.13 Patient cassette lid (9)

The patient cassette lid contains:
 The Inspiratory sample filter holder
 The Expiratory sample filter holder
 The Patient cassette tubing for gas analyzer and pressure transducers.
 PC 1918 expiratory channel connector board.
Equipped with a release button and requires a two-

Version A handed grip is to open and close.
See Figure 3-33, left.
Version B See Figure 3-33, right.
Figure 3-32: Schematic view of the patient cassette lid.
Figure 3-33: Three-dimensional view of the patient cassette lid. Version A (left) and Version B (right).
1 Expiratory sample filter holder.
2 Inspiratory sample filter holder.
3 PC 1918 expiratory channel connector board.
The patient cassette lid is mounted with hinges on the system. The lid must be opened to remove the patient
cassette. When the lid is opened the gas sampling and electrical connection to the patient cassette are
disconnected.
3.13.1 Inspiratory and Expiratory sample filter holders

As the gas in the breathing system may be contaminated, the gas analyzer and the pressure transducers are
protected with filters. The filters are connected to the sampling channels in the cassette when the Patient
cassette lid is closed.
To reduce water condensation in conjunction with the filters, the filter holder seats are heated. Heating foils
are mounted in the filter holder seats.
The filters with holders are designed as two complete units and must be replaced during Preventive
maintenance + (PM+).
3.13.1.1 Inspiratory sample filter holder
For System versions 3.0 (or above) the Control gas analyzer is disabled and the Inspiratory sample filter
holder is used for inspiratory pressure only.
 Systems that are field upgraded to System version 3.0 can use either the Version A filter holder with
three filters or the Version A filter holder with S1 and R1 plugged.
 Systems that are delivered from factory with System version 3.0 (or above) will not include the Control
gas analyzer and must use the Version A filter holder with S1 and R1 plugged.
Systems using Patient cassette lid Version B must use the Version B filter holder.
3.13.1.2 Expiratory sample filter holder

The Expiratory sample filter holder has two filters for the PGA return and for Expiratory pressure. The same
filter holder can be used in Patient cassette lid Version A and Version B.
3.13.2 PC 1918 Expiratory channel connector board

The PC 1918 Expiratory channel connector board is mounted inside the Patient cassette lid. It connects to
PC 1917 mounted in the Patient cassette. It will also power supply the heating foils at the Sample filter
holders.
3.14 Gas analyzer section (10)

The System is equipped with a side-stream multigas analyzer intended to monitor respiratory and anesthetic
gases sampled from the breathing circuits. The gases that can be measured (in any combination) are:
 O2
 CO2
 N2O
 Isoflurane
 Sevoflurane
 Desflurane
All gases in the gas sample, except O2, are identified and measured by an infrared sensor.
O2 is identified and measured by a paramagnetic O2 sensor. This sampling flow is returned to the system (via
R3 into the Patient cassette) after being analyzed.
Information from the Gas analyzer section is calculated and shown on the Control Panel.
Versions Comments
Patient gas analyzer AION ADS with external patient O2
PGA Version A sensor.
Patient gas analyzer AION Platinum with integrated patient O2
PGA Version B sensor. Requires SW system version 4.04.01 or above. Was
introduced during Q4 2017.
Common functionality, see section 3.14.2 on page 81
3.14.1 Gas analyzer section - main components

This section describes the main components in the Gas analyzer section, depending on the PGA used.
There are two versions of the PGA:
 Version A: PGA AION ADS with external Patient O2 sensor.
 Version B: PGA AION Platinum with integrated Patient O2 sensor. This version was introduced during
Q4 2017 and requires System software version 4.04.01 or above.
Note: The O2 inlet and outlet ports are not used in this configuration and must be interconnected with
short tubing.
AION Platinum including mounting plate can be ordered as spare part for replacing the PGA AION ADS and
external O2 sensor. Refer to instructions in chapter 4, Disassembling and assembling, on page 147.
Figure 3-34: Schematic view of the gas analyzer section with the PGA AION. Version B (left) and Version A (right).
Figure 3-35: Functional view of the Gas analyzer section with PGA AION Platinum (Version B).
Figure 3-36: Exploded view of the PGA AION

Platinum (Version B).
Note: The Patient gas analyzer AION is a complete unit and must not be disassembled.
Table 3-18: Description of callouts in Figure 3-35 and Figure 3-36.
1 Gas measurement bench (GMB) 10 Water trap receptacle
2 Pump module (PM) 11 Water trap
3 AION PC Board 12 Purge line
4 Return line 13 Sampling line
5 Tubing for O2 inlet/outlet interconnection 14 Nafion tube
6 Patient O2 sensor 15 Zero Calibration Valve (ZCV)
7 Base module (BM) 16 Patient gas analyzer AION Platinum
8 Zero calibration gas tubing 17 Pneumatic module
9 Zero calibration gas filter
Figure 3-37: Functional view of the Gas analyzer section with PGA AION ADS (Version A).
Figure 3-38: Exploded view of the PGA AION ADS (Version A).
Note: The Patient gas analyzer AION is a complete unit and must not be disassembled.
Table 3-19: Description of callouts in Figure 3-37 and Figure 3-38.

1 Patient gas analyzer AION ADS 10 Zero calibration gas tubing
2 Purge Flow Valve (PFV) 11 Zero calibration gas filter
3 Gas measurement bench (GMB) 12 Water trap receptacle
4 Pump module (PM) 13 Water trap
5 AION PC Board 14 Purge line
6 Return line 15 Sampling line
7 O2 buffer volume 16 Nafion tube
8 Patient O2 sensor 17 Zero Calibration Valve (ZCV)
9 Base module (BM) 18 Pneumatic module
3.14.2 PGA - Common functionality
3.14.2.1 Pneumatic module

The Pneumatic module connects the Pump module, the Gas measurement bench, and the O 2 sensor
pneumatically. AION Platinum includes an O2 sensor manifold to connect the O2 sensor with the Pneumatic
module.
The Pneumatic module also includes solenoid valves:
 Zero calibration valve (ZCV)
 Purge flow valve (AION ADS only)
Zero calibration valve (ZCV): To establish a gas zero concentration reference, ambient Air is routed
through the Gas measurement bench via the Zero calibration valve. The ambient gas intake is located
behind the Vaporizer locking handle. A particle filter is connected to the tubing.
Purge flow valve (AION ADS only): During normal sampling condition, when a water trap is used, there is
always a small purge of approximately 10% of the total flow through the AION. This flow is created by the
purge flow restrictor.
The automatic zero calibration of the AION will be performed:
 During warm-up after cold start (power on).
 At a temperature change >1 °C (in the GMB) during ISO/Full accuracy mode.
 Every 4 hours during Full accuracy mode.
 At gas span calibration.
 When a new agent is identified.
If there is an obstruction in the sampling line, this will be detected by the flow sensor in the pump as a
decreased flow.
If the total flow from the two water trap outlets drops below 40 ml/min for more than one second, the forced
purge flow-function is activated during 12 s. The forced purge flow forces water and secretions in the
sampling line into the water trap container.
If the total flow remains below the limit value, the forced purge flow-function will be repeated up to four times
until further forced purge cycles are inhibited and an occlusion alarm is activated. The purge function is
automatic and is not possible to start manually.
3.14.2.2 Gas measurement bench GMB

The CO2, N2O, Isoflurane, Desflurane and Sevoflurane are identified and measured in the Gas Measurement
Bench (GMB).
Figure 3-39: Functional and three-dimensional view of the gas measurement bench.
The GMB consists of an IR light source, a rotating filter wheel with optical filters connected to a DC motor,
the gas measurement chamber and an IR light detector.
The measurement of CO2, N2O and the anesthetic agents in the sampling gas is based on the fact that the
different gas components absorb infrared light at specific wavelengths. The filter wheel has eight optical
filters to allow an accurate analysis of any mixture of these gases.
As O2 does not absorb infrared light to the same extent as other breathing gases, O 2 is measured by the
separate O2 sensor utilizing the paramagnetic properties of the O2 molecule. However, the presence of O2 in
the gas mixture causes some interference to other gas measurements. Therefore, information from the O2
sensor is used to compensate for that interference.
The GMB also includes a PC board with an EEPROM and components for pressure and temperature
measurements. Factory calibration data are stored in the EEPROM and the gas calibration data is updated
in the EEPROM during the gas span calibration.
3.14.2.3 Pump module PM

The Pump Module with a double-action membrane pump has a built-in flow control with its own flow sensor.
The design of the pump makes it very reliable with no maintenance necessary.
The water trap must be in place in order for the system to set the default sampling flow rate to 200 ml/min
(corresponding to 225 ml/min, BTPS condition).
During the forced purge flow, the pump capacity will be increased to create the forced purge flow. This will
not change the sampling flow rate.
3.14.2.4 Base module BM

The Base module includes a PC board with CPU and memory functions. This PC board controls the gas
sampling system and performs calculations from the measured parameters.
The analog signals from the GMB and from the O2 sensor are converted to digital signals in the AION CPU.
The integrated O2 sensor in AION Platinum already delivers digital signal.
The AION PC board has a 5 V DC/DC converter for its internal power supply.
3.14.3 PGA - O2 Sensor

The O2 sensor is a paramagnetic sensor that measures the O2 content in the sampled gas mixture. The
sensor uses the paramagnetic susceptibility of oxygen, a physical property that distinguishes oxygen from
most other common gases.
There are two different versions of the O2 sensor used in the system:
Figure 3-40: Three-dimensional view of the O2 sensor. Servomex PM111E external O2 sensor used in PGA AION ADS
(left) and Hummingbird Paracube Sprint integrated O2 sensor used in PGA AION Platinum (right).
3.14.3.1 Functional theory
Figure 3-41: Functional view of the Gas measurement bench.

A Suspension balanced
B Oxygen introduced to the sensor
C Suspension stabilized by feedback current
1 Current measurement
2 Amplifier
3 Photo diodes
4 Light source
5 Mirror
6 Conductive wire with two spheres filled with N2
O2 is distinguished from most other common gases by its paramagnetic properties. This fact is used by the
paramagnetic O2 sensor.
The sensors incorporate two nitrogen-filled glass spheres mounted on a strong, noble metal taut-band
“suspension assembly”. This assembly is suspended in a symmetrical non-uniform magnetic field. When the
surrounding gas contains paramagnetic oxygen, the glass spheres are pushed further away from the
strongest part of the magnetic field. The strength of the torque acting on the suspension is proportional to the
oxygen content of the surrounding gases.
The measuring system is “null-balanced”. The zero position of the suspension assembly, as measured in
nitrogen, is sensed by a differential photo-sensor assembly that receives light reflected from a mirror
attached to the suspension assembly. The output from the photo-sensor is processed and then fed back to a
coil wound around the suspension assembly to achieve a null-balanced position. When oxygen is introduced
to the sensor, the torque acting upon the suspension assembly is balanced by a restoring torque due to the
feedback current in the coil.
The feedback current is directly proportional to the volume magnetic susceptibility of the sample gas and
hence, after calibration, to the partial pressure of oxygen in the sample. A voltage output is derived which is
proportional to the feedback current. In addition, the electromagnetic feedback stabilizes the suspension
(heavily damping oscillations).
The paramagnetic technology is non-depleting, which means that there are no consumable parts. This
ensures consistent performance over time. The selectivity of the paramagnetic measurement for oxygen
means that there is no interference from other respiratory gases. The small volume chamber allows a rapid
gas exchange, giving the capability for fast response oxygen measurement.
3.14.4 Water trap receptacle
Figure 3-42: Three-dimensional view of the water trap receptacle

1 Purge inlet
2 Sample inlet
3 Upper switch
4 Lower switch
5 Nafion tube
6 Purge tube
7 Control signal cable
8 PC board
The Water trap is connected to the Water trap receptacle. There are two gas connections on the receptacle;
one for the sampling gas flow and one for the purge gas flow.
The gas sample is routed via a bacteria filter and a Nafion™ tube. The Nafion tube equalizes the moisture
content and the temperature in the sampled gas to that of the ambient Air. This is to reduce the influence on
the measurements from humidity and to prevent from water condensation inside the sampling system.
Two electrical switches on the water trap receptacle detect if a water trap is present. If no water trap is
connected or if a water trap without container is connected, both switches are inactive. The pump, and thus
the gas flow through the Patient gas analyzer, is automatically stopped to prevent contamination.
The control signal cable from the water trap receptacle PC board is connected to the Main backplane.
The Nafion tube must be replaced during Preventive maintenance + (PM+).
3.14.5 Water trap
Figure 3-43: Three-dimensional view of the water trap.
The DRYLINE™ water trap protects the gas analyzer system from condensed water, secretions, bacterial
contamination and dust. It consists of two parts, a filter housing with hydrophobic anti-bacterial filter and a
container for separated waste.
The filter housing has one gas sample inlet (W1) to be connected to the sampling line.
In the water trap, the sampling flow is divided in two parts:

 Sampling gas flow (W2), approx. 90%.
 Purge gas flow (W3), approx. 10%. This flow will create a negative pressure inside the water trap in
order to collect the water droplets.
There are two outlets in the filter housing, one for each gas flow.
3.15 CO2 absorber (11)

In a circle system the expiratory gas must be cleaned before it is mixed with fresh gas and delivered to the
patient. The CO2 absorber absorbs the CO2 from the expiratory gas, the CO2 absorber also handles water
that may condensate inside the CO2 absorber.
There are two versions of the absorber locking mechanism.
Serial number Comment

Has three positions for the absorber locking switch:
Version A
 Unlocked. Absorber is not connected and the expiratory
gas is bypassed.
 Bypassed. Absorber is connected but the expiratory gas is
bypassed.
 Locked. Absorber is connected and the expiratory gas is
routed through the absorber.
See Figure 3-45, left.
Has two positions for the absorber locking switch:

Version B
 Unlocked. Absorber is not connected and the expiratory
gas is bypassed.
 Locked. Absorber is connected and the expiratory gas is
routed through the absorber.
See Figure 3-45, right.
Figure 3-44: Schematic view of the CO2 absorber.
Figure 3-45: Three-dimensional view of the CO2 absorber. Version A (left) and Version B (right).
1 CO2 absorber
2 Absorber locking switch actuator
3 Absorber locking switch in locked position
4 Absorber locking switch in bypass position (Version A only)
5 Absorber locking switch in unlocked position
3.15.1 Safety aspects

 Always use Getinge approved CO2 absorber.
 Never open the disposable CO2 absorber to replace absorbent.
 Always use Getinge approved absorbent in the reusable CO2 absorber.
 Use gloves when handling absorbent to avoid unnecessary skin contact.
The complete disposable CO2 absorber and absorbent from the reusable CO2 absorber must be discarded
as hazardous waste when consumed.
Further important information regarding the CO2 absorber can be found in the User’s Manual. Note that the
reusable CO2 absorber has a separate User’s Manual.
WARNING! Absorbent material may be very corrosive and must be handled with care. Avoid
coming into contact with dust or particles.
3.15.2 CO2 absorber

There are two different versions of the CO2 absorber:
 CO2 absorber, disposable (single use)
 CO2 absorber, reusable.
Expiratory gas from the Volume reflector is routed through the CO2 absorber and thus purified before it is
mixed with Fresh gas from vaporizer and delivered to the patient.
The CO2 absorber will also handle water that may condensate in the absorber.
Furthermore, the color of the absorbent will change when consumed (from white to blue/violet).
The disposable CO2 absorber contains 700 ml of absorbent.
The absorber is placed in the absorber compartment and lifted into locked position by a spring-loaded
locking actuator that is manually actuated by the absorber locking switch.
3.15.3 Absorber sensor

The Absorber sensor is a micro switch that is activated by the locking actuator in the absorber lift.
The Absorber sensor is electrically connected to PC 2057/PC 1907 valve drivers board.
The sensor indicates when:
 Absorber is not connected; locking switch position Unlocked (or Bypassed).
 Absorber is connected; locking switch position Locked.
3.16 Volume reflector (12)
Designed in dark grey material.
Designed in dark, opaque material.
The volume reflector stores the expired gas from the patient allowing for partial re-administration of the gas
to the patient through the circle system.
CAUTION: As the Volume reflector and the Reflector socket are exposed to the patients expired
gas it must be included in the routine cleaning procedure, refer to the User’s Manual.
Figure 3-46: Schematic view of the volume reflector.
Figure 3-47: Three-dimensional view of the volume reflector.

Figure shows version for S/N < 20 000.
1 Inlet/outlet for patient gas
2 Inlet/outlet for reflector gas
The purpose of the Volume reflector is to store the patient’s exhaled gas so that the gas can be purified in
the CO2 absorber for partial re-use during next inspiration phase.
The inside of the reflector is designed as a long gas channel with a volume of 1.2 liter (1.3 liter including
Reflector adaptor).
During the expiration phase, exhaled gas from the patient will be routed into the reflector gas channel.
During the inspiration phase, reflector gas from the Reflector gas module will be routed into the other end of
the reflector gas channel. The reflector gas will, like a piston, push the expiratory gas out from the reflector
and through the CO2 absorber. Fresh gas according the Control Panel setting will then be mixed with the
purified gas to form the inspiratory gas to the patient.
3.16.1 Reflector adaptor

The Reflector adaptor (volume reflector adaptor) connects the Patient cassette to the Volume reflector. The
adaptor will also secure the reflector in position when mounted.
3.16.2 PC 1781 (R) reflector pressure transducer board

PC 1781 (R) reflector pressure transducer board is mounted on and electrically connected to PC 1900 main
backplane board. The transducer is pneumatically connected to the Reflector gas channel, prior to the
Patient cassette, via a gas pressure tube.
The gas pressure, conveyed via the pressure tube, is led to and measured by its differential pressure
transducer. With differential reference to the ambient pressure, the output signal is proportional to the
measured pressure thus giving a linear measurement in the range:
3.17 Reflector gas supply (13)

Reflector gas to the Volume reflector is supplied from this section. The gas is routed via the Patient cassette.
The Reflector gas module regulates the reflector gas flow. A pressure transducer is used to measure the
Reflector gas pressure in order to regulate the Inspiratory pressure correctly (in cooperation with the fresh
gas modules).

Systems with S/N < 4 000 have a Reflector gas selector.
See section 3.17.1.1 on page 93.
Common functionality, all other sections.
Figure 3-48: Schematic view of the reflector gas supply.
Figure 3-49: Three-dimensional view of the reflector gas supply.

1 Reflector gas module
2 Reflector gas module
3.17.1 Reflector gas module

The Reflector gas module (no. 2 in Table 3-24) is connected to the Gas module docking. The Gas module
docking contains gas channels for distribution of gas to the Reflector gas module.
Depending on fresh gas settings, gas from the Reflector gas module will be routed into the Volume reflector.
The reflector gas will, like a piston, push the expiratory gas out from the reflector and through the CO2
absorber.
The gas modules are provided with a mechanical key to prevent that the module is mounted in the wrong
slot. The key consists of a plastic guide mounted underneath the module and a corresponding guide
3.17.1.1 Reflector gas selector (Version A only)
Figure 3-50: Three-dimensional view showing

the Reflector gas selector (ref.no.3)
The gas delivered to the Reflector gas module can be set to O2 or Air. This is controlled by the Reflector gas
selector. The default setting is O2 (selector in its upper position) and O2 must be used as reflector gas.
Note 1: The Reflector gas selector setting must not be changed.
Note 2: The Reflector gas selector is removed on systems with S/N 4001 and above.
3.17.1.2 Common functionality
Figure 3-51: Functional view of the reflector gas module.

1 Gas inlet
2 Filter. Replaced during Preventive maintenance + (PM+).
3 Temperature sensor
4 Supply pressure transducer
5 Flow transducer (delta pressure transducer and net)
6 Nozzle unit with valve diaphragm. Replaced during Preventive maintenance + (PM+).
7 Solenoid
8 Gas module key
3.17.2 Gas inlet

When a gas module is inserted into the gas module docking on the gas block, the gas inlet channel in the
filter cover is connected to a channel inside the gas module docking. The filter housing and the filter cover
are provided with matching guide pins. The pins prevent incorrect mounting of a filter cover on a fresh gas
module.
3.17.3 Filter
The filter protects the system from particles in the gas delivered to the fresh gas modules. The filter must be
replaced during Preventive maintenance + (PM+).
3.17.4 Temperature sensor

The temperature sensor in the fresh gas module is placed in the gas flow and measures the temperature of
the supplied gas.
The output signal from the temperature sensor is used for compensating for the gas density variations due to
the actual temperature.
3.17.5 Supply pressure transducer

The Supply pressure transducer measures the pressure of the supplied gas. The output signal from the
Supply pressure transducer is amplified and used for calculating the absolute pressure of the gas to
compensate for gas density variations due to the actual pressure.
3.17.6 Flow transducer

The gas flows through a net, a resistance, which causes a pressure drop. The pressure is measured on both
sides of the net and the differential pressure value is amplified.
3.17.7 Nozzle unit with valve diaphragm

The plastic nozzle unit contains a valve diaphragm. The valve diaphragm is controlled by the solenoid and
regulates the gas flow through the gas module.
The nozzle unit with valve diaphragm must be replaced during Preventive maintenance + (PM+). (After
replacement, allow the diaphragm to adapt to the valve seat.)
3.17.8 Solenoid
The solenoid regulates the gas flow through the fresh gas module. The current supplied to the solenoid is
regulated so that the gas module delivers a gas flow according to settings on the control panel.
3.17.9 ID/Status PROM

3.17.10 Gas module key

Each gas module is provided with a mechanical key to prevent that a module is mounted in the wrong slot.
The mechanical key consists of a plastic guide mounted underneath the module with a corresponding guide
3.18 Manual ventilation section (14)

The Manual Ventilation Section contains:
 The Manual ventilation valve actuator PP3 that will open or close the Manual ventilation valve in the
cassette.
 The Manual ventilation bag with tubing used for manual ventilation of the patient.
Figure 3-52: Schematic view of the manual ventilation section.
Figure 3-53: Three-dimensional view of the manual ventilation section.

1 Manual ventilation valve actuator PP3
2 Manual ventilation valve (in Patient cassette).
3 Connector for Manual breathing bag (on Patient cassette).
3.18.1 Manual ventilation valve actuator PP3

The Manual ventilation valve actuator PP3 is a pneumatic piston connected to and controlled by the Manual
ventilation pilot valve EMV2:
 When the Manual ventilation switch is set to AUTO, EMV2 will open and supply pressure to PP3. This
will close the Manual ventilation valve inside the Patient cassette and disable the Manual ventilation bag.
 When the Manual ventilation switch is set to MAN, EMV2 will close and de-pressurize PP3. This will
open the Manual ventilation valve inside the Patient cassette and enable the Manual ventilation bag.
A magnet mounted on the PP3 axis will attract the metal washer on the Manual ventilation valve membrane.
This will keep the membrane in contact with the axis to prevent valve closing in case of negative pressure.
3.18.2 Manual ventilation bag

The Manual ventilation bag with tubing is connected to the Patient cassette. The size of the breathing bag
and tube may differ based on the size of the patient.
It is recommended to use Getinge’s manual breathing bag that is made of a soft, flexible and latex free
material for easy, pliable filling.
3.19 Emergency manual ventilation section (15)

The description of the Emergency Manual Ventilation Section below contains also information on a few parts
used during normal ventilation.
In case of a total power failure (i.e., mains power and power backup battery) or system failure, this system
will allow the patient to be manually ventilated. The emergency ventilation system comprises:
Emergency ventilation control panel with:
 Emergency ventilation switch
 Oxygen flow; flow meter for oxygen gas supply during emergency manual ventilation
 Mechanical APL knob; for APL setting during emergency manual ventilation
 Emergency APL actuator to control the APL valve inside the cassette during emergency manual
ventilation
 APL/PEEP valve coil that is mechanically controlled by the Emergency APL actuator during emergency
manual ventilation and electrically controlled during normal AUTO and MAN ventilation
 Oxygen connector block.
Note: When Emergency ventilation is switched Off, the Mechanical APL must be set to minimum.
There are three different versions of the Emergency manual ventilation section:
Version C Same as Version B, but the tubing from OV13 goes directly to
the Gas control section. See section 3.19.1 on page 98.
Version B See section 3.19.1 on page 98.
Version A See section 3.19.2 on page 101.
3.19.1 Version C4 and version B
Figure 3-54: Schematic view of the emergency ventilation section, Version C (left) and Version B (right)
Figure 3-55: Three-dimensional view of the emergency ventilation section, Version B.

1 Emergency ventilation switch
2 Oxygen flow meter
3 Mechanical APL
4 Oxygen connector block with OV13 Oxygen flow one-way valve
5 APL/PEEP valve coil
6 Emergency APL actuator
4
Same as Version B, but the tubing from OV13 goes directly to the Gas control section.
7 Bleed-flow device (not shown in illustration, located below VAP2)
3.19.1.1 Emergency ventilation panel
Figure 3-56: Three-dimensional view of the emergency ventilation panel.

2 Oxygen flow meter
3 Mechanical APL knob
3.19.1.2 Emergency ventilation switch

On/Off switch for emergency ventilation. With the switch set to On, oxygen will be supplied to Oxygen flow
and to Emergency APL actuator.
The switch is also electrically connected to PC 1928 power on/off board. If the emergency ventilation system
is activated while the anesthesia system is in operation, the anesthesia system will be shutdown.
3.19.1.3 Oxygen flow meter

The oxygen flow meter, graded up to 10 l/min, is used to supply oxygen to the breathing system during
emergency manual ventilation. Max. flow is 16–20 l/min. The gas is connected to the O2 supply to Fresh gas
tubing via the Oxygen connector block.
3.19.1.4 Mechanical APL knob

The mechanical APL knob is used to set APL during emergency manual ventilation. Minimum setting
corresponds to approx. 6 cmH2O. The gas flow is increased by turning the APL knob clock-wise.
The Mechanical APL knob is connected to a wheel inside the Emergency ventilation panel. One end of a
metal wire is wound around this wheel. The other end of the wire is wound around a cylinder on the
Emergency APL actuator. Thus, turning the Mechanical APL knob, the rotation will be transmitted from the
knob to the cylinder on the Emergency APL actuator.
The cylinder on the Emergency APL actuator is connected to the movable APL/PEEP valve coil axis. The
axis will be pushed up towards the APL/PEEP valve diaphragm when rotating the cylinder (the rotation
created when turning the Mechanical APL knob clockwise) to set the APL value.
The cylinder is spring-loaded to assure that it returns towards neutral position when turning the knob
counterclockwise.
3.19.1.5 Oxygen flow one-way valve

The Oxygen flow one-way valve OV13 is mounted in the Oxygen connector block. The valve prevents
leakage from the O2 flush valve into the Emergency Ventilation section.
3.19.1.6 APL/PEEP Valve Coil

The movable axis of the APL/PEEP valve coil controls the opening of the APL/PEEP valve in the cassette by
pushing the valve membrane into desired position. The valve coil axis can be activated (pushed up) into
desired position in two different ways:
 During automatic and manual ventilation, power supply to the coil is regulated so that the Airway
 During emergency manual ventilation, the axis is pushed up into desired position by the Emergency APL
actuator mounted underneath the APL/PEEP valve coil. The setting is controlled by the Mechanical APL
knob.
3.19.1.7 Emergency APL actuator

The Emergency APL actuator consists of a cylinder mounted underneath the APL/PEEP valve coil. During
emergency manual ventilation, the setting on the Mechanical APL knob will be transmitted to the Emergency
APL actuator by a metal wire that is wound around this cylinder.
The cylinder on the Emergency APL actuator is connected to the movable APL/PEEP valve coil axis. The
axis will be pushed up towards the APL/PEEP valve diaphragm when rotating the cylinder (the rotation
created when turning the Mechanical APL knob clockwise) to set the APL value.
O2 pressure (240/200 kPa depending on model) is connected to the Emergency APL actuator. This O2
pressure, supplied when the Emergency ventilation switch is set to On, is required to engage the Emergency
APL actuator with the axis. Turning the Mechanical APL knob will thus not affect the APL/PEEP valve as
long as the Emergency ventilation switch is set to Off.
The cylinder is spring-loaded to assure that it returns towards neutral position when turning the knob
counterclockwise.
3.19.1.8 Bleed-flow device

The bleed-flow device is mounted on the inside of the right front cover and is connected with tubing. The
device will evacuate pressure from the Emergency APL actuator. Without this bleed-flow, a possible leakage
in the Emergency APL actuator may create a pressure that unintentionally engages the Emergency APL
actuator with the axis in the APL/PEEP valve coil.
3.19.2 Version A
Figure 3-57: Schematic view of the emergency ventilation section, Version A.
Figure 3-58: Three-dimensional view of the emergency ventilation section, Version A.
2 Oxygen flow
3 Emergency APL pressure regulator REG5
4 Oxygen connector block
5 Oxygen flow one-way valve OV13 and Oxygen flow filter
6 High-pressure bleed-flow device
7 APL/PEEP valve coil
8 Emergency APL actuatorIEC
3.19.2.1 Emergency ventilation switch

On/Off switch for emergency ventilation. With the switch set to On, oxygen will be supplied to Oxygen flow
and to Emergency APL pressure regulator.
The switch is also electrically connected to PC 1928 Power On/Off. If the emergency ventilation system is
activated while the anesthesia system is in operation, the anesthesia system will be shutdown.
3.19.2.2 Oxygen flow

The oxygen flowmeter, graded up to 10 l/min, is used to supply oxygen to the breathing system during
emergency manual ventilation. Max. flow is 16–20 l/min. The gas is connected to the O2 supply to Fresh gas
tubing via the Oxygen connector block.
3.19.2.3 Emergency APL pressure regulator

Emergency APL pressure regulator REG5 is used to set APL during emergency manual ventilation. Minimum
setting corresponds to approx. 6 cmH2O.
The force on the spring inside the regulator can be adjusted with the setting knob:
No mechanical pressure on the spring will keep the regulator closed. The supply valve inside the regulator
will be pushed upwards by the gas pressure and close the regulator gas inlet. No gas pressure will be
supplied to the Emergency APL actuator.
Raised mechanical pressure on the spring, regulated by the setting knob, will push down the diaphragm
assembly and slightly open the supply valve. A gas pressure will now inflate the mushroom valve in the
Emergency APL actuator. The mushroom valve will mechanically regulate the APL/PEEP valve. Excess
output pressure exhausts through the vents until it reaches the set point.
When Emergency ventilation is switched Off, the Mechanical APL must be set to minimum. If the Mechanical
APL is set to a higher pressure, the Emergency APL actuator may not be de-pressurized. This may affect the
normal APL function.
3.19.2.4 Oxygen connector block

The Oxygen connector block is a metal housing that comprises a number of O2 connections. It is also
housing for the Oxygen flow one-way valve OV13, Oxygen flow filter and the High-pressure Bleed-flow
device.
3.19.2.5 Oxygen flow one-way valve

The Oxygen flow one-way valve OV13 is mounted on the Oxygen connector block. The valve prevents
leakage from the O2 Flush valve into the Emergency Ventilation section. A leakage from O2 Flush
(malfunction in OV13) may result in a leakage through the Excess pressure vent in REG5.
3.19.2.6 Oxygen flow filter

A filter (mesh net) inside the Oxygen connector block will prevent loose particles (e.g. particles from a broken
one-way valve OV13) from entering the O2 supply to Fresh gas tubing.
3.19.2.7 Bleed-flow devices

There are two Bleed-flow devices in the Emergency Manual Ventilation section:
 High-pressure bleed-flow device mounted on the Oxygen connector block. A possible leakage from the
Emergency ventilation switch will be routed to the O2 flush channel via this device.
 Low-pressure bleed-flow device mounted behind Vaporizer slot 2 locking handle (connected with tubing).
Will evacuate pressure from the Emergency APL actuator. Without this bleed-flow, a possible leakage
from the Emergency APL pressure regulator REG5 may inflate the Emergency APL actuator and
interfere with the APL/PEEP setting. Such leakage will increase the pressure in the patient circuit and
will be detected by the System checkout if it is outside the SCO limits. The bleed-flow will also make the
setting of REG5 more stable.
3.19.2.8 APL/PEEP valve coil

The movable axis of the APL/PEEP valve coil controls the opening of the APL/PEEP valve in the cassette by
pushing the valve membrane into desired position. The valve coil axis can be activated (pushed up) into
desired position in two different ways:
 During automatic and manual ventilation, power supply to the coil is regulated so that the airway
 During emergency manual ventilation, the axis is pushed up into desired position by the mushroom valve
inside the Emergency APL actuator mounted underneath the APL/PEEP valve coil. The setting is
controlled by the Mechanical APL knob
3.19.2.9 Emergency APL actuator

The Emergency APL actuator consists of a mushroom valve mounted underneath the APL/PEEP valve coil.
During emergency manual ventilation, the mushroom valve will be inflated by the gas pressure from REG5.
The movable APL/PEEP valve coil axis will be pushed up into desired position by the inflated mushroom
valve.
Gas pressure (supplied by REG5) to inflate the mushroom valve is regulated to correspond to the
Mechanical APL level set by the operator.
3.19.2.10 Gas analyzer zero calibration gas intake

There are two calibration gas intakes located behind the Mechanical APL knob in the Emergency Ventilation
section:
 Patient gas analyzer AION zero calibration gas intake. Ambient air is supplied to the AION gas analyzer
to establish a gas zero concentration reference.
 Control gas analyzer AION zero calibration gas intake. Not used from System version 3.0 (or above).
Control gas analyzer AION was deactivated/removed from System version 3.0.
3.20 System checkout valve section (16)

The System checkout valve section contains the pneumatic System checkout valve PV6. This valve is used
during the System checkout (SCO). It will either plug the Y-piece during leakage checks or allow a gas flow
through the system during other parts of the SCO.
Some systems (S/N 1500-2000) were manufactured without System checkout valve and may still be in use,
see section 3.20.2, Systems without System checkout valve.
Figure 3-59: Schematic view of the system checkout valve.
Figure 3-60: Three-dimensional view of the system checkout valve.

Table 3-30: Description of callouts in Figure 3-60
1 System checkout valve PV6 including System checkout actuator PP4
2 Drive gas connector to PP4
3 EVAC connector
4 Test plug. Connector for Y-piece during SCO
The System checkout valve PV6 is a spring-loaded pneumatic valve. The valve can be either:
 Closed, controlled by the internal spring.
 Open, controlled by the System checkout pilot valve EMV3. The 240 kPa (S/N < 20 000: 200 kPa) drive
gas from EMV3 is connected to the drive gas connector and the System checkout actuator PP4 will open
the System checkout valve PV6.
During System checkout (SCO), the patient tubing’s Y-piece must be connected to the System checkout
valve.
 When the valve is closed, the connector will act as a plug. With a plugged Y-piece, the SCO leakage
checks can be performed.
 When the valve is open, a fresh gas flow through the system will be allowed. The fresh gas from the Y-
piece will pass through the System checkout valve and be routed to the EVAC reservoir. This is used,
e.g., during gas analyzer checks.
The valve is only used during System checkout. During normal operation, the valve is kept closed by its
spring.
3.20.1 Test plug

During System checkout (SCO), the patient tubing’s Y-piece must be connected to the Test plug. With a
plugged Y-piece, the SCO leakage checks can be performed.
3.20.2 Systems without System checkout valve

Due to a change in the SCO valid in System version 2.1 and System version 2.2, the System checkout valve
was no longer required and the design of the System checkout section was changed. The System checkout
valve PV6 was removed and the connecting gas channels were plugged. Instead, the Safety Valve was used
to de-pressurize the system during SCO.
From System version 3.0 (or above), and removal of the Control gas analyzer, further changes in System
checkout were required and the System checkout valve PV6 was reintroduced.
Units with S/N 1500–2000 were manufactured without the System checkout valve PV6 and the System
checkout pilot valve EMV3. As the System checkout valve is a prerequisite for System version 3.0 (or above)
these units must be retrofitted with a System checkout valve. All required parts are available in a spare parts
kit.
3.21 EVAC (17)

EVAC is a passive gas scavenging system that evacuates all excess gas, breathing gas as well as drive gas
from the system. The AGSS outlet is connected to the hospitals anesthesia gas scavenging system that will
supply the negative pressure required for gas evacuation.
Figure 3-61: Schematic view of the EVAC.
System c hec kout val ve
Figure 3-62: Three-dimensional view of the EVAC.

1 EVAC reservoir
2 Exhaust gas from patient cassette
3 Tubing between flow indicator and AGSS outlet
4 Evacuation from drive gas safety valve
5 AGSS flow indicator
6 Tubing between reservoir and flow indicator
7 Evacuation from vaporizer scavenging valve
8 EVAC filter (will be implemented during Q3 2019)
3.21.1 EVAC reservoir

Excess gas is collected and evacuated from the system by means of a negative pressure created by the
hospitals anesthesia gas scavenging system. To handle larger gas volumes, the system is equipped with an
EVAC reservoir. This plastic container has an Air intake towards ambient Air to avoid excessive high
negative pressures in the system. The Air intake is provided with an EVAC filter to protect the reservoir from
contamination.
For systems with EVAC filter and filter holder the filter must be replaced during Preventive maintenance +
(PM+). Filter and filter holder can be ordered for systems produced before Q2 2019.
3.21.2 AGSS flow indicator

The AGSS flow indicator is connected between the AGSS outlet and the EVAC reservoir. When the
hospital’s anesthesia gas scavenging system is connected and active, the float in the indicator will show if
the flow is sufficient. A flow of at least 25 l/min is required for sufficient gas evacuation.
If the flow is too high, consider installing an EVAC flow restrictor. Contact MCC HSC or your local Getinge
representative for more information.
CAUTION: Ensure that the EVAC system is correctly connected after any service intervention.
Running the system with a poor connection may result in anesthetic agent being emitted into the
operation environment. Leakages in the EVAC system will not be detected by the System
checkout.
3.22 Control panel (18)

The Control Panel is the main user interface during operation of the system. Setting of different parameter
input values is made with the help of the following different interface devices:
 Rotary knob (rotary encoder with switch).
 Membrane buttons.
 Screen with active touch pads.
There are three existing versions of the Control Panel, which can be distinguished from each other by means
of the Control Panel serial number, see Figure 3-63.
Figure 3-63: Placing of the Control Panel serial number.
Control Panel serial number Comment

Control Panel including Display with LED and integrated
Version C. S/N > 320000. backlight inverter.
Version B. S/N 300576 – 320000. Control Panel including Display with LED.
Version A. S/N < 300576. Control Panel including Display with lamps.
Note: The Display/Touch screen for versions A and B is obsolete and is not available as spare part. If
replacement is required, then the LED Display kit (corresponding to Version C) must be installed. This kit
contains all parts required to mount an LED Display in an older version of the Control Panel.
3.22.1 Control Panel – main components
Figure 3-64: Schematic view of the control panel.

Figure 3-65: Three-dimensional view of the control panel.

1 Display/Touch screen
2 Membrane buttons
3 Rotary encoder
3.22.1.1 PC 1924 display connection board

PC 1924 display connection board connects most of the parts inside the Control Panel. It connects also the
Control panel cable to PC 1922 panel board.
This cable supplies:
 Power +12 V UNREG. A converter on PC 1924 display connection board supplies +12 V UNREG, +5 V
and +3.3 V to PC 1925 display CPU board and to the TFT display.
 CAN bus. There is no CAN signal handling on PC 1924 display connection board, the CAN bus is
connected to PC 1925 display CPU board.
 Audio. The Audio signal is amplified on PC 1924 display connection board and connected to the
loudspeaker inside the Control Panel. As safety features, the power supply to the loudspeaker is
measured and furthermore a microphone on PC 1924 display connection board monitors the
loudspeakers audio signal.
 Display. The Display signal is connected to the TFT display in the Display/Touch screen.
 Backlight inverter functions (from revision 08).
Version C
Version C requires PC 1924 of revision 08 (or above) and System software version 3.00.04 (or above).
3.22.1.2 Display/Touch screen

The Display is a 15" TFT (Thin Film Transistor) screen for color display of picture- and alphanumeric data.
The screen brightness can be manually adjusted using the membrane button Screen layout. Selectable
brightness levels are 100%, 75% or 50%.
The Touch screen implies the touch function of the screen and is interactive with information shown on the
Display.
The LEDs inside the Display/Touch screen are driven from circuits integrated in PC 1924 display connection
board. Using Service & Settings, a backlight time meter can be shown. The time meter must be reset after
replacement of the LEDs Display/Touch screen.
Version C
The LEDs inside the Display/Touch screen are driven from circuits integrated in PC 1924. It is estimated that
the Version C Control Panel will maintain acceptable brightness during the unit’s lifetime. Use Service &
Settings to show a backlight time meter. This time meter is intended primarily for the Version A, but can be
used also on Version C. The time meter must be reset after replacement of the LEDs Display/Touch screen.
Version B
The LEDs inside the Display/Touch screen are driven from PC 1963 Backlight inverter. It is estimated that
the Version B Control Panel will maintain acceptable brightness during the unit’s lifetime. Use Service &
Settings to show a backlight time meter. This time meter is intended primarily for the Version A, but can be
used also on Version B. The time meter must be reset after replacement of the LEDs Display/Touch screen.
Version A
The Backlight lamps inside the Display/Touch screen are driven from the Backlight inverter. Estimated
lifetime (with acceptable brightness level) for the lamps is 30.000 hours. Use Service & Settings to show a
backlight time meter. This time meter must be reset after replacement of the lamps.
3.22.1.3 Backlight inverter
Version C
The backlight inverter function is integrated in PC 1924 display connection board. A separate PC board is
not required.
Version B
PC board with driving stage for backlight (LEDs) mounted inside the Display/Touch screen. The supply
voltage delivered by PC 1963 Backlight inverter is 12 V.
Version A
PC board with driving stage for backlight (lamps) mounted inside the Display/Touch screen. The supply
voltage delivered by the Backlight inverter is 660 V.
WARNING! The PC board generates 660 V. All personnel must exercise extreme caution if fault
tracing or adjustments are performed with power supply connected and with covers removed.
3.22.1.4 PC 1925 display CPU board

Some features included on PC 1925 display CPU board are:
 Microprocessor on this board includes control of the functions of the Control Panel.
 Membrane buttons are mounted on this board.
 The Rotary knob is connected to and managed by this board.
 The adjustable screen brightness function is controlled by this board.
 Malfunctions in the display, the loudspeaker and the microphone is detected and communicated by this
board.
The CAN communication with the Control Panel is controlled by this board.
The Flash memory of the CPU on PC 1925 display CPU board contains ID information that can be read by
the system.
Information from the backlight time meter is stored on PC 1925 display CPU board.
Note: The System software must be reinstalled if PC 1925 display CPU board is replaced.
3.22.1.5 Rotary encoder

Rotary encoder is an optical rotary encoder with switch that is connected to and managed by PC 1925
display CPU board.
3.22.1.6 Loudspeaker
The Loudspeaker generates sound, e.g. alarm. The loudspeaker generates different tones with individual
sound volumes. At start-up and during System checkout the function of the loudspeaker is monitored by the
microphone on PC 1924 display connection board. During operation, it is continuously monitored through
current sensing.
3.23 Power section (19)

The main functions of the power section are:
 To supply DC voltage to the subsystems.
 To manage Power On/Off including emergency ventilation switch.
 To manage the Power backup battery functions.
 To monitor the temperature inside the system by controlling the fan.
Version B  Uses PC 2063

 Integrated LED driver
Version A  Uses PC 1923
 Separate LED driver
Figure 3-66: Schematic view of the power section, Version B.
Figure 3-67: Three-dimensional view of the power section, Version A.

1 Battery connector
2 Battery sense connector
3 Gas cylinder pressure connector
4 PC 1903 External connectors (behind panel)
5 Lamp connector 24 V (PC 1903 rev 07 or above)
6 Lamp connector 12 V
7 AC/DC Power inlet
8 AC/DC Converter
9 PC 1923 Power control
3.23.1 AC/DC converter

The AC/DC converter is a complete unit adapted for the System.
The AC/DC converter supplies 12 V_AC_DC to PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board. The output from the
AC/DC converter is 11–16 V DC and the output level is controlled by an analog 0–5 V signal.
Mains power is supplied to the AC/DC converter via the AC/DC power inlet, which is equipped with two 6.3 A
fuses.
3.23.2 PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board

PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board main functions are:
 Manage Power On/Off including Emergency ventilation switch. The Power button and the Emergency
ventilation switch are connected to PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board.
o When the system is switched On with the Power button, PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board
selects power source and will power up the different subsystems.
o When the system is switched Off, or when Emergency ventilation is switched On, PC 2063/PC 1923
power control board will shut down power supply the different subsystems.
 Supply DC voltage to the different subsystems, refer to diagram below.
 Manage the Power backup battery functions. In case of mains power failure, PC 2063/PC 1923 power
control board will switch to battery power supply. During battery operation, battery status (requested by
Monitoring subsystem) will be shown on the Control Panel. The system will be switched off when battery
voltage is below 10.8 V. When mains power is connected, PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board will
handle charging of the battery.
 Monitor the temperature inside the system and as a result, control Fan 1. A number of temperature
sensors inside the unit, including a sensor integrated in the Power Control CPU, measures the
temperature. This is further described in section 3.23.5, Fan on page 114.
The Flash memory of the CPU on PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board contains ID information that can be
read by the system.
Information required by the system is stored on PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board. Refer to section
4.4.5, Information stored on the PC boards on page 149.
Note: The System software must be reinstalled if PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board is replaced.
3.23.3 Start-up safety feature

A prerequisite for starting-up the system is that the fan rotates. This safety feature is implemented to
ventilate the unit prior to start-up in case of an increased O2 concentration inside the unit (e.g., due to a small
O2 leakage). A tacho sensor integrated into the fan monitors the fan rotation. This sensor signal is used by
PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board to control a relay on PC 1938 mains connection board and a
transistor switch located on PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board. Only if the fan is detected to rotate,
mains power will be supplied from PC 1938 mains connection board to the AC/DC converter (which in turn
will power up PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board), and battery voltage will be connected via the
transistor switch to the remaining circuitry on PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board.
If the fan stops rotating during the Power On start-up phase, both power supplies will be disconnected.
Approximately 40 s after Power On, supervision of the fan rotation is overtaken by the Monitor subsystem
and PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board will no longer be able to disconnect the power supplies if the fan
stops. In case Power Off is made, PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board will again supervise the fan
rotation and disconnect the power supplies if the fan is detected to stop.
Note: In order to be able to turn on the system, it is necessary that the power backup battery is connected. A
battery supply voltage of at least 8 V is required. This initial supply from the battery is needed for initiation of
the Power On start-up functionality described above.
3.23.4 PC 1903 external connectors board

PC 1903 external connectors board is a connector board for:
 Power backup battery. Connects power supply from the battery. This power supply is short-circuit
protected by fuses F1 and F2 (25 A).
o On PC 1903 revision 04 or lower, the fuses can be replaced. Always replace both fuses at the same
time. It is however recommended to replace the complete PC 1903.
o On PC 1903 revision 05 or higher, the fuses are fixed and cannot be replaced. In case of a blown
fuse, PC 1903 must be replaced.
Note: Before replacing PC 1903 external connectors board (or fuses), the root cause to the blown fuse
must be remedied.
 Battery sense. Battery sense signal cables are used for measuring the battery voltage and the
temperature of the battery/battery compartment. The Battery sense cable connected to the negative
battery pole includes a thermistor.
 Cylinder pressure. Connects the pressure transducers in the Backup gas rack in order to display the
cylinder gas pressure on the Control Panel.
 LED lamp. Supplies power to the LED lamp mounted inside the Control Panel swivel arm.
o PC 1903 revision 06 (or below) is equipped with one connector (P40) to supply 12 V to the old
version of the LED lamp and its LED driver, see section 3.23.7 on page 115.
o PC 1903 revision 07 (or above) is equipped with two connectors to supply 12 V (P40) to the old
version of the LED lamp or 24 V (P43) to the new version of the LED lamp.
The LED driver/dimmer functions are now integrated on PC 1903 and an external LED driver is not
required.
Includes an ID PROM. The ID information can be read by the system.
3.23.5 Fan
The Fan is located behind the fan filter below the CO2 absorber. The fan forces cooling Air into the unit.
A tacho sensor integrated into the fan provides the fan rotation signal. The system can be switched On only
if fan rotation is detected. Refer to section 3.23.2, PC 2063/PC 1923 on page 113 for further information.
The fan speed is regulated by temperature sensors inside the unit:
 Low fan speed. The fan runs with low speed if the temperature at the NTC resistor on PC 2057/PC
1907 valve drivers board is below 40 °C and the temperature at the Power control CPU is below 50 °C.
 High fan speed. The fan runs with high speed if the temperature at the NTC resistor on PC 2057/PC
1907 valve drivers board is above 40 °C or the temperature at the Power control CPU is above 50 °C.
The fan also runs with high speed during the first 20 s after mains voltage is detected, or Power On is
made when no mains power supply cable is connected.
The fan filter must be replaced during Preventive maintenance + (PM+).
3.23.6 Power backup battery

There are two types of power backup batteries:
 Sealed acid-lead rechargeable

 12V DC, 38AH
 Replace every three year5
 12V DC, 18AH
 Replace every four year5
In case of mains power failure, PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board will switch to battery power supply.
During battery operation, battery backup time will be shown on the Control Panel. Operating time on backup
battery is approx. 90 minutes. The system will be switched off when battery power is below 10.8 V.
The battery is continuously charged when mains power is connected to the system. Charging time for a
depleted battery (both types) is approx. 6 hours.
During storage keep the system connected to the mains power supply so that the batteries maintain a full
charge. For additional storage information, refer to the User’s Manual.
3.23.7 LED lamp

The LED lamp is a reading lamp integrated into the Control Panel swivel arm. The brightness can be
adjusted with the DIM knob on the swivel arm.
The old version of the LED lamp is equipped with a separate LED driver that is supplied with 12 V from PC
1903. This version of the LED lamp is obsolete and no longer available.
If replacement of the LED lamp is required, the new 24 V version must be used. Such replacement requires
several parts:
LED lamp 24 V version including DIM knob with cable.
PC 1903 revision 07 (or above). Equipped with connector P43 to supply 24 V to the LED lamp. The LED
driver/dimmer functions are now integrated on PC 1903 and an external LED driver is not required.
3.24 Power connection (20)

The Power Connection main parts are:
 Mains power inlet.
 PC 1938 Mains connection including mains power inlet fuses F5/F6 and lift fuses F1/F2.
 Isolation transformer fuse.
 Relay to distribute mains power when fan rotation is detected.
The Power Connection main functions are:
 Connection and distribution of fused mains power to the different units that require mains power.
 Connection of the optional Extra mains power outlets and its associated Isolation transformer incl. fuse
(circuit breaker).
 Handle the start-up safety feature that supplies mains power to the Power section only if Fan works.
5 The lifetime of the battery may be reduced if it is used frequently to supply power or if the battery
temperature is above 40˚C.
Figure 3-68: Schematic view (left) and three-dimensional view (right) of Power connection with PC 1938
1 PC 1938 Mains connection
2 Fuse F6 Mains power inlet fuse
3 Fuse F5 Mains power inlet fuse
4 Fuse F1 Lift fuse (C30 only)
5 Fuse F2 Lift fuse (C30 only)
6 Equipotential terminal (earth)
7 Mains power inlet
8 Isolation transformer fuse
3.24.1 Mains power inlet

Mains power supply to the system is connected with a cable to the Mains power inlet. The connector is not
equipped with fuses, the mains power fuses are located on PC 1938.
Cable listed below has passed EMC requirements specified in IEC 60601-1-2.
 Mains power cable 100-120 V: 3.5 m

 Mains power cable 220-240 V: 3.5 m
3.24.2 PC 1938 mains power connection board

PC 1938 Power Connection main functions are:
 Mains power inlet fuses F5 and F6 are mounted on PC 1938. The fuses are rated:
o For 230 VAC systems: 4 AL (4 AH)
o For 110 VAC systems: 8 AL (6.3 AH).
 Connection and distribution of mains power to the different units that require mains power:
o Power section. Start-up safety features on PC 1938 checks that Fan 1 works (fan rotation is detected
by its tacho sensor). If fan rotation is detected, relays on PC 1938 will be switched on and mains
power will be supplied to the Power section to allow system startup.
o Extra mains power outlets including power supply to a Patient monitor. These power outlets are
supplied by an Isolation transformer.
 Lift. Mains power supply fuses F1 and F2 for the lift are mounted on PC 1938. The fuses are rated:
o For 230 VAC systems: 1.6 AL (1.6 AH)
o For 110 VAC systems: 3.15 AL (3.15 AH).
Note: For fuses F1, F2, F5 and F6 in newer systems, the fuse types and values are changed to adapt to IEC
60601-1. New types and values are stated within brackets. When replacing any of these fuses, always use
fuse type and value according to the markings on the concerned system.
3.24.3 Isolation transformer fuses

Power supply to the Isolation transformer is protected by fuses. There are different types of fuses used
depending on the version of Extra mains power outlet that is connected. Refer to section 3.33, Extra mains
power outlets (Option) (29) on page 133 for information regarding the fuses.
3.25 Power On/Off and Vaporizer PC board section (21)

 The Power On/Off section main parts are:
o The PC 1927 O2 flush board
o The PC 1928 power on/off board.
o The Power on/off button.
 The Power On/Off and Vaporizer PC board section main functions are:
o To detect if O2 flush is used.
o To show vaporizer status with the Vaporizer LEDs mounted on the board.
o To connect the Power button and the Emergency ventilation switch. This information is
communicated to PC 2061/PC 1921 Monitoring and PC 2063/PC 1923 Power control.
o To switch the unit to System SW installation mode using the Boot enable switch.
Figure 3-69: Schematic view of the Power On/Off

and Vaporizer PC board section
Figure 3-70: Three-dimensional view of the Power On/Off and Vaporizer PC board section
1 PC 1927 O2 flush board
2 O2 flush valve including button
3 PC 1928 Power on/off board
4 Power on/off button
3.25.1 PC 1927 O2 flush board

PC 1927 O2 flush board comprises electronics for handling of:
 O2 flush. Detects if the O2 flush valve is open. For redundancy, a 2-pole switch is integrated in the O2
flush button. Both poles must be closed to detect the O 2 flush valve as open.
 Vaporizer status LED lamps. Show vaporizer status with the Vaporizer LEDs, visible just above the
vaporizer slots. The LEDs are mounted on this board. There are two sets of LEDs, one for each
vaporizer slot. Each set of LED contains three LEDs; green, yellow and red.
The LEDs indicate:
o Green: The selected vaporizer has passed the System checkout or Vaporizer check, and is ready to
deliver agent.
o Yellow:
- The vaporizer slot is selected but no vaporizer is present.
- The selected vaporizer slot holds an unchecked vaporizer.
- The selected slot's vaporizer is being filled.
- The selected slot's vaporizer has triggered an alarm, i.e. vaporizer nearly empty.
o Red:
- The vaporizer is disabled.
- The power to the vaporizer is shut off (the condition is applicable to both slots, i.e. not only the
selected slot).
o Not lit/Off: The vaporizer slot is not selected.
3.25.2 PC 1928 Power On/Off board

PC 1928 Power On/Off comprises electronics for handling of:
 Power button. The Power button is a 2-pole switch that is connected to PC 1928. A white LED inside
the button is lit when power to the system is switched on.
 Mains power connected LED. A green LED on PC 1928 is lit when mains power is connected to the
system. The LED is visible through a hole in the cover panel close to the Power button.
 Emergency ventilation switch. The Emergency ventilation switch, located behind the Emergency
ventilation cover, is a 2-pole switch that is connected to PC 1928.
 Boot enable switch. The Boot enable switch on PC 1928 is used during System software installation.
The switch must be pressed during startup to enable the System software installation mode. For
instructions, refer to chapter Service procedures.
3.25.3 Power button

The Power button is used to start-up the system. A white LED inside the button is lit when the system is
switched On. A glass cover protects the button.
For redundancy, the Power button contains a 2-pole switch. Both poles must be closed to enable system
start-up.
3.26 PC 1984/PC 1919 expiratory channel board (22)

The following revision history applies for PC 1984/PC 1919 Expiratory channel board:
 PC 1984 replaces PC 1919.
 PC 1984 requires System version 4.3 or above.
 PC 1919 will continue to be used, in production and as spare part, for customers where System version
4.3 is not yet approved.
 PC 1984/PC 1919 Expiratory channel board is part of the Expiratory flowmeter subsystem. The
Expiratory flowmeter subsystem’s main responsibilities are expiratory flow measurement and patient
cassette handling. Expiratory flow measurement is performed by the Expiratory flow transducer in the
cassette.
Figure 3-71: Schematic view of the PC 1984/PC 1919

expiratory channel board.
The PC 1984/PC 1919 Expiratory channel board is connected to the Patient cassette via PC 1918 Expiratory
cannel connector.
The PC 1984/PC 1919 Expiratory channel board contains electronics including a microprocessor for
handling of:
 Expiratory flow measurement performed by the Expiratory flow transducer inside the cassette. The
output signal Exp. Flow is an analogue signal used in sub-systems Control and Monitoring.
 All electronic connections to and from the Patient cassette.
 Measurement of Fresh gas pressure and Inspiratory pressure via PC 1781 (F) and PC 1781 (I). PC
1984/PC 1919 contains holders and electrical connectors for these pressure transducer boards.
 Control of the APL/PEEP valve and the Fresh gas safety valve functions.
A DC/DC converter on PC 1984/PC 1919 generates 200 VDC to the Expiratory flow transducer drivers. A
discharge circuitry makes sure that the capacitor that carries 200 V is discharged when the cassette is
disconnected.
WARNING! The PC board generates 200 V. All personnel must exercise extreme caution if
fault tracing or adjustments are performed with power supply connected and with covers
removed.
The CAN bus is responsible for all communication excluding the analog flow signal.
A thermistor on PC 1984/PC 1919 expiratory channel board monitors the temperature. An alarm is activated
if the temperature is 77 ±5 °C or higher or if the temperature sensor is not connected (e.g., due to poor
connection).
Green and red LEDs indicate activities that are related to the PC 1984/PC 1919 expiratory channel board.
The LEDs are described in section 6.4, PC board LED indicators on page 321.
Note: The System software must be reinstalled if the PC 1984/PC 1919 expiratory channel board is
replaced.
3.26.1 PC 1781 (F) fresh gas pressure transducer board

PC 1781 (F) fresh gas pressure transducer board is mounted on and electrically connected to the PC
1984/PC 1919 expiratory channel board. The transducer is pneumatically connected to the fresh gas
connector muff via a gas pressure tube. The connector muff is located close to the fresh gas modules.
3.26.2 PC 1781 (I) inspiratory pressure transducer board

PC 1781 (I) inspiratory pressure transducer board is mounted on and electrically connected to the PC
1984/PC 1919 expiratory channel board. The transducer is pneumatically connected to the inspiratory
channel in the Patient cassette via a gas pressure tube.
3.27 PC 2060/PC 1920 control board (23)

The PC 2060/PC 1920 control board is the main board for the Control subsystem. The Control is the
actuating subsystem and Monitoring is the supervising subsystem.
The Control subsystem’s main responsibility is functions for the patient treatment, i.e., how to regulate the
inspiratory and expiratory gas flow.
 Uses PC 2060
 Uses PC 1920
Figure 3-72: Schematic view of the PC 2060 control board.
Figure 3-73: Schematic view of the PC 1920 control board.
The PC 2060/PC 1920 control board comprises electronics including microprocessor for handling of:
 Inspiratory control and regulation (fresh gas modules, fresh gas safety valve, fresh gas pressure
transducer, insp. pressure transducer).
 Anesthesia control and regulation.
 Vaporizer control (bypass valve, chamber valves and pressure valves)
 Expiratory control and regulation (expiratory flow transducer, APL/PEEP valve, water trap and expiratory
pressure transducer)
 Volume reflector
 Reflector gas control (reflector gas module and reflector pressure transducer).
 Absorber sensor (absorber connected or not)

 Circuit compliance compensation
Green and red LEDs indicate activities related to PC 2060/PC 1920 control board. The LEDs are described
in section 6.4, PC board LED indicators on page 321.
Information required by the system is stored on PC 2060/PC 1920 control board. Refer to section 4.4.5,
Information stored on the PC boards on page 149.
A memory backup battery on PC 2060/PC 1920 control board power supplies the internal memory on the PC
board. The memory backup battery must be replaced after four years. If the battery is disconnected or if the
battery voltage is too low, information stored in the internal memory will be lost.
Note: The System software must be reinstalled if PC 2060/PC 1920 control board is replaced.
3.28 PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board (24)

The PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board is the main board for the Monitoring subsystem. The Monitoring is
the supervising subsystem and Control is the actuating subsystem.
The Monitoring subsystem main responsibilities within the system are alarm handling, metric calculation and
as master of the CAN bus. Monitoring also supervises the power and battery status.
 Uses PC 2061
 Uses PC 1921
Figure 3-74: Schematic view of the PC 2061 monitoring board.
Figure 3-75: Schematic view of the PC 1921 monitoring board
The PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board comprises electronics including microprocessor for handling of:
 Pressure failure alarm PFA
 Barometric pressure
 Backup buzzer
 Real-Time clock RTC
 Temperature monitoring
 System voltage monitoring
Green and red LEDs indicate activities related to PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board. The LEDs are
described in section 6.4, PC board LED indicators on page 321.
Information required by the system is stored on PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board. Refer to section 4.4.5,
Information stored on the PC boards on page 149.
A memory backup battery on PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board supplies power to the internal memory on
the PC board. The memory backup battery must be replaced after four years. If the battery is disconnected
or if the battery voltage is too low, information stored in the internal memory will be lost.
Note: If the PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board is replaced, then:
 The System software must be reinstalled.
 The barometer must be calibrated.
3.29 PC 1922 panel board (25)

The PC 1922 panel board is the main board for the Panel subsystem. The Panel subsystem’s main
responsibility is to give the user the possibility to interact with the system.
The PC 1922 panel board is also used to maintain different logs; event log, diagnostics log, service log and
installation log. Furthermore, the PC 1922 panel board is responsible for the FCI protocol.
Figure 3-76: Schematic view of the PC 1922 panel board.
Figure 3-77: Three-dimensional view of the PC 1922 panel board.

1 Isolated RS-232 connector (FCI 1) for FCI (Flow Communication Interface)
2 Isolated RS-232 connector (FCI 2) for FCI.

This connector can also be used for communication with AION, e.g., during service.
Communication with AION is established via Service & Settings.
3 Control panel connector LVDS (Low-voltage differential signaling)
4 VGA connector
5 USB connector.
The intended use of the USB connector is only for USB memory sticks. Restricted items include,
but are not limited to, external hard drives, USB hubs and any equipment drawing power from
the USB connector. Getinge recommends using a Getinge USB memory stick for this purpose.
6 Network connection LAN.

Isolated from revision 11 of PC 1922 panel board. The Ethernet connector is intended for
Remote Services.
7 Remote Services Adapter with RJ45 connector. Required for systems with PC 1922 of revision
10 or older that are provided with RJ12 connector.
PC 1922 panel board comprises electronics including microprocessor for handling of:
 The graphical user interface on the Control panel.
 Metrics and curves on the Control panel.
 Settings and display of parameters on the Control panel.
 Show trends of important metrics on the Control panel. Trends can be displayed either numerically or
graphically.
 User interface for System checkout.
 Authorization for service engineers using an USB Service key and present a user interface for Service &
Settings.
 Alarm limit configurations and display alarm notifications.
 Presentation of various event logs to the user.
 User inputs from the touch screen, the knob and the membrane buttons.
 Data exporting to a USB memory stick. Data that can be exported includes trends, logs, screen images
and settings. This data, except for screen images, can also be exported via the Ethernet connector using
Remote Services.
LED indicators on PC 1922 panel board are not visible (covered by the connector panel) and cannot be used
during troubleshooting.
The CompactFlash® card on PC 1922 panel board contains the language that is installed during System
software installation. The Vaporizer software is stored also on the CompactFlash card. This allows updating
the Vaporizer without use of USB memory stick.
The CompactFlash® should not be disconnected and moved to another PC 1922 panel board.
Information required by the system is stored on PC 1922 panel board. Refer to section 4.4.5, Information
stored on the PC boards on page 149.
A memory backup battery on PC 1922 panel board power supplies the internal memory on the PC board.
The memory backup battery must be replaced after four years. If the battery is disconnected or if the battery
voltage is too low, information stored in the memory will be lost.
Note: The System software must be reinstalled if PC 1922 panel board is replaced.
The external output/input ports are mounted on PC 1922 panel board, refer to the illustration below.
Cables listed below have passed EMC requirements specified in IEC 60601-1-2:
 RS-232 cables (shielded, length 2.5 m)
 Ethernet cable (shielded)

 VGA cable (shielded, length 2.0 m)
3.29.1 RS-232 connector pin configuration
Figure 3-78: RS-232 connector.

Table 3-38: Explanation of pin configuration in Figure 3-78.
Pin Description
1 –
2 RXD_ISO
3 TXD_ISO
4 DTR_ISO
5 GND_ISO
6 –
7 RTS_ISO
8 –
9 –
3.30 PC 1900 main backplane board (26)

PC 1900 main backplane board is an interconnection board for almost all PC boards in the unit.
PC 1781 (R) reflector pressure transducer board is mounted on and electrically connected to PC 1900 main
backplane board.
Figure 3-79: Schematic view of the PC 1900 main backplane board.
Figure 3-80: Three-dimensional view of PC 1900 main backplane board.

1 PC 1781 (R) reflector pressure transducer board

The unit’s System ID (Serial No.), configuration, operating time, options, etc., is stored in an EEPROM on
PC 1900 main backplane board. Thus, when replacing PC 1900 main backplane board, a spare part that is
factory programmed for the concerned unit must be used. Other information, also required by the system, is
stored on PC 1900 main backplane board. Refer to section 4.4.5, Information stored on the PC boards on
page 149.
3.31 Lift (27)

The Lift is available on C30 model only. With the mains power connected, the lift function is operated by
means of the Up and Down buttons located to the right of the On/Off button.
The Lift is a complete unit that contains an AC/DC converter and a Lift actuator (DC motor).
Figure 3-81: Schematic view of the Lift section
3.31.1 AC/DC converter

The lift is supplied with fused (F1 and F2) mains power from the PC 1938 Mains connection board. The
AC/DC converter transforms and rectifies the power supply to approximately 24 VDC.
The ring core transformer is protected by a thermal fuse that will trip at approximately 100˚C.
During mains power failure, the backup battery in the anesthesia system will not power the lift.
3.31.2 Lift actuator

The lift actuator used is a 24 VDC permanent magnet motor with 200 mm stroke length. Lift speed is >15
mm/s. The actuator is equipped with a brake which increases the self-locking ability.
The lift actuator has a 10% duty cycle; it may be used continuously for a 2 minute period, after which it must
cool down for 18 minutes. If the lift is used before it has cooled down completely, the time of continuous use
will be less than 2 minutes.
The maximum capacity is 150 kg, equivalent to approx. 30 kg of auxiliary equipment. For a detailed
description of equipment weight restrictions, refer to the User’s Manual.
3.32 AFGO (Option) (28)

Additional fresh gas outlet (AFGO) is an option to the anesthesia system that allows use of an external
partial rebreathing system, such as Bains, Jackson Rees, or Mapleson D.
The AFGO valve PV7 can be switched to supply fresh gas from Vaporizer either to the Patient cassette or to
the AFGO connector. With AFGO enabled, fresh gas will be supplied to the AFGO connector. The connector
is a standard 22 mm cone and the fresh gas flow supplied is max. 20 l/min.
When using AFGO the circle system is bypassed and the following can be set:
 Gas mix
 O2 concentration
 Fresh gas flow
 Agent concentration
Fresh gas flow ranges are from 1.0 to 20 l/min when using the AFGO and the default settings are the same
as in Manual ventilation.
Version B
See section 3.32.1, Version B, on page 130.
Version A
See section 3.32.2, Version A on page 131.
Exception within Control gas analyzer’s sampling gas return point (R2), see
Version A section 3.32.2.1 on page 132.
Common functionality, see section 3.32.3 on page 132.
3.32.1 Version B
Figure 3-82: Schematic view of the AFGO option, Version B.
Figure 3-83: Three-dimensional view of the AFGO valve, Version B.
1 AFGO fresh gas supply tube
2 AFGO valve
3.32.1.1 AFGO valve (PV7) – integrated in Vaporizer valve block

The AFGO valve PV7, that is integrated in the Vaporizer valve block, is controlled by the AFGO pilot valve
EMV18:
 When EMV18 is not activated, the spring-loaded PV7 will be set to supply Fresh gas flow to the Patient
cassette.
 When EMV18 is activated, PV7 will be set to supply Fresh gas flow to the Additional fresh gas outlet
connector.
3.32.2 Version A
Figure 3-84: Schematic view of the AFGO option, Version A.
Figure 3-85: Three-dimensional view of the AFGO valve, Version A.

1 Fresh gas from vaporizer
2 Fresh gas to patient cassette (via safety valve)
3 To AFGO connector
4 Drive gas supply to AFGO pilot valve
5 CGA sampling gas return point (plugged for other systems).
6 Connector for O2 from the O2 flush valve
7 AFGO pilot valve EMV18
3.32.2.1 AFGO valve (PV7)

With the AFGO valve PV7, the Fresh gas from Vaporizer is supplied either to the Patient cassette or to the
Additional fresh gas outlet connector. The connector is a standard 22 mm cone and the Fresh gas flow
supplied is max. 20 l/min.
The valve is controlled by the AFGO pilot valve EMV18:
 When EMV18 is not activated, the spring-loaded PV7 will be set to supply Fresh gas flow to the Patient
cassette.
 When EMV18 is activated, PV7 will be set to supply Fresh gas flow to the Additional fresh gas outlet
connector.
The following gas connections are integrated in the AFGO valve:
 O2 from the O2 flush valve.
 Pilot valve drive gas supply for PV7.
 Control gas analyzer’s sampling gas return point (R2). Not used in System version 3.0 and above.
Plugged on units with S/N 2001 or above.
3.32.3.1 AFGO pilot valve

The AFGO pilot valve EMV18 is mounted on the pneumatics block and controls the AFGO valve PV7.
The EMV18 is:
 electrically controlled and connected to PC 2057/PC 1907 valve drivers board.
 supplied with Pilot valve drive gas (O2) at 240 kPa from REG3 (S/N < 20 000: 200 kPa from REG4).
 spring-loaded and will switch off the drive gas supply through the valve if not activated.
The EMV18 valve functions:
 When AGFO is not selected, EMV18 will not be activated and no pressure will be supplied to PV7.
This will set the spring-loaded PV7 to supply Fresh gas flow to the Patient cassette.
 When AFGO is selected, EMV18 will be activated (open) and supply pressure to PV7.
This will set PV7 to supply Fresh gas flow to the AFGO connector.
The pneumatic valve PV7 will be depressurized to the AFGO via EMV18.
3.33 Extra mains power outlets (Option) (29)

Extra mains power outlets is an option that contains three extra mains power outlets, an integrated patient
monitor power cable and an Isolation transformer.
The Extra mains power outlets are power supplied through the Isolation transformer. The purpose of the
Extra mains power outlets is to provide the possibility for mains power connection of auxiliary equipment
while maintaining the total system earth leakage current below the limits given in IEC 60601-1.
Max permitted load:
 220–240 VAC units: 2 A (extra mains power outlets) + 1 A (patient monitor cable).
 100–120 VAC units: 4 A (extra mains power outlets) + 2 A (patient monitor cable).
During mains power failure, the backup battery will not power the Extra mains power outlets.
There are three versions of the Extra mains power outlets:
 IEC power outlets (220–240 VAC or 100–120 VAC systems).
 US 5-15R power outlets (100–120 VAC systems).
 CEE 7/4 (Type F) power outlets (220–240 VAC systems).
3.33.1 IEC power outlets
Figure 3-86: Schematic (left) and three-dimensional (right) view of Extra mains power outlets, IEC
1 Patient monitor fuse
2 Power outlets
3 Power outlets fuse
The IEC power outlets version contains the following fuses:

 Patient monitor fuse (circuit breaker) rated 1 A (220–240 VAC) or 2 A (100–120 VAC).
 Power outlets fuse (circuit breaker) rated 2 A (220–240 VAC) or 4 A (100–120 VAC).
 Isolation transformer fuse (circuit breaker) rated 6 A (220–240 VAC) or 12 A (100–120 VAC). Included in
section 20. Power Connection.
3.33.2 US 5-15R power outlets
Figure 3-87: Schematic (left) and three-dimensional (right) view of Extra mains power outlets, US 5-15R.
1 Power outlet 1 with fuse
4 Power outlet including Patient monitor fuse
5 Isolation transformer fuses S1 and S2
The US 5-15R power outlets version (100–120 VAC systems) contains the following fuses:
 Power outlets fuse (circuit breaker) rated 2 A for outlet 1.
 Power outlets fuses (circuit breakers) rated 1 A for outlet 2 and 3.
 Patient monitor fuse (circuit breaker) rated 2 A.
 Isolation transformer fuses S1 and S2 rated 8 AF. Included in section 20. Power Connection.
3.33.3 CEE 7/4 (Type F)
Figure 3-88: Schematic view (left) and three-dimensional view (right) of Extra mains power outlets, CEE 7/4 (Type F)
4 Power outlet including Patient monitor fuse
5 Isolation transformer fuses S1 and S2
3.33.4 Isolation transformer
Figure 3-89: Three-dimensional view of the Isolation transformer

1 Isolation transformer
2 Power IN
3 Power OUT
The isolation transformer is included in the (factory-mounted) option Extra mains power outlets. The isolation
transformer enables mains power connection for auxiliary equipment while maintaining the total system earth
leakage current below the limits given in IEC 60601-1. The transformer provides galvanic isolation from the
mains outlet in the wall.
The transformer supplies power to the three extra mains power and to the integrated patient monitor power
cable. The transformer is located below the power backup battery compartment.
The Isolation transformer is a complete unit that contains a transformer switching relay and a ring core
transformer. There are two different Isolation Transformers available, one for 100–120 V AC and one for
220–240 V AC.
The transformer switching relay is a current limitation that connects power to the transformer in a controlled
and safe way. This will prevent fuses to trip due to high start current in the transformer. Power supply to the
transformer is protected by fuses. There are different types of fuses used depending on the version of Extra
mains power outlet that is connected. Refer to section 3.33, Extra mains power outlets (Option) (29) on
page 133 for information regarding the fuses. The transformer is protected by a thermal fuse that will trip at
approximately 110 °C.
3.34 Auxiliary O2 and Suction module (30 )

The module contains two main parts:
 Flow meter unit: The intended use is to provide oxygen therapy. Outlet flow is regulated by means of the
flow meter regulating valve. Current flow is shown by the flow meter.
 Suction unit: The Suction unit supplies negative pressure connected to a suction jar. The intended use is
to extract body fluids from the stomach and Airways. Suction pressure is regulated by means of the
On/Off switch and the suction unit regulating valve. The vacuum gauge shows the current suction
pressure.
Refer to the User’s Manual for information regarding:
 Testing
 Cautions
 Cleaning
 Technical specifications.
Figure 3-90: Schematic view of the Auxiliary O2 and Suction module.
Figure 3-91: Three-dimensional view of the Auxiliary O2 and Suction module

1 Air inlet
2 O2 inlet
3 Flowmeter outlet (with tube adapter attached)
4 Flowmeter tube
5 Flowmeter unit regulating valve
6 On/Off switch for the suction unit
7 Vacuum gauge for the suction unit
8 Suction unit regulating valve
9 Mount for hydrophobic bacterial and viral filter
10 Rear handle for base unit
WARNING! Do not use lubricants that are not recommended by Getinge in high O2 exposed
areas. Risk of fire or explosion.
3.34.1 Auxiliary O2 regulator

The O2 gas supply hose is connected to the O2 inlet (2). O2 supply pressure must be 300-650 kPa.
An O2 filter is mounted inside the module.
The outlet flow is regulated by means of the flowmeter regulating valve (5). The current flow is shown by the
flowmeter tube (4) where the center of the ball aligned to the printed scale corresponds to the actual flow.
Max. flow is 15 l/min. Note that older units have a printed gradation up to 10 l/min.
With the tube adapter (3) attached, the flowmeter outlet can be connected to 4, 6 and 8 mm tubing.
3.34.2 Suction unit

The Air gas supply hose is connected to the Air inlet (1). The air supply pressure must be 300-650 kPa.
The suction pressure is created by an ejector inside the Suction unit. The ejector outlet is equipped with a
silencer to reduce the sound level from the ejector.
The suction pressure is regulated by means of the On/Off switch (6) and the suction unit regulating valve (8).
The vacuum gauge (7) shows the current suction pressure.
Max. suction pressure is -60 kPa down to -90 kPa (depending on the Air supply pressure).
The suction jar used in conjunction with the unit must have a volume of at least 0.5 liters. The tube
connecting the suction jar with the suction unit must have an inner diameter of at least 6 mm and not be
more than 1 m in length. The tube material should be rigid enough to prevent occlusion.
A hydrophobic bacterial/viral filter must be connected to the suction unit. It protects the system against
contagious particles and acts as a second overflow protection device in addition to the device located in the
suction jar. The suction unit cannot be operated without a correctly placed bacterial/viral filter.
A visual inspection and a function check of the Auxiliary O 2 and Suction Module must be performed during
the Preventive Maintenance.
3.35 Backup gas rack (Option) (31)

The optional Backup gas Backup gas rack acts as a reserve system if the central gas supply fails. Air, O2
and N2O cylinders can be connected to the corresponding inlets that are located at the rear of the system.
The gas cylinders are mounted on a Backup gas rack. The rack can carry two cylinders; O2/N2O or O2/Air.
The rack also contains pressure transducers, safety valves and pressure regulators.
The pressure transducers are connected to PC 1916 Cylinder pressure connection inside the rack. A cable
connects PC 1916 with PC 1903 External connectors to supply cylinder pressure information to the system.
The backup gas supply should only be turned ON (valves open) when the backup gas supply is in use, or
during System Checkout.
3.35.1 Backup gas trolley

For older systems there is also an optional backup gas trolley available, see Figure 3-93 on page 140, with
the same functionality as the rack. The trolley is no longer available as an option.
Figure 3-92: Schematic view of the Backup gas rack/trolley option.
Figure 3-93: Three-dimensional view of the Backup gas rack (left) and the Backup gas trolley (right)
3.35.2 Inlet pressure and Pressure regulator

The Backup gas trolley/Backup gas rack is equipped with PIN-index connections (yokes) for two gas
cylinders:
 O2 gas cylinder. Max cylinder gas pressure is 20000 kPa (200 bar) before the pressure regulator.
 AIR gas cylinder. Max cylinder gas pressure is 20000 kPa (200 bar) before the pressure regulator.
 N2O gas cylinder. Max cylinder gas pressure is 8000 kPa (80 bar) before the pressure regulator.
Max. allowed gas cylinder size is: length 655 mm (valve excluded), diameter 140 mm.
The gas inlet channels were previously equipped with one-way valves (OV21 and OV22). These valves are
not required as the one-way function is secured by OV4, OV5 and OV6 inside the Gas distribution section.
The valves were removed in trolley/rack produced from Q4 2013.
The cylinder gas pressure is reduced to a preset pressure by the pressure regulators (REG21 and REG22):
 340 kPa on trolleys/racks produced Q1 2016 or earlier.
 310 kPa on racks produced from Q2 2016.
The gas is connected to the Gas distribution section via tubing.
Note: The Backup gas trolley/Backup gas rack as well as separate gas cylinders must be secured, by means
of a chain or wall mount, when not mounted on the system or when kept in storage.
3.35.2.1 Low hospital gas pressure

Note: If the pressure in the hospitals central gas supply is relatively low (< 380 kPa), it is recommended to
reduce the pressure setting (340 kPa) on the pressure regulators slightly to avoid undesired activation of the
backup gas. The pressure regulator adjustment will reduce, but not eliminate, the risk that the gas cylinders
are emptied if the gas cylinder valves are accidently left open after System Checkout.
Even after this pressure regulator adjustment, the gas cylinder valves should be closed after System
Checkout. Contact MCC HSC or your local Getinge representative if further information regarding pressure
regulator adjustment is required.
3.35.3 Safety valves

There are two safety valves (SV21 and SV22) on the trolley/rack; one for each gas. The safety valves are
preset to open at a pressure of 650 kPa (6.5 bar).
3.35.4 Gas tube connections

The gas tube connections must be checked during Preventive Maintenance.
The gas tube connections must be tightened firmly with a wrench. It must not be possible to disconnect the
gas tubes by hand (without wrench).
Filters and gaskets in the yokes must be replaced during Preventive Maintenance Plus (PM+).
3.35.5 PC 1916 Cylinder pressure connection board
3.35.5.1 Pressure transducers

The pressure transducers on PC 1916 Cylinder pressure connection board are connected to PC 1903
External connectors, thus the gas pressure in the cylinders will be displayed on the Control panel. Alarm is
activated if the gas pressure is outside the preset alarm limits.
3.35.5.2 Cable connector

The cable connector on PC 1916 is protected by a cover. When this cover is open (e.g. when the signal
cable is connected), the Backup gas trolleys locking mechanism is blocked and the trolley cannot be
removed from the system.
3.36 Backup gas holder (option) (32)

The optional Backup gas holder acts as a reserve system if the central gas supply fails. A gas cylinder can
be connected to the corresponding inlet located on the back of the system.
The gas cylinder is mounted on the Backup gas holder. The holder can carry one cylinder. The holder also
contains pressure transducer, safety valve and pressure regulator.
 The Backup gas holder N2O can only be connected together with a Backup gas trolley/Backup gas rack.
 The Backup gas holder O2 cannot be connected together with a Backup gas trolley/Backup gas rack.
The pressure transducer is connected with a cable to PC 1903 External connectors to supply cylinder
pressure information to the system.
The backup gas supply should only be turned ON (valve open) when the backup gas supply is in use, or
during System Checkout.
Note: Gas cylinders must be secured, by means of a chain or wall mount, when not mounted on the system
or when kept in storage.
Figure 3-94: Schematic view of the Backup gas holder.
Figure 3-95: Three-dimensional view of the Backup

gas holder together with a Backup gas trolley
3.36.1 Inlet pressure and Pressure regulator

The Backup gas holder is equipped with PIN-index connection (yoke) for 1 gas cylinder:
 N2O gas cylinder. Max cylinder gas pressure is 8000 kPa (80 bar) before the pressure regulator.
 O2 gas cylinder. Max cylinder gas pressure is 20000 kPa (200 bar) before the pressure regulator.
Max. allowed gas cylinder size is:
 For C20: length 655 mm (valve excluded), diameter 140 mm.
 For C30/C40: length 595 mm (valve excluded), diameter 140 mm. A bottom plate mounted on C30 units
prevents cylinders with lengths > 595 mm to be connected.
The gas inlet channel was previously equipped with a one-way valve (OV23). This valve is not required as
the one-way function is secured by OV4 and OV6 inside the Gas Distribution Section. The valve was thus
removed in holders produced from Q4 2013.
The cylinder gas pressure is reduced to a preset pressure by the pressure regulators (REG23):
 340 kPa on holders produced Q1 2016 or earlier.
 310 kPa on holders produced from Q2 2016.
The gas is connected to the Gas distribution section via tubing.
The pressure regulator is preset in factory and cannot be adjusted during field service.
3.36.2 Safety valve

There is a safety valve (SV23) on the holder. The safety valve is preset to open at a pressure of 650 kPa
(6.5 bar).
3.36.3 Pressure transducer

The pressure transducer is connected to PC 1903 External connectors, thus the gas pressure in the cylinder
will be displayed on the Control panel. Alarm is activated if the gas pressure is outside the preset alarm
limits.
3.36.4 Gas tube connections

The gas tube connections must be checked during Preventive Maintenance.
The gas tube connections must be tightened firmly with a wrench. It must not be possible to disconnect the
gas tubes by hand (without wrench).
Filters and gaskets in the yokes must be replaced during Preventive Maintenance Plus (PM+).
3.37 MSync (Option) (33)

MSync is intended for transferring information from Getinge devices to clinical information systems by:
 Importing clinical real-time data from the device using the FCI communication protocol for each device.
 Converting device data to HL7 compliant data.
 Exporting device data in HL7 format to the information system.
The placing of the MSync installation is depending on the MSync configuration, Before installing the MSync,
adequate training about the MSync product is required.
For more information about MSync, refer to the following publications (contact MCC HSC or your local
Getinge representative for more information).:
 MSync Installation instructions
 MSync User’s Manual
Trained and authorized personnel. MSync is a highly technically advanced product that
requires adequate training before order and installation.
Figure 3-96: Schematic view of the MSync (option).

Figure 3-97: Three-dimensional view of the optional MSync
1 LAN connector
2 RS-232 connector
3 USB connector
4 Power supply
3.38 Patient monitor mounting kit (option) (34)

The system can be equipped with a Patient monitor. Getinge supplies optional mechanical mounting kits for
a number of Patient monitors from different manufacturers. There is also an optional Adjustable arm for
patient monitor parameter modules available.
Before starting to use a Patient monitor on the system, ensure that the whole combination complies with the
international standard IEC 60601-1 and the requirements of the local authorities.
After connecting any external electric device to the system, perform an electrical safety test of the complete
system. For electrical safety test of the system, refer to 7.6.6, Safety inspection on page 353.
Figure 3-98: Schematic view of the Patient monitor mounting
4 Disassembling and assembling
4.1 General
In this chapter disassembling of the system is described. If not stated otherwise, the assembling procedure is
reverse of the disassembling procedure.
When disassembling and assembling, refer to the Spare parts list.
After any installation, maintenance or service intervention in the system, perform a System checkout and a
manual check of Emergency ventilation system according to instructions in the User’s Manual.
4.2 Hazard notices

Before disassembling or assembling, make sure that:
1. Mains power cable is disconnected.
2. Power button is set to off. If the power button is set to on, the power backup battery supplies power to all
electrical components in the unit.
 When the power button is set to off, the listed items are still energized by the power backup battery:
o PC 1900 main backplane board
o PC 1903 external connectors board
o PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board
o Emergency ventilation switch
o Power button
 The power backup battery can be disconnected by:
o Disconnecting the battery cables at the battery terminals, or
o Disconnecting the battery cables (Battery and battery sense) at PC 1903 external connectors board.
3. Gas supply is disconnected, central gas supply and backup gas supply.
4. The system, including all gas conveying parts, is cleaned. Refer to instructions in the User’s Manual –
Cleaning and Maintenance”.
than 3000 kPa.
Some items, e.g., gas modules, are still under pressure when gas supply is disconnected.
Chapter 4 – Disassembling and assembling
4.3 Vaporizer handling

 Handle the vaporizer with care.
 Never turn a vaporizer containing anesthetic agent upside down or lay it sideways, as the agent can leak
out.
 The vaporizer is factory calibrated and leakage tested.
 The vaporizer must not be disassembled.
 In case of malfunction, repAir or service must be carried out by Maquet Critical Care only.
 Perform an RMA procedure when returning a vaporizer to Maquet Critical Care.
 If the vaporizer is dropped, it must be serviced by Maquet Critical Care to ensure proper functionality.
 The vaporizer must be emptied before it is returned to Maquet Critical Care. Refer to emptying
instructions in the User’s Manual.
Note that there may be small amounts of anesthetic agent in the vaporizer even when the indicator shows
that the vaporizer is empty.
4.4 PC boards and electrical components

4.4.1 Replacing electrical components
When replacing electrical components the mains power supply must be disconnected and the system power
button set to off, as stated in section Hazard notices. If energized electrical components are disconnected or
connected when the system is running, the operation of the system may be affected.
After replacing PC boards or other electrical components it is recommended to perform an electrical safety
test. Refer to section 7.6.6, Safety inspection on page 353.
4.4.2 Handling PC boards
The PC boards contain components that are highly sensitive to static electricity. When
working with ESD sensitive components, always use a grounded wrist band and a grounded
work surface. Adequate service tools must be used.
 Those who come into contact with circuit boards containing sensitive components must take certain
precautions to avoid damaging the components (ESD protection).
 PC boards (spare parts) must always be kept in protective packaging for sensitive electronic device.
 PC boards must not be inserted or removed while the mains power or battery power is applied to the PC
boards.
 Remove and insert the PC boards carefully to avoid damage to the connectors.
4.4.3 Replacing PC boards

The system software is distributed through subsystems located on the PC boards listed below.
The software must be reinstalled if any of the PC boards listed below are replaced.
 AION PC board (included in AION Platinum)
 PC 1910 vaporizer controller board (the vaporizer is replaced)
 PC 1925 display CPU board
 PC 1984/PC 1919 expiratory channel board. PC 1984 requires System version 4.3 or above.

4.4.4 Additional actions when replacing PC boards

At delivery the spare part PC board may be equipped with a software version that differs from the version
installed in the system. To keep the system software installed in the system, the desired system software
version must be available for reinstallation.
For functionality enhancement the latest released system software version is recommended.
Before installing a new system software version, ensure that the software is fully compatible with all
hardware, software and mechanical components in the system.
Note
 PC 1910 vaporizer controller board is included in the vaporizer and is not available as spare part. When
the vaporizer is installed in the system, the software is installed on PC 1910 vaporizer controller board
during a regular system software installation. Software can also be installed on PC 1910 vaporizer
controller board by a separate vaporizer software installation.
 AION PC board is included in the AION base module and is not available as spare part. Software
installation on AION PC board is performed during the system software installation procedure.
4.4.5 Information stored on the PC boards
Stored information PC 1900 PC 1917 PC 2060/ PC 2061/ PC 1922 PC 2063/ PC 1925 AION
PC 1920 PC 1921 PC 1923 PCB
System info: X
Serial number
System version
Installed software
options
Operating time (total and
running hours)
Logs and service logs X
System checkout results X X X

incl. transducer
(calibration) (calibration) (results)
calibrations
Clinical trends X
APL knob calibration X
Barometer calibration X
Gas analyzer calibration X
Touch screen calibration X
Performed preventive X X1
maintenance (counter)
Replaced expiratory X X1
membrane (counter)
Replaced backlight X1 X
(counter)
Replaced internal battery X X1

(Power backup battery) (date)
Reset internal battery X1 X

errors
Replaced memory X1
backup batteries
Startup configurations X X X
made in Service & (ventilation (alarm (units, language,
Settings waveforms,
settings) limits)
displayed values,
biomed access
code, etc.)
Date and time setting X
Anesthetic agent X
consumption, clinical use
Anesthetic agent X
consumption, service
use
1. Included in Service report as part of the Service log.
4.5 Assembling guidelines

All parts of the system assembled with screws and nuts are tightened with a specified torque. Use thread
locking adhesives where indicated in the procedure.
After any service intervention, make sure that all removed parts are re-assembled according to the
instructions. Follow the guidelines stated below.
4.5.1 Tightening torques
Thread size or item Torque
M3 0.95 Nm ±15%
M4 3.1 Nm ±15%
M5 5.0 Nm ±15%
M6 7.0 Nm ±15%
Black plastic locking nut on MAN/AUTO switch 3.1 Nm ±15%
Gas inlet nipples 20 Nm ±15%
Nut on release button for cassette lid 7.0 Nm ±15%
Rotary encoder 0.95 Nm ±15%
4.5.2 Thread locking adhesives

 Electrolube® BLV/R Bloc’lube on threads in contact with PC boards.
 Loctite® 243™ on all other threads.
4.5.3 Special grease
WARNING! Do not use lubricants that are not recommended by Getinge in high O2 exposed
areas. Risk of fire or explosion.
Lubricants should normally not be used when servicing the unit. If lubricants must be used, use only small
amounts of grease with P/N 9573700. This special grease is O 2 compatible.
4.6 Internal tubing
CAUTION: Tubing included in the gas sampling system must not be cut before reconnected.
The tubing length is calculated and adapted to the sampling functionality. Proper operation of
the sampling system cannot be ensured if the tubing length is incorrect. Cut tubing must be
replaced.
CAUTION: Ensure that the EVAC system, including tubing from scavenging valves, is correctly
connected. Running the system with a poor connection may result in anesthetic agent being
emitted into the operation environment. Leakages in the EVAC system will not be detected by
the System checkout.
When disassembling, disconnecting internal tubing may be required. Disconnect carefully to prevent
damaging the tubing or connectors.
When assembling the system, it is important that all tubing is properly reconnected. Faulty or poor
connections lead to system malfunction.
4.6.1 Collar nuts – installation
Necessary tools:
 7 mm open-end wrench
Follow this procedure:
1. Insert the tubing through the collar nut.

2. Push the tubing end onto the nipple until it
stops.
3. Tighten the collar nut using the open-end
wrenches.
4.6.2 Pressure transducer tubing – installation
1. Turn the tubing counterclockwise approximately

one turn.
2. Connect the tubing to PC 1781 pressure
transducer board.
3. Turn clockwise to tighten.
4.6.3 Sampling tubing – installation
1. Carefully push the tubing onto the nipple.

2. Push down the locking sleeve over the nipple
with your fingers.
4.6.4 Sampling tubing – removal
Necessary tools:
 Flat-head screwdriver
1. Use a flat-head screwdriver and carefully lift the
locking sleeve.
2. Place the blade under the tubing end and
carefully use the screwdriver end to gently
loosen the tube.
3. Pull off the tube from the nipple.
4.7 Control panel

Control Panel serial number Comment
Control Panel including Display with LED and integrated

Version C. S/N > 320000. backlight inverter.
Control Panel including Display with LED.

Version B. S/N 300576 – 320000.
Version A. S/N < 300576. Control Panel including Display with lamps.
components inside the unit, e. g. the backlight lamps in Control panel Version A that are
supplied with 660 V by the Backlight Inverter. All personnel must exercise extreme caution if
fault tracing or adjustments are performed with power supply connected and with the user
interface rear cover removed.
4.7.1 Control panel – removal
Necessary tools:
 5 mm Hex key
 Phillips PH2 screwdriver
1. Remove the plastic cable holder (ref. no. 1).
2. Disconnect the control panel cable (ref. no. 2).
3. While holding the control panel securely,
remove the screws (ref. no. 3).
4. Put the control panel with the display side down
on a soft surface.
4.7.2 Control panel – disassembly

Prerequisite tasks:
Section 4.7.1, Control panel – removal, page 153.
Necessary tools:
T20 Torx® key
Follow this procedure (refer to Figure 4-1 on page 154 for illustration):
1. Put the control panel on a soft surface with the screen down.
2. Remove the eight screws (ref. no. 1).
3. Lift off the rear cover (ref. no. 2).
All parts of the control panel are now accessible:
 PC 1924 display connection board (ref. no. 3)
 Display/Touch screen (ref. no. 4)
 Rotary encoder (ref. no. 5)
 PC 1925 display CPU board (ref. no. 6)
 Control panel frame (ref. no. 7)
Figure 4-1: Disassembling the control panel.
4.7.3 Rotary encoder – replacement
Prerequisite tasks:
Section 4.7.1, Control panel – removal, page 153.
Necessary tools:
 T20 Torx® key
1. Place the control panel on a flat surface as
shown in the image.
2. Unscrew the eight screws (ref. no. 1).
3. Lift off the rear cover (ref. no. 3), a few
centimeters only.
4. Slide the rear cover slightly and carefully to the
right to get access to the rotary encoder (ref.
no. 2). The cables between the rear cover and
PC 1925 display CPU board do not need to be
disconnected.
5. Pull off the knob (ref. no. 5).
6. Unscrew the nut (ref. no. 4).
7. Disconnect and remove the rotary encoder (ref.
no. 2).
8. Mount the (new) encoder into its position.
9. Fasten the encoder using the plastic nut that
comes with the encoder. Do not use the metal
nut and washer from the old encoder.
Tightening torque: 0.95 Nm ±15%.
10. Push the knob (ref. no. 5) into position.
11. Lift and slide the rear cover (ref. no. 3) slightly
and carefully to the left.
12. Fasten the eight screws (ref. no. 1).
4.8 Fan filter – replacement

1. Push the latch on the right side of the cover.
2. Open the fan cover.
3. Pull out the filter.
4. Insert the new filter.
5. Press the fan cover back in its position.
4.9 EVAC filter and holder– replacement

4.9.1 Filter – replacement

1. Press on the cover sides to pull out the Evac
filter cover.
2. Remove the filter.
3. Insert the new filter.
4. Press the Evac filter cover back in its position.
4.9.2 Filter holder – replacement
Necessary tools:
 Flat-head screwdriver
1. Remove the Evac filter cover.
2. Remove the filter.
3. The Evac filter holder is mounted with adhesive
tape. Use a flat-head screwdriver to carefully
unbind one corner of the holder.
4. If needed, carefully rub off any adhesive tape
from the surface of the system.
5. Clean the surface with a suitable solvent.
6. Mount the new holder.
7. Install filter and cover.
4.10 Patient cassette lid

Equipped with a release button and requires a two-

Version A
handed grip is to open and close.
Version B Equipped with one-hand grip handle.
4.10.1 Inspiratory sample filter holder – removal
Necessary tools:
 2.5 mm hex key
1. Open the patient cassette lid.
2. Unscrew the two screws on the Inspiratory
sample filter holder.
3. Pull off the filter holder.
Version B
Version A
4.10.2 Expiratory sample filter holder – removal
Necessary tools:
 2.5 mm hex key
2. Unscrew the screw on the Expiratory sample
filter holder.
3. Pull off the filter holder.
Version B
Version A
4.11 Patient cassette

4.11.1 Patient cassette – removal

2. Turn the CO2 absorber locking switch to the
unlocked position.
3. Pull out the CO2 absorber.
4. Pull up the latch below the patient cassette.

5. Pull out the patient cassette.
4.11.2 Absorber valves – removal
Prerequisite tasks:
Section 4.11.1, Patient cassette – removal,
page 159
1. Turn the absorber valve counterclockwise.
2. Pull out the absorber valve.
4.11.3 Absorber valves – installation
Prerequisite tasks:
page 159
1. Push the absorber valve into position.
2. Turn the valve clockwise.
4.11.4 APL/PEEP valve membrane – removal
Prerequisite tasks:
page 159
Necessary tools:
Retaining ring pliers
Use a pair of retaining ring pliers to carefully lift off
the membrane and retaining ring.
4.11.5 APL/PEEP valve membrane – installation
Prerequisite tasks:
1. Section 4.11.1, Patient cassette – removal,
page 159
2. Section 4.11.4, APL/PEEP valve membrane –
removal, page 161
Necessary tools:
 Retaining ring pliers
Necessary consumables:
 Distilled water
 Lint-free cloth
Note: In the following step, make sure that the
membrane is not deformed from the installation.
1. Place the retaining ring (ref. no. 1) into the
membrane. Make sure that the retaining ring
(ref. no. 1) and washer (ref. no. 2) are correctly
mounted.
2. Use distilled water and a lint-free cloth to clean
the valve membrane and the valve membrane
seat.
3. Place the membrane on the cassette as shown

in the image.
4. Squeeze the retaining ring pliers and carefully

push the membrane into place.
5. Release and remove the pliers.
6. Reset the operating capacity meter in the
software.
Note: If the unit is equipped with several
Patient Cassettes, the capacity meter must be
reset on each cassette. The meter is reset in
Service & Settings (Service report > Replaced
expiratory membrane).
4.11.6 Expiratory outlet one-way valve OV12 – removal
Prerequisite tasks:
page 159
Necessary tools:
Retaining ring pliers
1. Use a pair of retaining ring pliers to carefully lift
off the membrane and retaining ring (ref. no. 1).
2. Lift off the expiratory outlet one-way valve
OV12 (ref. no. 2).
4.11.7 Expiratory outlet one-way valve OV12 – installation
Prerequisite tasks:
page 159
2. Section 4.11.4, APL/PEEP valve membrane –
removal, page 161
3. Section 4.11.6, Expiratory outlet one-way valve
OV12 – removal, page 162
Necessary tools:
Needle-nose pliers
Distilled water
1. Lubricate the expiratory outlet one-way valve
with a small amount of distilled water
2. Push the valve into place.
Note: In the following step, the rubber strap cannot

be pulled completely through the plastic.
3. Use a pAir of long nosed pliers to carefully pull
the rubber strap inside the cassette. Refer to
the enlarged view in the figure.
4. Mount the APL/PEEP valve membrane
according to section 4.11.5, APL/PEEP valve
membrane – installation on page 161.
4.11.8 Inspiratory and expiratory valve – removal and disassembly
Prerequisite tasks:
page 159
Necessary tools:
Flat-head screwdriver
1. Turn the inspiratory and expiratory valve caps
counterclockwise
2. Pull up the valve caps.
3. Lift up the valve cages.
4. Pull up the valve seats. If needed, use a small
flat-head screwdriver on the outside of the
seats to pry them loose.
4.11.9 Inspiratory and expiratory valve – assembly and installation
Prerequisite tasks:
page 159
2. Section 4.11.8, Inspiratory and expiratory valve
– removal and disassembly, page 164
Distilled water
Note: Handle the valve seats very carefully. Make
sure the sharp edge that seals towards the ceramic
valve disc is not damaged by using any tool.
1. Lubricate the O-rings on the valves seats with a
small amount of distilled water.
2. Place the new valve seats with O-rings into the
holders.
3. Use the valve cages to push the valve seats

into position.
4. Lift up the valve cages.

5. Make sure that the valve seats are correctly
mounted:
 The O-rings must not be visible.
 The valve seats must be correctly positioned in
the holders.
6. Put the new valve cages in position.

7. Turn the valve caps clockwise.
4.12 Drawers and rails

4.12.1 Drawer rail guide – installation
If the drawer does not snap into closed position, this can be adjusted by mounting the drawer rail guides.
Prerequisite tasks:
Remove the drawer(s).
1. Press down a rail guide (ref. no. 1) between the

side cover and the rail as shown in the
illustration.
2. Mount a rail guide on both the left side and right
side rails (two rail guides/drawer).
4.13 Covers and chassi parts

4.13.1 Front door – opening
There are two versions of the front door:
 Front door version B with metal vaporizer slot housing integrated with the front door.
 Front door version A with a separate plastic vaporizer slot housing.
Prerequisite tasks:
1. Remove any accessories mounted on the rails.
2. Remove the vaporizers.
Necessary tools:
 3 or 4 mm Hex key

1. Version A only: Remove the mounting screws
(ref. no. 2) for the vaporizer slot housing and lift
out the vaporizer slot housing (ref.no. 3).
2. The rails (ref.no. 4) are holding the door in its
closed position. Loosen the screws (ref.no.1)
enough to open the door.
3. Carefully open the front door (ref.no. 4).
4.13.2 Front door – closing

Prerequisite tasks:
Section 4.13.1, Front door – opening, page 167.
Necessary tools:
 4 mm Hex key
1. Close the front door (ref. no. 4).
Note: make sure that no tubing is pinched by
the door when closing.
2. Version A only: Make sure that there is no gap
(at the arrows) between the front door and the
mounting plate at the vaporizer docking, e.g.
due to pinched tubing.
Also see note below for detailed instructions on

how to close the (Version A) front door
correctly.
3. Hold the door in position and mount the four
screws (ref. no. 1) in the vaporizer slot housing
(ref. no. 2).
4. Mount and tighten the screws to the side rails
(ref. nos. 3 and 4) that secure the front door.
Note: The document “Vaporizer alignment tool, Flow-i – Adjustment Instructions” gives further information
on how to close the front door correctly. The instruction also describes adjustment of PC 1909 Vaporizer
adapter, using the Vaporizer alignment tool, to assure proper connection between the vaporizers and
PC 1909.
PC 1909 with new design (available as spare part) has improved connection to the vaporizers.
4.13.3 Rear cover – removal

Prerequisite tasks:
Remove any accessories mounted on the rails or
that may hinder removal of the rear cover.
Necessary tools:
 4 mm Hex key
1. Disconnect all cables connected to the Panel

board PC 1922 (ref. no. 1).
2. Loosen the screws (ref. no. 2) holding the rail
(ref. no. 3) in place.
3. Pull out the rear cover (ref. no. 4) and slide to

the right to remove it.
4.13.4 Side cover – removal

Necessary tools:
 4 mm Hex key
1. Disconnect the mains power cable (ref. no. 1).

2. Loosen the screws holding the rail (ref. no. 2) in
place.
3. Unscrew and remove all screws (ref. no. 3).
4. Lift up the side cover (ref. no. 4) to remove.
Flow-i C20 shown in figure.
4.14 Sampling line Nafion – replacement
Prerequisite tasks:
1. Section 4.13.1, Front door – opening, page
167.
2. Section 4.13.3, Rear cover – removal, page
169.
Necessary tools:
 T6 Torx® key
 Adhesive tape

1. Disconnect the sampling line Nafion from the
water trap receptacle. The sampling line Nafion
is connected to the inlet marked “X” on the rear
side of the water trap receptacle.
2. Use adhesive tape to attach the new sampling

line Nafion to the old sampling line.
3. Carefully pull the new sampling line Nafion
through the system.
4. Connect the new sampling line Nafion to the
water trap receptacle “X” inlet.
5. On the front of the system, disconnect the old

sampling line Nafion from the gas analyzer.
6. Move the silicone rubber tube sleeve from the

old to the new sampling line Nafion.
7. Connect the new sampling line Nafion to the

gas analyzer.
4.15 Gas modules

CAUTION: Before removing gas modules make sure that gas supply is disconnected from the
system. Loosen screws and wait a couple of seconds to allow the gas pressure inside the gas
modules to release.
4.15.1 Gas module – removal
Prerequisite tasks:
Section 4.13.3, Rear cover – removal, page 169.
Necessary tools:
 4 mm hex key
1. Slightly loosen (a half to one turn) the screws
that hold the gas module to the docking. There
are two screws for each gas module.
2. Carefully move the gas module several times
from one side to the other. This is to release the
gas pressure in a controlled manner.
3. Unscrew the two screws.
4. Pull out the gas module.
Note: For systems with Gas distribution section of Version A (S/N 4000 and below) and revision 01–07
(e.g. xxxxxxx/05), see label in detail in figure above:
Do not remove all four gas modules at the same time. These systems do not have screws securing the
position for the internal gasket. If all four gas modules are removed, the gasket may come out of position
and cause leakage. From revision 08, the gasket position is secured with screws.
4.15.2 Gas module – disassembly
Prerequisite tasks:
169.
2. Section 4.15.1, Gas module – removal, page
173.
Necessary tools:
 4 mm hex key
Unscrew the four screws to open the gas module.
4.15.3 Filter – replacement
Prerequisite tasks:
1. Section 4.15.1, Gas module – removal, page
173.
2. Section 4.15.2, Gas module – disassembly,
page 173.
 Lint-free cloth
1. Pull out the filter with its rubber seal from the
gas module.
2. Clean the rubber seal with a lint-free cloth. Dirt
particles on the rubber seal may cause
leakage.
3. Put the rubber seal on the new filter.
4. Check if there is moisture in the gas module
filter housing.
Note: Moisture can be an indication of too high
moisture content in the gas supply. Inform the
customer that gas supply must fulfill
requirements for medical grade gases
according to applicable standards. Refer to
technical specifications in the User’s Manual.
5. Check if the filter in the gas module is dirty.

Note: If the filter is dirty, this may indicate poor
function of the gas inlet filters in the gas
distribution section. In this case; replace all gas
inlet filters; central gas supply filters and
cylinder gas supply filters (for systems with
backup gas).
6. Mount the gas module.
4.15.4 Nozzle unit – replacement
Prerequisite tasks:
Section 4.15.1, Gas module – removal, page 173
1. Unlock the lock at the top of the gas module.
2. Pull out the nozzle unit.
Note: In the following step, make sure the O-ring at

the top of the nozzle unit does not come off when
inserting the nozzle unit.
3. Insert the new nozzle unit.
Note: Wait for approximately 10 minutes before
connecting pressure to the gas modules. This is to
allow the membrane to become stable in its
mounted position.
5. Only for systems with Gas distribution section

of Version A (S/N 4000 and below):
The Reflector gas selector setting must be
checked during PM+. Perform this check now
as it must be done with the Gas modules
removed. Check that selector arm is set to O2
as shown in the illustration.
4.15.5 O-rings on gas module docking – replacement
Prerequisite tasks:
Section 4.15.1, Gas module – removal, page 173,
at least the two modules to the left (see figure).
1. Replace the four O-rings on the gas module
docking.
4.15.6 PC 1906 gas block board – removal
Prerequisite tasks:
Section 4.15.1, Gas module – removal, page 173,
only the two modules to the left (as shown in
figure).
Necessary tools:
 2.5 mm hex bit

Note: In the following step, a spacer comes loose
at the bottom on the PC board. If replacing the PC
board, move the washer to the new PC board.
1. Remove the two screws (ref. no 1) holding the
plastic cover (ref. no 2).
2. Unscrew the seven screws (ref. no 3) on
PC 1906 gas block (ref. no 4).
4.16 Gas control section

4.16.1 Pilot valves – removal
Prerequisite tasks:
Necessary tools:
 2.5 mm Hex key
1. Disconnect the pilot valve cable from the
PC 2057/PC 1907 valve drivers board.
2. Unscrew the two screws on the pilot valve.
3. Pull out the pilot valve.
A. Pilot valve
B. Pressure supply pilot valve C. Vaporizer valve
4.16.2 PC 2057 valve drivers board – replacement
Prerequisite tasks:
Necessary tools:
 2.5 mm hex key
1. Disconnect all cables and the tube to PC 1781
pressure transducer board.
2. Unscrew the five screws on PC 2057 valve
drivers’ board.
3. Cut the cable tie on PC 1781 pressure
transducer board.
4. Remove the PC 1781 pressure transducer
board and keep for use together with the
replacement PC 2057 board.
5. Install the new PC 2057 valve drivers’ board in
the reverse order.
4.16.3 PC 1907 valve drivers board – replacement
Prerequisite tasks:
Necessary tools:
 2.5 mm hex key
1. Remove the Fresh gas filter (ref. no. 3).
2. Remove the Fresh gas pipes (ref. nos. 1 and 2)
together with their connecting joints.
3. Disconnect all cables and the tube to PC 1781 pressure transducer board.
4. Unscrew the five screws on PC 1907 valve drivers’ board.
5. Carefully bend out the plastic clamp holding the

PC 1781 pressure transducer board in its
position.
6. Remove the PC 1781 pressure transducer
board and keep for use together with the
replacement PC 1907 board.
7. Install the replacement PC 1907 valve drivers’
board in the reverse order.
4.16.4 Regulators REG1 – REG4 – replacement
Prerequisite tasks:
Necessary tools:
 2 mm hex key
1. Unscrew the two screws (ref. no.1).
2. Carefully pull out the regulator. Pressurized gas
may be released.
3. Install the new regulator(s) in reverse order.
4.16.5 Double channel plate

Note: The silicon bypass channel (ref. no. 2) sealing can cause leakage if put out of its position. Handle
carefully.
4.16.5.1 Double channel plate – removal

Prerequisite tasks:
Necessary tools:
 5 mm Hex key
1. Loosen the two screws (ref. no. 1) holding the
plate.
2. Slide the plate to the left and pull off the plate.
4.16.5.2 Double channel plate – installation

Note: Install the Double channel plate with the system switched Off. If the system is switched On and set to
Standby, the bypass valve will open (pulled in) and will thus not engage the Double channel plate.
Prerequisite tasks:
Section 4.16.5.1, Double channel plate – removal,
page 180.
Necessary tools:
 5 mm Hex key
1. Place the plate onto the screws (1) and press it
firmly to the right as shown in illustration.
Note: Make sure that the plate is not mounted

up-side down! The silicon bypass channel (ref.
no. 2) should be positioned as shown in the
figure.
2. Keep the plate pressed to the right, but pull it
out slightly to release any tensions in the
gaskets.
3. Keep the plate pressed to the right, push in and
gently tighten the two screws holding the plate.
4.17 PC boards
4.17.1 PC 1984/PC 1919, PC 2060/PC 1920, PC 2061/PC 1921, PC 1922, PC 2063/PC 1923 – removal
Refer to section 4.4, PC boards and electrical components on page 148 for detailed information.
Prerequisite tasks:
Necessary tools:
 3 mm hex key
1. Unscrew the two screws (ref. no. 1) on the PC
board cover and remove the cover.
The order of the PC boards (from top to bottom) is
the following:
 PC 1984/PC 1919 expiratory channel board
Note: disconnect tubes for fresh gas pressure

transducer and inspiratory gas as well as signal
cable to patient cassette before removing the
board.
 PC 1922 panel board (requires removal of two
additional screws)
2. Remove the PC board by pulling out the board
from the rack.
Note: When removing PC 2063/PC 1923:

use (for example) two Hex keys to pull out the
board enough to access the cables. Then
disconnect all cables (ref. no. 1), one by one
(see figure).
4.17.2 PC 1903 external connectors board – replacement
4.17.2.1 PC 1903 external connectors board – removal
Prerequisite tasks:
Necessary tools:
 3 mm hex key
1. Remove the aluminum cover (ref. no. 1).
2. Mark and remove all cables (ref. no. 2). The
AC/DC inlet cable is attached with a cable
clamp.
3. Remove the two screws on the right side (ref.
no. 4).
4. Remove the two screws (ref. no. 3).
5. Pull out the assembly.
4.17.2.2 PC 1903 external connectors board – installation

Prerequisite tasks:
Section 4.17.2.1, PC 1903 external connectors
board – removal, page 183.
Necessary tools:
 3 mm hex key
Referring to the removal instructions, install the
components in reverse order.
Note: When mounting the assembly, make sure
that the lower edge of the assembly fits in the board
rail and that the upper edge fits in the recessed
parts (see marked areas in figure).
4.17.3 Memory backup battery – replacement
4.17.3.1 General
Lithium batteries are used on PC 2060/PC 1920 control board, PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board and PC
1922 panel board. These batteries must be replaced every four years. A Technical error message will
appear on the screen if the battery voltage level is too low:
 Battery on PC 2060/PC 1920 control board: TE 501 Memory backup battery depleted.
 Battery on PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board: TE 20 Memory backup battery depleted.
 Battery on PC 1922 panel board: TE 614 Memory backup battery depleted.
Note: Always replace all three batteries at the same time, to keep the same replacement date for the
batteries.
ESD sensitive components. The lithium batteries are mounted on ESD sensitive PC
boards. Refer to chapter Disassembling and assembling, section 4.4.2, Handling PC
boards, on page 148 for further information regarding ESD sensitive components.
4.17.3.2 Replacement procedure
Prerequisite tasks:
 Switch off the system using the Power button.
 Disconnect the mains power cable.
 Disconnect the gas supplies (wall and/or
cylinder).
 Section 4.13.3, Rear cover – removal, page
169.
Necessary tools:
 Side-cutting pliers
 3 mm hex key
 Phillips PH2 screwdriver (for removal of PC
1922 only)
 Remove the PC board cover.
 Pull out the PC board(s) that accommodate(s)
the battery(ies) to replace.
Note: In the following step, do not disconnect the

cable connector without connecting the new battery
first.
Information stored on the PC board memory is
erased if the connector is disconnected. Refer to
section 4.4.5, Information stored on the PC boards
on page 149.
6. Connect the new battery to the empty

connector. The memory functions are now
secured by the new battery.
7. Cut the cable ties holding the old battery to the
PC board.
8. Disconnect and lift off the old battery.
9. Mount the new battery on the PC board using

the new cable ties as shown in the image.
10. Insert the PC board(s) into the corresponding
PC board slot(s).
11. Mount the PC board cover.
12. Log in to the Service & Settings menu and reset
the memory backup battery replacement date in
Service & Settings > Service report.
Recycling. Worn-out batteries must be

recycled or disposed of properly in
accordance with appropriate industrial
4.18 Gas analyzer section

4.18.1 Water trap receptacle – removal
Necessary tools:
T6 Torx® key
1. Unscrew the two screws.
Note: In the following step, the movement is limited
by attached sampling lines and cables.
2. Carefully pull out the water trap receptacle.
4.18.2 O-rings for Water trap receptacle – replacement

1. Remove the O-rings with a suitable tool. Avoid
to cause scratches on the tube connectors
during removal.
2. Install the new O-rings.
4.18.3 AION Platinum gas analyzer – removal
Prerequisite tasks:
Necessary tools:
 2.5 mm hex key
 Side-cutting pliers
1. Mark the tubes to ensure correct connection
when installing the new AION Platinum unit:
o Return line from AION gas analyzer
(ref.no.1)
o Zero calibration gas tube (ref. no.2)
o Sampling line inlet (ref.no.3)
o Purge line (ref.no.4)
2. Disconnect the marked tubes.
3. Use a side-cutting pliers to cut off the cable tie

(ref.no.5) securing the AION Platinum unit.
Note: In the following step, the movement is limited
by an attached cable.
4. Remove the AION Platinum unit by pulling it
according to the arrows A and B.
5. Disconnect the cable connector from the
connector terminal (ref. no. 6) on the AION
Platinum unit.
6. If removal for replacement: Remove the four
screws (ref. no. 7) and keep them for
installation of the replacement PGA.
Figure top right:
Figure bottom right:
4.18.4 Gas analyzer AION ADS – replacement/upgrade
4.18.4.1 Gas analyzer AION ADS – removal

Prerequisite tasks:
Necessary tools:
 3 mm Hex key
1. Mark the tubes to ensure correct connection
when installing the new unit:
o Zero calibration gas (ref. no.1).
o Purge line (ref. no. 2).
o Sampling line (ref. no. 3).
o Return line (ref. no. 4).
2. Carefully disconnect the tubes. Disconnect the
zero calibration gas tube (ref. no.1) at the filter.
3. Carefully disconnect the cable connectors from
PC 1900 Main back-plane:
o AION ADS connector (ref. no. 5).
o O2 sensor connector (ref. no. 6).
4. Remove the four screws (or three screws and a
peg in the upper left corner) holding the AION
ADS mounting bracket.
5. Lift off the complete AION ADS assembly.
4.18.4.2 Gas analyzer AION ADS – installation

Prerequisite tasks:
Section 4.18.4.1, Gas analyzer AION ADS – removal, page 188.
Necessary tools:
 3 mm Hex key
 Mount the gas analyzer ADS in reverse order given in the removal procedure.
4.18.4.3 Upgrading the gas analyzer AION ADS to AION Platinum

The Upgrade kit AION Platinum is available as spare part. The kit contains the following parts:
 Patient gas analyzer AION Platinum.
 Mounting bracket.
 Cable for AION Platinum.
 Filter and tubing for zero calibration gas.
 Tubing for O2 interconnection (mounted on PGA AION).
Note: Equipment for check and calibration of the gas analyzer including O 2 sensor is required, see section
5.3.6, Patient O2 sensor check and calibration, page 237.
Prerequisite tasks:
Section 4.18.4.1, Gas analyzer AION ADS –
removal, page 188.
Necessary tools:
 3 mm Hex key
1. Put the AION Platinum assembly in its position
and tighten the three screws (ref. no. 6).
2. The peg (ref. no. 7) replaces the screw in the
upper left corner. The peg is used to hold
tubing in place and prevent the tubing from
being pinched by the door.
3. Carefully connect the tubing:
o Zero calibration gas (ref. no. 1). Connect at
the filter end.
o Purge line (ref. no. 2).
o Sampling line (ref. no. 3).
o Return line (ref. no. 4).
4. Carefully connect the AION Platinum cable
connector (ref. no. 5) to PC 1900 Main back-
plane.
4.18.5 O2 sensor bracket – installation (AION ADS only)

The O2 sensor bracket kit, intended for the Patient gas analyzer AION ADS, is available as spare part. With
the O2 sensor mounted on this bracket, the potentiometers used during calibration of the O2 sensor are
easier to access.
The O2 sensor bracket kit contains the following parts:
 O2 sensor bracket.
 Screw and nut, 2 each.
 Cable for the O2 sensor.
Prerequisite tasks:
1. Remove the four screws (or three screws and a
peg in the upper left corner) holding the AION
ADS assembly.
2. Lift off the AION ADS assembly.
3. Remove the two screws holding the O2 sensor
(ref. no. 2) to the PGA mounting plate (ref. no.
1).
Necessary tools:
 3 mm Hex key
1. Mount the O2 sensor bracket (ref. no. 3) to the
PGA mounting plate. Use the screws (ref. no.
4) and nuts (ref. no. 5) included in the kit.
2. Mount the O2 sensor on the O2 sensor bracket.
Use the screws (ref. no. 6) previously holding
the O2 sensor to the PGA mounting plate.
3. Reinstall the complete AION ADS assembly.
4. Connect the new O2 sensor cable (ref. no. 7)
included in the kit. Place the cable in the space
between the O2 sensor and the AION.
4.18.6 Control Gas Analyzer (CGA) – removal

From System version 3.0, the Control gas analyzer (CGA) sampling system is disabled. Older systems may
be equipped the CGA sampling parts including three filters in the Insp. sample filter holder field. On these
systems, it is recommended to install the CGA removal kit to reduce leakage risks in the CGA sampling line.
The CGA removal kit is available as spare part. The kit contains the following parts:
 Fresh gas elbow including three O-rings.
 Two threaded plugs; one for the fresh gas elbow and one for connector R2 on the AFGO valve.
 Two metal plugs for the Insp. sample filter holder.
Prerequisite tasks:
Necessary tools:
 2.5 mm Hex key
 3 mm Hex key
1. Disconnect the fresh gas sampling connector
(ref. no. 1) from the fresh gas filter.
2. Disconnect the fresh gas pipe (ref. no. 2) from
the fresh gas sampling connector (ref. no. 1).
3. Mount the three O-rings properly inside the new

fresh gas elbow (ref. no. 3).
4. Connect the fresh gas tube (ref. no. 2) to the
new fresh gas elbow.
5. Connect the fresh gas elbow to the fresh gas
filter.
6. Mount a plug (ref. no. 4) on the fresh gas
elbow.
7. Remove the complete tube connector (ref. no.

5) from R2 on the AFGO valve.
8. Mount a plug in R2 on the AFGO valve.
9. Replace the S1 filter (ref. no. 6) and the R1

filter (ref. no. 7) in the Insp. sample filter holder
with metal plugs.
10. Remove the screws (ref. no. 8) for the CGA

mounting plate.
11. The peg (ref. no. 9) is used to hold all tubing in
place and prevent them from being pinched by
the door. After removal of the CGA, mount the
peg in the PGA mounting hole (ref. no. 10).
4.18.7 MAN/AUTO switch – replacement

There are two existing versions of the MAN/AUTO switch, see section 3.7.2, Manual ventilation switch, page
50.
 Replacing the version B switch implies replacing the whole MAN/AUTO – APL control assembly, see
section 4.18.7.1, Version B – removal, page 193.
 For version A, only the MAN/AUTO switch needs to be replaced, see section 4.18.7.3, Version A –
removal, page 194.
4.18.7.1 Version B – removal
Prerequisite tasks:
167.
169.
Necessary tools:
 2.5 mm hex key
1. Disconnect the cables from the MAN/AUTO
switch (ref. no. 2) and the APL potentiometer
from PC 2057/PC 1907 valve drivers board.
2. Put a sheet of paper on top of the EVAC unit to
prevent screws from falling into the machine.
3. Unscrew the three screws (ref. no. 1) from
below.
4. Lift up the MAN/AUTO switch.
4.18.7.2 Version B – installation

Prerequisite tasks:
Section 4.18.7.1, Version B – removal, page 193.
Necessary tools:
 2.5 mm hex key
 Install the MAN/AUTO switch in reverse order with reference to the removal procedure.
4.18.7.3 Version A – removal

Prerequisite tasks:
167.
169.
Necessary tools:
 2.5 mm hex key
 18 mm socket wrench
1. Disconnect the cables from the MAN/AUTO
switch (ref. no. 2) and the APL potentiometer
from PC 1907 valve drivers board.
below.
4. Remove the connector housing (ref. no. 3) by

turning counterclockwise – bayonet mount.
5. Remove the plastic locking nut (ref. no. 4).
6. Lift up the MAN/AUTO switch.
4.18.7.4 Version A – installation

Prerequisite tasks:
Section Version A – removal on page 198.
Necessary tools:
 2.5 mm hex key
1. Place the new MAN/AUTO switch knob in
position. Note the mounting guide (ref. no. 3) on
the switch.
2. Tighten the plastic locking nut (ref. no. 2) hand
tight.
3. Mount the connector housing (ref. no. 1) by
turning clockwise – bayonet mount.
4. Mount the MAN/AUTO – APL control assembly
in the system. Make sure that the rubber seal is
in correct position.
5. Connect the MAN/AUTO switch and the APL
potentiometer cables to PC 1907.
4.18.7.5 APL potentiometer – replacement

There are basically two different types of mechanical designs for the APL potentiometer:
 Version B, APL potentiometer units with knob scale in zinc metal, see section Version B – removal, page
196, and section Version B – installation, page 197.
 Version A, APL potentiometer units with knob scale in stainless steel, see section Version A – removal,
page 198, and section Version A – installation, page 200.
Version B – removal
Prerequisite tasks:
 Section 4.13.1, Front door – opening, page
167.
169.
Necessary tools:
 2.5 mm hex key
1. Disconnect the APL potentiometer cables from
PC 1907 valve drivers board.
Pull out the cables to the front side.
2. Pull off the cap from the APL knob (ref. no. 1).
3. The potentiometer shaft is attached to the APL
knob with a collet (clamping device) (ref. no. 2).
Loosen (do not remove) the collet and remove
the coupling device (ref. no. 3) together with the
collet.
4. Remove the locking nut (ref. no. 4) and lift out
the potentiometer from the MAN/AUTO – APL
control assembly.
Version B – installation
Prerequisite tasks:
Section 4.18.7.1, Version B – removal, page 193.
Necessary tools:
 2.5 mm hex key
1. Mount the APL potentiometer in the
MAN/AUTO – APL control assembly.
2. Mount and tighten the locking nut (ref. no. 4).
Tightening torque is 2 Nm.
3. Mount the coupling device (ref. no. 2) together

with the collet.
Do not tighten the collet; the potentiometer
shaft must remain free from the potentiometer
knob scale.
4. Connect the APL potentiometer cables to PC
2057/PC 1907.
5. Start the system.
When started and in standby mode, the APL
value is shown in the bottom left corner on the
screen.
6. Set the APL knob to approx. 30 – 40.

7. Using a potentiometer adjuster (thin
screwdriver), adjust the potentiometer until the
reading of the APL value on the screen is the
same as the APL knob setting.
8. Hold the APL knob in this position and tighten
the collet to attach the potentiometer shaft to
the APL knob.
Tightening torque for the collet is 2 Nm.
9. Slowly turn the APL knob from SP to 80 and
check that APL value shown on the screen
corresponds to the knob setting. A small
deviation is acceptable.
10. Perform a calibration of the APL knob, see
section 5.3.5.1, APL knob, page 232.
When the calibration is done, the potentiometer
replacement is completed.
11. Mount the cap onto the APL knob. The filled
circle on the cap must align with SP on the
scale.
Version A – removal
Prerequisite tasks:
167.
169.
Necessary tools:
 2.5 mm hex key
 6–8 mm flat tip screwdriver or 6 mm socket
wrench
1. Disconnect the MAN/AUTO switch and APL
potentiometer cables from PC 1907 valve
drivers board.
below and remove the MAN/AUTO – APL
control assembly from the system.
4. Pull off the cap from the APL knob.

5. The potentiometer shaft is attached to the APL
knob with a collet (clamping device) (ref. no. 4).
Carefully release the potentiometer shaft from
the APL knob.
6. Remove the three screws (ref. no. 6) and lift off

the potentiometer mounting plate (ref. no. 7).
7. Remove the locking nut (ref. no. 9) and lift out
the potentiometer (ref. no. 8) from the mounting
plate.
Version A – installation
Prerequisite tasks:
Section APL potentiometer – re, page 196.
Necessary tools:
 2.5 mm hex key
 6–8 mm flat tip screwdriver or 6 mm socket
wrench
1. Mount the new potentiometer (ref. no. 8) on the
mounting plate (ref. no.7).
Tightening torque for the nut is 2 Nm.
2. Mount the potentiometer mounting plate. Do not
tighten the collet; the potentiometer shaft must
remain free from the APL knob.
3. Mount the MAN/AUTO – APL control assembly
to the system. Make sure that the rubber seal is
in correct position.
4. Connect the MAN/AUTO switch and the APL
potentiometer cables to PC 1907.
5. Start the system.
6. With the system in standby mode, the APL
value is shown on the screen.
7. Set the APL knob to approx. 30 – 40.

8. Using a potentiometer adjuster (thin
screwdriver), adjust the potentiometer until the
reading of the APL value on the screen is the
same as the APL knob setting.
9. Hold the APL knob in this position and tighten
the collet to attach the potentiometer shaft to
the APL knob.
Tightening torque for the collet is 2 Nm.
10. Slowly turn the APL knob from SP to 80 and
check that APL value shown on the screen
corresponds to the knob setting. A small
deviation is acceptable.
11. Perform a calibration of the APL knob, see
section 5.3.5.1, APL knob, page 232.
When the calibration is done, the potentiometer

replacement is completed.
12. Mount the cap onto the APL knob. The filled
circle on the cap must align with SP on the
scale.
4.18.8 Power button – removal
Prerequisite tasks:
Necessary tools:
 3.5 mm flat-head screwdriver
1. Unlock the left and right connector (ref. no. 2)
by turning the center screw (ref. no. 1) 90°
counterclockwise.
2. Pull off the connectors (ref. no. 2) from the
button and the P152 connector on the board.
3. Remove the cable (ref. no. 3) from the P153
connector on the board.
4. Tap the locking nut (ref. no. 4) gently
counterclockwise to loosen it.
5. Unthread the locking nut fully.
6. Open and hold the power button lid on the other

side of the cover.
7. Push the power button through the cover.
4.18.9 Emergency ventilation
Version B. Uses wire coupling, see section 4.18.9.1 Version B

– replacement, page 202.
Version A. Uses “mushroom valve”, see section 4.18.9.2,

Version A – replacement, page 204.
4.18.9.1 Version B – replacement of wire
Prerequisite tasks:
Necessary tools:
 2.5 mm hex key
 3 mm hex key (for the calibration step)
 T10 Torx® key
1. Turn the APL knob counterclockwise until it
stops.
2. Loosen the screw (ref. no. 1) that holds the wire

to the wheel.
3. Unthread the wire from the wheel.
4. Loosen the nut (ref. no. 2) that holds the wire
housing to the angle bracket.
5. At the other end of the wire housing, loosen the

nut (ref. no. 3) that holds the wire housing to
the bracket.
6. On the emergency APL actuator, remove the
screw (ref. no. 4) that holds the wire.
7. Remove the entire wire housing.
8. Mount the new wire by following the reverse
instructions.
9. Calibrate the mechanical APL. Refer to section
5.9, Mechanical APL calibration (emergency
ventilation) on page 291.
4.18.9.2 Version A – replacement of mushroom valve

Prerequisite tasks:
167.
169.
1. Separate the lower part of the valve housing
from the upper part (bayonet mount).
2. The mushroom valve is placed in the lower part
of the valve housing (ref. no. 1). Lift off the old
mushroom valve from the valve housing.
3. Move the metal washer from the old to the new
mushroom valve.
4. Place the new mushroom valve in the valve
housing.
5. Carefully reassemble the valve housing.
4.18.9.3 Version A – replacement of Oxygen flow one-way valve OV13

Prerequisite tasks:
167.
169.
1. The valve is located inside the valve housing
(ref. no. 2). Remove the valve housing from the
oxygen connector block (ref. no. 3)
2. Replace the valve (ref. no. 1). O-rings should
also be replaced if the valve housing is
removed from the oxygen connector block.
Note: Make sure to keep the replacement valve
OV13 clean. Dust or dirt may impair the sealing
and cause leakage.
3. Reassemble the valve housing and the oxygen
connector block.
4.18.9.4 Emergency ventilation lid – removal
Prerequisite tasks:
Necessary tools:
 3 mm hex key
1. Remove the two screws (ref. no. 1).
2. Lift off the plastic hinge unit together with the

emergency ventilation lid.
4.18.9.5 Switches and knobs – removal
O2 flush activation switch/Emergency ventilation switch – removal

The removal procedures for the O2 flush activation switch6 (ref. no. 1) and the emergency ventilation switch6
(ref. no. 2) are similar.
Prerequisite tasks:
Necessary tools:
 2 mm hex key
1. Open front cover right.
Note: The following step exposes two loose parts
under spring load in the valve housing.
2. Remove the pneumatic valve (ref. no. 1 or ref.
no. 2) by loosening the two screws (ref. no. 3).
3. Turn the collar (ref. no. 4) counterclockwise to
release the switch.
4. Pull out the activation switch (or the emergency

ventilation switch).
6
There are two existing versions of the switch. However, the removal procedures are the same for the both versions.
Knob for O2 gas supply and flow meter – removal

1. Take note of the rotational position of the knob.
2. Pull out the knob.
Note: When mounting the knob, take note of the flat
surface on the shaft and how it mates to the knob.
Knob for Emergency APL – removal

1. Turn the knob counterclockwise until it stops.
2. Take note of the rotational position of the knob.
3. Pull out the knob.
4.18.9.6 DIM knob for reading lamp (LED lamp) – replacing

Version B: Systems having a 24 V LED lamp and do not require a LED
driver.
The DIM knob spare part for these systems is equipped with cables and is
delivered with wire connectors to be used when replacing the DIM knob,
see section Version B – Replacing, page 208, for instructions.
Version A: Systems having a 12 V LED lamp and a LED driver mounted
inside the swivel arm.
The DIM knob spare part for these systems is equipped with cables and a
cable connector to be connected to the LED driver.
Version B – Replacing
Necessary tools:
 side-cutting pliers
 pliers
1. Cut the three cables close to the DIM knob (ref.
no. 1).
2. Remove the cap on the knob and unscrew the
screw holding the knob.
3. Remove the knob.
4. Connect the wires on the new knob with the

corresponding cables in the swivel arm using
the wire connectors. Stripping or twisting of the
wire is not required.
5. Press the wire connectors firmly with a pliers,
so that the moisture-resistant gel (ref. no. 3)
is pressed out from the connector.
Note: The connector’s movable part (ref. no. 2)
must be pressed fully into the connector
housing.
6. Mount the new knob on the swivel arm.
4.19 Power backup battery – replacement

4.19.1 General
Important: The power backup batteries replacement date must be reset after replacement. The
replacement date is set using the Service report menu (Replaced internal battery).
CAUTION: Be very careful when the battery compartments cover is removed,

e.g. during replacement of the Power backup battery. Short-circuit of a connected
battery may cause damage to PC 1903.
Recycling. Worn-out batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly in

accordance with appropriate industrial and environmental standards.
4.19.2 General prerequisite tasks – all systems

1. Switch off the system using the Power button.
2. Disconnect the mains power cable.
3. Disconnect the gas supplies (wall and/or cylinder).
4. Disconnect the cables (for battery and battery sensing) on PC 1903 external conector board.
CAUTION: To avoid short circuit – always disconnect the minus (black) pole first when removing
an old battery and connect the positive (red) pole first when installing a new battery.
4.19.3 Batteries
There are two types of power backup batteries:
Serial number Version Comments

1  12V DC, 38AH, color orange
 Replace every three year7
See sections 4.19.5 to 4.19.7.
 12V DC, 18AH, color black
2
 Replace every four year7
See sections 4.19.8 to 4.19.9.
CAUTION: When replacing the power backup battery, make sure that the replacement battery
is of the same type and capacity (18 Ah;black respective 38 Ah;orange) as the old battery.
Installing wrong battery can cause damage to the battery.
7
The lifetime of the battery may be reduced if it is used frequently to supply power or if the battery temperature is above 40˚C.
4.19.4 Battery mounting devices

There are a number of existing versions of battery mounting devices:
Serial number Version Comments
A Intended for C20/C30, phased out in production during Q3

2012, see section 4.19.5.
B Intended for C20/C30, introduced in production during Q3

2012, see section 4.19.5.
C Intended for C40, two different versions (2 or 4 screws), see

section 4.19.6.
D Intended for C40, see section 4.19.7.
E Intended for C20/C30, see section 4.19.8.
F Intended for C40, see section 4.19.9.
4.19.5 Power backup battery – replacement, Version A and Version B, C20/C30
4.19.5.1 Removal
Necessary tools:
Version A
 2.5 mm hex key
 5 mm hex key
Version B
 4 mm Hex key
1. Remove the drawers to access the battery
compartment.
2. Release the screw (ref. no. 1) and lift off the
battery compartment cover (ref. no. 2).
3. Version A only: Remove the screws (ref. no.

3) and lift off both battery clamps (ref. no. 4).
4. Version B only: Remove the screws (ref. no.
3). Slightly loosen the screws (ref. no. 5) if
required. Lift off the battery clamp (ref. no. 4).
5. Use the handles (ref. no. 6) and lift up the
battery carrier together with the battery.
6. Disconnect the battery cables from the battery.
Version A
Version B
4.19.5.2 Installation
Prerequisite tasks:
Section 4.19.5.1, Removal, page 210.
Necessary tools:
Version A
 2.5 mm hex key
 5 mm hex key
Version B
 4 mm Hex key
1. Connect the battery cables to the new battery. Version A
Tighten the nuts firmly.
2. Place the new battery in correct position in the
compartment and secure the battery with the
battery clamp(s) (ref. no. 4).
3. Version B only: If required, tighten the screws
(ref. no. 5) to secure the battery clamp.
4. Fasten and tighten the screws (ref. no. 3).
5. Mount the battery compartment cover.
Version B
4.19.6 Power backup battery – replacement, Version C, C40
4.19.6.1 Removal
Necessary tools:
 2.5 mm hex key
 5 mm hex key
compartment.
2. Remove the screws (ref. no. 1) and lift off the
3. Remove the screws (ref. no. 3), two or four

screws, and lift off the battery clamp (ref. no. 4).
4. Use the handles (ref. no. 5) and lift up the
battery compartment.
5. Lift out the battery carrier from the battery
compartment.
6. Disconnect the battery cables from the battery
Prerequisite tasks:
Section 4.19.6, Power backup battery –
replacement, Version C, page 212.
Necessary tools:
 2.5 mm hex key
 5 mm hex key
1. Connect the battery cables to the new battery.
Tighten the nuts firmly.
2. Place the new battery in correct position in the
compartment and secure the battery with the
battery clamp.
4.19.7 Power backup battery – replacement, Version D, C40
4.19.7.1 Removal
Prerequisite tasks – special for C40:
 Disconnect the system from the ceiling pendant
and move the system to a suitable place for the
battery replacement:
o Remove the vaporizers and all loose
assessories
o Make sure that the swivel arm is secured
before tipping the system.
o With the pendant console as a support,
carefully tip system so that it is lying on the
lifting console.
Necessary tools:
 2.5 mm hex key
 5 mm hex key
1. Remove the screws (ref. no. 1) holding the
battery compartment cover.
2. Remove the battery compartment cover from
underneath the system.
3. Remove the screws (ref. no. 3) holding the

clamp (ref. no. 4) that secure the battery to the
compartment cover. Do not cut the cable ties
attached to the clamp.
4. Starting with the black minus pole (ref. no. 2)
disconnect the battery cables.
5. Remove the battery.
Prerequisite tasks:
replacement, Version D, page 214.
Necessary tools:
 2.5 mm hex key
 5 mm hex key
1. Starting with the red plus pole (ref. no. 5)
connect the battery cables to the new battery.
2. Mount the screws (ref. no. 3) holding the clamp
(ref. no. 4) that secure the battery to the
compartment cover.
4. Carefully lift up the system to standing position.
4.19.8 Power backup battery – replacement, Version E, C20/C30
4.19.8.1 Removal
Necessary tools:
 4 mm hex key
 5 mm hex key
compartment.
2. Remove the screws (ref. no. 1) and lift off the
3. Remove the four screws (ref. no. 5) and lift off

the mounting plate (ref. no. 6) holding the
battery in place.
4. Lift out the battery.
5. Disconnect the battery cables (ref. nos. 3 and
4).
Prerequisite tasks:
replacement, Version E, page 216.
Necessary tools:
1. 4 mm hex key
2. 5 mm hex key
3. 8 mm socket wrench
1. Measure the voltage over the battery poles.
A voltage of 12.5V ± 0.1V is required.
2. Put the new battery in its position and install the
mounting plate. Tighten the screws.
3. Starting with the plus (red) pole, connect the
battery cables (ref. nos. 3 and 4) to the new
battery. Place the temperature sensor cable
(ref. no. 7) on top.
4. Tighten the terminal screws.
4.19.9 Power backup battery – replacement, Version F, C40
4.19.9.1 Removal
Prerequisite tasks – special for C40:
 Disconnect the system from the ceiling pendant
and move the system to a suitable place for the
battery replacement:
o Remove the vaporizers and all loose
assessories.
o Make sure that the swivel arm is secured
before tipping the system.
o With the pendant console as a support,
carefully tip system so that it is lying on the
lifting console.
Necessary tools:
 4 mm hex key
1. Remove the four screws (ref. no. 1).
2. Hold the battery compartment cover with one

hand to prevent the cover, together with the
battery, to fall down. Pull the cover, together
with the battery, upwards to release the hinged
side of the cover.
Place the cover, together with the battery, on
the floor.
3. Remove the battery terminal screws:

1. First remove the black (minus) battery
terminal (ref. no. 2) and disconnect the
cables that are connected to the terminal.
2. Remove the screws for the red (plus)
battery terminal (ref. no. 3) and disconnect
the cables that are connected to the
terminal.
4. Remove the nut (ref. no. 4) holding the clamp
(ref. no. 5) that secure the battery to the
compartment cover.
5. Remove the battery.
Prerequisite tasks:
replacement, Version F, page 217.
Necessary tools:
1. 4 mm hex key
2. 10 mm socket wrench
1. Measure the voltage over the battery poles.
A voltage of 12.5V ± 0.1V is required.
2. Put the new battery in its position and install the
mounting plate. Tighten the nut (ref. no. 4).
3. Starting with the plus (red) pole, connect the

battery cables to the new battery. Place the
temperature sensor cable on top.
4. Carefully lift up the system to standing position.
Chapter 5 – Service procedures
5 Service procedures
5.1 Service key

The Service key is a USB memory stick provided to personnel trained and authorized by Getinge to perform
installation, service or maintenance of the system.
The Service key with associated access code is personal and must not be handed over to any other person.
The access code is unique for each Service key. The Service key cannot be copied.
The Service key gives access to different levels in the built-in service software:
 Tools
 Service & Settings
Note
 When saving information, such as logs and screenshots, to the Service key, allow the saving procedure
to complete before removing the Service key from the system. Follow the on-screen instructions.
 Make sure to log out, by selecting Close, from Service & Settings when completed. If the Service key is
removed while the Service & Settings menu is still open, access to Service & Settings remains.
5.2 Tools

1. Insert the Service key.
2. Push the Menu button.
3. Tap Tools.
Two service tools appear on the screen:
 Gas analyzer tool
 Vaporizer tool
 AGC tools (System version 4.0 and above)
5.2.1 Gas analyzer tool
The gas analyzer tool is used to display metrics

from the gas analyzer, which – for example – can
be used when verifying the gas analyzer.
The CO2 concentration is displayed in %. The CO2
concentration unit is independent of the unit chosen
in startup configuration.
5.2.2 Vaporizer tool
Shows the status of the active vaporizer, such as:
 Measured pressure by the vaporizer pressure

transducer. This information can be used as an
approximate control of REG1 (120 kPa). Note
that the pressure may vary due to tolerances in
REG1, temperature and agent volume in the
container.
 Temperature measured by the temperature
sensor in the vaporizer chamber.
 Latest performed System checkout.
 Software version installed in the vaporizer.
5.2.3 AGC tool

The AGC (Automatic Gas Control) software option
and the AGC tool were introduced with System
version 4.0.
 Intended for advanced troubleshooting.
 Use the Save screen function to copy this
screen. Enclose the screenshot when
contacting MCC HSC or your local Getinge
representative.
 The AGC tool will be displayed also on units
without the AGC option.
Note that the screenshot must be captured during
ventilation. In Standby, the values shown are not
useful for troubleshooting.
5.3 Service & Settings

Service & Settings is a built-in software for troubleshooting, service and maintenance of the system.
Service & Settings information in this manual applies to system version 4.7.
Note
 Service & Settings must not be activated with a patient connected to the system.
 Service & Settings can only be accessed in Standby mode. The system automatically goes into standby
mode when starting the system (refer to the User’s Manual how to set the system in Standby if a process
is on-going).
 For an overview of the functions on the Service & Settings menu, refer to the Service & Settings diagram
in section 10, Diagrams starting on page 369.
5.3.1 Logging in to Service & Settings

1. With the system in Standby, insert the Service
key.
2. Press the Menu button.
3. Tap Service & Settings. This shows the Service

& Settings user category screen.
4. Tap Technician.
The Start remote services button is displayed on
the Service & Settings user category screen.
Remote services network parameters are set in
Settings > Network.
A keypad to enter the access code is displayed.

There are four levels in the user category
Technician:
 Biomed: Access code 1973 (default). Service
key not required. Described in the User’s
Manual.
 Authorized biomed: For hospital personnel
trained and authorized by Getinge. Service key
with personal access code required.
 Sales & Service Units (SSU) or Sales & Service
Partners (SSP): For trained and authorized
Getinge and Getinge partners personnel.
Service key with personal access code
required.
 Headquarter: For Getinge headquarter only.
Service key with personal access code
required.
The Service & Settings overview screen is

displayed.
 Status
 Logs
 Tests
 Calibration
 Service functions
 Service report
 Startup configuration
 Settings
These functions are described in this section.
The Service & Settings diagram in section
10, Diagrams starting on page 369 shows the
SSU/SSP access level.
When completed, make sure to log out by tapping

Close.
If the Service key is removed with Service &
Settings open, limited access to Service & Settings
still remains.
5.3.2 Status
Prerequisites:
 Log in to Service & Settings, see section 5.3.1, Logging in to Service & Settings, page 223.
 Tap Status.
To view the content in the Status tab, see section 10, Diagrams, on page 369.
5.3.3 Logs
A number of logs are accessible in Service & Settings. The logs can be viewed and used for troubleshooting
of the unit.
Prerequisites:
Necessary tools:
 USB memory stick for downloading logs. Only Getinge approved USB memory sticks must be used.

 Tap Logs. This shows the selectable logs
Logs:
o Alarms
o Ventilation settings
o Events
Service logs:
o Test results
o Technical alarms
o Configurations
o Installation
o Service report
The logs can be displayed on the screen or saved

to a USB memory stick.
To display logs on the screen:
1. Select the logs.
2. Select one of the following display alternatives:
 View latest
 Time selection
3. Tap View.
5.3.3.1 Saving log files to a USB memory stick

For support, download logs and send to MCC HSC or to your local Getinge representative. When
downloading logs for support, make sure all required logs are included. Refer to the instructions below.
Prerequisites:
Necessary tools:
 USB memory stick for downloading logs. Only Getinge approved USB memory sticks must be used.
1. Tap Logs.
2. Tap Save logs to USB memory.

Logs for support (to MCC HSC):
If the logs will be enclosed for support, do not select
individual logs on the Logs menu. Tap Save to USB
memory. All logs are encrypted and copied to the
“Logs and Data” folder on the USB memory stick.
Logs for other purposes:
If individual logs are selected on the Logs menu,
these logs are merged into one text file and saved
in the User Logs folder on the USB memory stick.
3. Tap OK.
All log files have now been saved in a Logs and
Data folder on the USB memory stick.
5.3.4 Tests
Prerequisite tasks:
Necessary tools:
 A 14-18-20 mm rubber plug included in the Leakage detector tool kit (required for the AFGO leakage
check only).
 Tap Tests. This shows the following menus:

o System checkout
o Control
o Monitoring
o Panel
o Leakage check
5.3.4.1 System checkout

 Tap System checkout.
In the tests system checkout display, separate tests
included in system checkout can be selected.
The system checkout tests are described in section
6, Troubleshooting on page 303.
5.3.4.2 Subsystem tests
The Test menu also contains the following:

 Control
 Monitoring
 Panel
The control, monitoring and panel tests are
included in System checkout, but when selected on
the Tests menu they are performed individually.
The Monitoring dialog.
The Panel dialog.
5.3.4.3 Leakage check
Five leakage checks are available:
 Multiple pressure leakage. Refer to section

Multiple pressure leakage on page 230.
 Internal leakage. Refer to section Internal
leakage on page 230.
 AFGO leakage. Refer to section AFGO leakage
on page 230.
 AUTO ventilation leakage. Refer to the
description in section 6, Troubleshooting on
page 303.
 MAN ventilation leakage. Refer to the
description in section 6, Troubleshooting on
page 303.
Multiple pressure leakage
This test is equal to the AUTO ventilation leakage

test, but is performed with increasing pressure.
1. Select Multiple pressure leakage.
2. Tap Start. The test now starts at 10 cmH2O and
is increased to 120 cmH2O in steps of
10 cmH2O.
If the multiple pressure leakage check fails, the
Test result log includes Check Failure (CHK)
logs/data. Each CHK has a unique Check Failure
Identifier (CFI).
Internal leakage

1. Make sure the system has passed a complete
System checkout.
2. Select Internal leakage.
3. Tap Start. The test now applies a pressure of
80 cmH2O.
The test can be used as an optional check. The
check can point out errors that may cause a future
leakage in the system.
If the internal pressure leakage check fails the Test
result log includes Check Failure (CHK) logs/data.
Each CHK has a unique Check Failure Identifier
(CFI).
AFGO leakage
Perform the AFGO leakage check test during:
 Installation of AFGO option. The AFGO option is available as a factory-mounted option, or as an on-site
upgrade.
 Preventive maintenance
 Troubleshooting
The AFGO leakage check is available in all systems, not only systems with AFGO option active. The AFGO
leakage check can only be performed on systems equipped with an AFGO valve.

1. Make sure the system has passed a complete
System checkout.
2. Connect the Air and O2 gas supply.
3. Use the 14-18-20 mm rubber plug (included in
the Leakage detector tool kit) to plug the AFGO
connector.
4. Tap Tests.
5. Tap Leakage check.
6. Select AFGO leakage.
7. Tap Start. The test now pressurizes the system
and measures any leakage between the fresh
gas module and the plugged AFGO connector.
If the leakage is above 30 ml/min at a pressure
of 50 cmH2O, the check fails.
If the leakage check fails the Test result log
includes Check Failure (CHK) logs/data. Each
CHK has a unique Check Failure Identifier
(CFI).
8. Remove the rubber plug from the AFGO
connector when the test is completed.
5.3.5 Calibration
Prerequisites:
Necessary tools:
 Equipment listed in each calibration procedure.

 Tap Calibration. This shows four calibration
procedures:
o APL knob
o Barometer
o Gas analyzer
o Touch screen
The four calibration procedures are described
below.
5.3.5.1 APL knob

The APL potentiometer must be calibrated:
 After replacing the APL potentiometer.
 If the set value differs from the value on the screen.
 After replacing PC 1922 panel board
 In case of malfunction in the memory backup battery on PC 1922 panel board
Manual check of Emergency ventilation system according to instructions in the User’s Manual.
1. Tap Calibration.
2. Tap APL knob.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
5.3.5.2 Barometer
The barometer must be calibrated:
 If the barometer test in system checkout fails.
 If a technical error code indicates barometer error.
 If the Barometric pressure check performed during installation or Preventive maintenance shows that
calibration is required, meaning that the Current barometer pressure differs more than ±5% from the
actual barometric pressure.
 After replacing PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board or in case of malfunction in the memory backup
battery on PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board.
After any installation, maintenance or service intervention in the system, perform a system checkout and a
manual check of the Emergency ventilation system according to instructions in the User’s Manual.
Necessary equipment:
 Barometer or information about the barometric pressure at the installation site.
Note: The actual barometric pressure is affected by altitude and weather. Make sure that the absolute
barometric pressure at your current location and elevation is used. Do not use barometric pressure readings
from a weather service as these typically report barometric pressure at sea level.
Barometer calibration procedure

1. Tap Calibration.
2. Tap Barometer.
3. Use the keypad to enter a new barometer
pressure.
4. Tap Set.
Make sure that the new Current barometer
pressure is the set value.
Note that the new Current barometer pressure
value may differ 1–2 kPa from the set value.
5.3.5.3 Gas analyzer

This chapter covers gas analyzer check and calibration for
 Patient gas analyzer AION Platinum including O2 sensor Hummingbird Paracube Sprint.
 Patient gas analyzer AION ADS including O2 sensor Servomex PM1111E.
Important
 Before starting any check or calibration of AION or O2 sensor, read the complete instructions below to
be familiar with the procedures.
 Leakage in the system will result in a faulty calibration. Always perform a System checkout or at least a
leakage check before starting the calibration. To perform a leakage check, select either Leakage check
on the Standby menu or AUTO ventilation leakage and MAN ventilation leakage in Service & Settings.
 After any installation, maintenance or service intervention in the system, perform a System checkout and
a Manual check of Emergency ventilation system according to instructions in the User’s Manual.
CAUTION: The calibration gas contains substances that may be detrimental to your health.
During use of calibration gas, assure that the system is connected to an effective gas
evacuation system, e.g., the hospital’s EVAC system.
Artema Developer’s Toolkit software

The Artema Developer’s Toolkit (ADT) software is required to calibrate the O 2 sensor Servomex PM1111E
and Hummingbird Paracube Sprint.
When to calibrate
The gas analyzer must be calibrated:
 If the Patient gas analyzer AION check or the O2 sensor check indicates that calibration must be
performed. It is only required to calibrate the unit (AION or O2 sensor) that failed during the test. If both
units failed, always start with O2 sensor calibration.
 If either AION ADS or O2 sensor Servomex PM1111E has been replaced, the O2 sensor must be
calibrated to save the O2 sensor calibration values in AION ADS.
 In case of Technical errors and/or System Checkout failure.
Required equipment
 Calibration gas and equipment (see further information below):
o P/N 7265908 Collection bag
o P/N 7265890 Gas regulator

o P/N 5736322 Calibration gas refill
o O2 with concentration 40–100% and inaccuracy better than 1% can be used as an alternative to the
Getinge calibration gas for check and calibration of the O2 sensor. Local supply.
 Gas evacuation system for the calibration gas.
 For calibration of the O2 sensor:
o PC or laptop with Artema Developer’s Toolkit (ADT) software. The software must be started with
local administrator rights on the PC.
o Null modem cable (DB9 connector) including a gender changer, to connect The system to
PC/Laptop. Local purchase.
o USB to serial adapter if there is no serial connector on the PC/laptop. Local purchase.
o Flat-head screwdriver for potentiometers.
 Service key to access Service & Settings.
Calibration gas and equipment

The Getinge calibration gas and equipment stated above must be used for the “Patient gas analyzer AION
check and calibration”.
This calibration gas is also recommended, but not required, for the “Patient O2 sensor check and calibration”.
If other O2 calibration gas is used, the following requirements must be fulfilled:
 O2 concentration 40–100%. Note: The higher O2 concentration in the calibration gas used, the better
accuracy of the calibration.
 Relative gas inaccuracy must be better than 1%.
 The calibration gas flow must be adapted to the gas analyzers sampling flow (200 ml/min).
During calibration of the O2 sensor, a sampling flow of 200 ml/min is used:
 If the calibration gas supply flow is below 200 ml/min, a gas reservoir must be used to ensure sufficient
calibration gas supply. The calibration gas equipment stated above (delivered by Getinge) is set to
approx. 150 ml/min and equipped with a collector bag as gas reservoir.
 If the calibration gas supply flow is above 200 ml/min, there must be a calibration gas bleed-flow so that
the gas analyzer is not exposed to an overpressure.
Prerequisites for calibration

Prerequisites for a successful calibration are:
 Ensure that the system operates within its specified operation temperature, humidity and atmospheric
pressure (refer to the User’s Manual).
 Ensure that the calibration gas has reached a stable temperature within the specified operating
temperature range. Check manufacturers label on the gas bottle for further information.
 Ensure that the system is properly connected to a gas evacuation system.
 Start the system and allow it to work in an operating mode during 10 minutes. This will warm up and
stabilize the system. If not possible to run in operating mode, set the system in Standby mode for at least
10 minutes.
 Ensure that a System checkout has been performed successfully.
Patient gas analyzer AION check and calibration
1. Tap Calibration.
2. Tap Gas analyzer.
3. Check that the Prerequisites are fulfilled.
4. Tap Start.
5. Connect the breathing circuit (Y-piece) to the

test plug. Make sure that the sampling line is
properly connected.
6. Tap Continue. An additional start test sequence
(a leakage test and a gas analyzer test) will
now be performed. The start test may take a
few minutes.
Note: If the start test fails, the calibration procedure
will end and return to the start page with an error
message.
7. Connect the calibration gas kit to the water trap

via a regular patient sampling line.
The 3-way-valve will not be used and it is
recommended to remove it. Do not open the
calibration gas bottle valve yet.
8. Tap Continue. A leakage check of the

calibration gas kit will now be performed.
The software will wait for the gas analyzer to
enter the “full accuracy mode” before starting
the leakage check.
During this leakage check, the gas analyzer
pump works against a closed calibration gas
valve in flow control mode. The flow is set to at
least 100 ml/min. The flow measured must be
less than 12 ml/min for the test to pass. If the
test fails, the calibration procedure will end with
an error message.
9. Open the calibration gas bottle valve and

carefully fill the collector bag with calibration
gas.
The bag will not withstand high gas pressure. If
required, adjust the calibration gas bottle valve
to keep a sufficient amount of calibration gas in
the collector bag during the calibration
procedure.
10. Tap Continue. The concentration values
measured by the selected gas analyzer will now
be displayed.
11. Check that all values are stable. The Flow

value must be within valid interval.
12. Tap Continue.
Tapping Continue with the Flow value outside
valid interval will end the calibration procedure
and display an error message.
13. Tap OK to return to the start page.
 If calibration values already were within valid

interval, no calibration will be performed. Last
page in the calibration procedure will
automatically be displayed.
 If calibration was required, new temporary
calibration values will now be displayed but not
saved.
The new values must be accepted (saved) or
rejected within 30 seconds.
14. Tap Accept or Reject.
 The values must be within the valid intervals to
be accepted.
 Reject or timeout will retain the old calibration
values.
15. Close the calibration gas bottle valve.

16. Do one of the following:
 Tap Finish to return to the Calibration gas
analyzer start menu.
 Tap Factory Default to restore factory
calibration and return to the Calibration gas
analyzer start menu.
17. Continue with further calibrations or disconnect
the calibration gas bottle.
WARNING! Perform a Vaporizer test

to verify that the calibration of the gas
analyzer is correct.
 A completed calibration sequence will display the last page in the calibration procedure. A dialog on this
page will display the result of the calibration:
o If the calibration check resulted in measured calibration values already within valid intervals, the text
Calibration not necessary will appear.
o If calibration was performed and accepted, the text Calibration accepted by user will appear.
o A cancelled calibration will also end at the last page if the cancellation was submitted while showing
a page displaying calibration values. In this case, the text Calibration cancelled by user. Ensure that
the calibration gas bottle valve is closed will appear.
 The result of the calibration procedure is saved in the Service report log in Service & Settings. See Logs
> Service report.
 The result of the calibration procedure (e.g., Last calibration and Last calibration check) is also saved in
Gas analyzer status in Service & Settings. See Status > Gas analyzer.
5.3.6 Patient O2 sensor check and calibration
5.3.6.1 Calibration gas setup
1. Connect the calibration gas kit to the water trap

via a regular patient sampling line. Do not open
the calibration gas bottle valve yet.
2. Make sure that the 3-way-valve on the
calibration gas tube is set to “room Air”.
Note: This setup shows equipment delivered by Getinge. If other calibration gas and equipment is used, see
information in section, Required equipment on page 233.
5.3.6.2 Patient O2 sensor check

This check is not performed in Service & Settings, but the USB service key must be connected.
Note: This check, as described above, is performed with the gas and equipment delivered by Getinge. If
other calibration gas and equipment is used, the procedure and the acceptance values must be adapted.
The gas measurement accuracy for different O2 concentrations is stated in the User’s Manual, chapter
Technical specifications, section Gas analyzer.
1. Connect the USB service key.
2. Set the system to Manual ventilation (MAN).
3. Push the Start case button.
4. Push the Menu button.
5. Tap Tools > Gas analyzer tool.
6. Connect the calibration gas kit.
7. Open the calibration gas bottle valve and carefully fill the collector bag with calibration gas. The bag will
not withstand high gas pressure. The 3-way-valve must be set to “room Air”.
8. Set the 3-way-valve to ”calibration gas”. If required, adjust the calibration gas bottle valve to keep a
sufficient amount of calibration gas in the collector bag during the calibration procedure.
9. Wait 30 seconds for stabilization.
10. Check the displayed value for Patient O2 in the Gas analyzer tool.
11. If the displayed value is within valid range 47.7–56.3% when using the Getinge calibration gas,
calibration is not required. If other calibration gas is used, see Gas measurement accuracy in the User’s
Manual (Technical specifications > Gas analyzers).
2. Allow the system to purge the gas in the calibration setup, including the collection bag, into the gas
evacuation system.
3. Set the 3-way-valve to “room Air”.
4. Remove the calibration gas kit.
5. Select End case.
12. If the displayed value is outside valid range, calibration is required:
2. Allow the system to purge the gas in the calibration setup, including the collection bag, into the gas
evacuation system.
3. Set the 3-way-valve to “room Air”.
4. Select End case.
5. Continue with section 5.3.6.3, Patient O2 sensor calibration on page 238.
5.3.6.3 Patient O2 sensor calibration

To calibrate the O2 sensor, the Artema Developer’s Toolkit (ADT) software must be used.
Note: If either AION ADS or O2 sensor Servomex PM1111E has been replaced, the O2 sensor must be
calibrated to save the O2 sensor calibration values in AION ADS.
Connection of the system to ADT

In Service & Settings:
1. Tap Service functions.
3. Select Connect to AION through COM2.
Note: Do not tap Disconnect before the calibration
is completed.
4. Connect the service cable between RS-232

(FCI 2) and the serial (COM) port on the PC.
Note: There are two RS-232 connectors. Use the
one that is indicated in the figure.
5. Start the ADT software as local admin on the

PC. If the ADT software is not started as local
admin, communication with The system cannot
be established.
When started, the ADT software will search for
connected system and set correct communication
parameters.
The system must have been switched on for 10
minutes before the gas analyzer is ready and
calibration can be started. This is shown when Op
Mode has turned from ISO to Full.
Note
If the Op Mode has not turned from ISO to Full after
10 minutes (see the counter in the toolbar), do the
following:
 Perform a reference measurement.
 If Op Mode still shows ISO after the reference
measurement, restart the ADT software.
Span calibration of O2 sensor

1. Click Maintenance. Data will be downloaded
and a test of AION will be performed
automatically. Ignore the test results, no actions
are required if the test fails.
2. Click Gas accuracy check. Tab Step 1 will now
be active.
3. On tab Step 1:
1. Click Gas containing O2 for selective or
calibration of O2 accuracy.
2. Click Next to continue to the Step 2 tab.
4. Follow the instruction on the Step 2 tab.

Note
 There is 30 seconds delay before the Next
button becomes active.
 Only use O2 source with known concentration
and inaccuracy.
On tab Step 3:
5. Connect the calibration gas kit. The 3-way-
valve must be set to ”room Air”.
6. Follow the instruction on the Step 3 tab.
The system now checks if span calibration is

needed.
If span calibration is needed, the dialog box to the
right will appear.
7. Click Span calibration.
8. Click Continue.
9. Click OK.
If span calibration is not needed, the dialog box to

the right will appear.
10. Click OK.
Span calibration failure
If the span calibration fails, clearing the earlier span

calibration might solve the calibration issue.
1. Click Clear span calibration on the Step 2 tab of
the span calibration. This will restore the
calibration factor to factory default.
2. Perform a Patient O2 sensor check or a Gas
analyzer test in Service & Settings. If the gas
analyzer issue is solved, the calibration is
approved.
If this does not solve the calibration issue, redo the
complete Span calibration of O2 sensor procedure.
Hardware adjustment for AION ADS only:

If span calibration or clearing of the old span
calibration does not solve the gas analyzer issue,
an O2 sensor calibration is required. This calibration
includes a hardware adjustment of the
potentiometers on the O2 sensor:
1. Click O2 Sensor Calibration.
2. Follow the instructions in each tab.
Note:
With the O2 sensor Servomex 1111E mounted on
the O2 sensor bracket (ref. no.1), the potentio-
meters used during calibration of the O2 sensor are
easier to access.
For installation instructions, see section 4.18.5, O2
sensor bracket – installation (AION ADS only),
page 189.
Test after calibration

After the calibration, test the O2 sensor according to section 5.3.6.2, Patient O2 sensor check on page .
5.3.6.4 Touch screen

The touch screen uses a nine-point calibration algorithm and must be calibrated:
 If an inaccuracy is seen in the touch screen function.
 After replacing PC 1922 panel board
 In case of malfunction in the memory backup battery on PC 1922 panel board.

Note: After any installation, maintenance or service intervention in the system, perform a system checkout
and a manual check of the Emergency ventilation system according to instructions in the User’s Manual.
Touch screen calibration procedure

1. Tap Calibration.
2. Tap Touch screen. This shows a screen with 9
reference points.
3. Use a narrow tipped tool and press at the

center of each cross mark.
 Each pressed cross mark generates a value.
The value is used as a sample point for the
corresponding reference point.
 The cross mark color changes to green to
indicate that the sample point is accepted.
 The same cross mark can be pressed several
times. The new sample point value overwrites
the old value.
 Pointing at another part of the screen makes
the screen flash in yellow and generates an
attention tone. This indicates that the sample
point is rejected.
4. When all 9 cross marks are pressed and green
the Calibrate button is enabled.
5. Tap Calibrate to complete the touch screen
calibration.
To restart the touch screen calibration procedure:

 Tap Delete all marks. This deletes all accepted
sample points and the color turns black.
To cancel the touch screen calibration procedure:
 Tap Cancel. This deletes all sample points and
the screen is closed. Old calibration values are
retained.
5.3.7 Service functions

The menu Service functions is used for service and for troubleshooting.
Prerequisites:

1. Tap Service functions. This shows the following
service functions:
 Valve tests
 Gas analyzer
2. Tap Valve tests.

System and vaporizer valves can now be set
independently to open or closed to check each
valve function for service purposes.
3. Press the Reset Valves button when
completed.

The AION gas analyzer communicates over a serial
communication interface. It is possible to get
external access to this interface via the system
COM2 port.
Use during calibration of the O2 sensor.
5.3.8 Service report

Used by Field Service Engineers to create and save service and maintenance information. The selected
service tasks are logged in the Service report log.
Prerequisites:

 Tap Service report. The following tasks can be
selected and reported:
o Performed preventive maintenance
o Replaced expiratory membrane
o Replaced backlight
o Replaced internal battery (power backup
battery)
o Reset internal battery errors (to reset
persistent Technical Errors, e.g., TE77)
o Replaced memory backup batteries
(batteries on PC boards).
It is also possible to tap Open keyboard to type
information to the service report.
Note: To view the updated information, a restart
may be required.
5.3.9 Startup configuration

Used for creating and saving the startup configuration for the system.
On this menu the startup configuration can be copied from or saved to a USB memory stick.
Note
 During a system software installation some parts of the startup configuration may be changed. Before a
system software installation, copy the startup configuration to a USB memory stick and reinstall the
configuration after the system software installation.
 When copying startup configuration from one system to another:
o Only copy startup configuration from a system with the same system version or lower to a system
with a higher system version.
o Only copy startup configuration from a system with the same installed software option or from a
system with less options to a system with more options.
Prerequisite tasks:
 Tap Startup configuration. To view the content in the Startup configuration tab, see section 10,
Diagrams, on page 369.
5.3.10 Settings
The Settings menu is used for setting date and time, for calculating total anesthetic agent consumption, and
for configuring the remote services network connection.
Prerequisites:
 Tap Settings. To view the content in the Settings tab, see section 10, Diagrams, on page 369.
5.3.10.1 Agent consumption
This screen shows the following:

 Total agent consumption since last Service &
Settings reset
 Date and time for last reset
The Reset button resets the agent consumption
data in the EEPROM on PC 1900 main backplane
board to remove persistent checksum errors.
The Save usage data to USB button saves
anesthetic agent consumption data to USB memory
stick.
5.4 Sampling line pressure drop test

5.4.1 General
The Automatic Gas Control (AGC) software option was introduced with System version 4.0.
AGC is not possible to run if the pressure drop in the sampling system, including sampling line, is too high
during System checkout. The upper pressure drop limit for AGC is:
 70 hPa for systems with System software version 4.04.00 and below.
 85 hPa for systems with System software version 4.04.01 and above.
A dialogue in System checkout will inform the user that AGC is disabled if the pressure drop is above 70/85
hPa (depending on System software version).
The Sampling line pressure drop test is used to verify that AGC is possible to run on the system.
5.4.2 Test description

The sampling line pressure drop test must be performed:
 After installation of the AGC option. If the pressure drop in the system is above the test limits, there is an
increased risk that the System checkout will fail later.
 During Preventive maintenance
 After any service or repair of the Patient gas analyzer and/or internal sampling.
The sampling line pressure drop test is described below, the test consists of two parts:
Part 1, steps 1–4 (refer to section 5.4.3, Sampling line pressure drop test procedure on page 247).
 Sampling line disconnected.
 Recommended upper pressure drop limit is approximately 45 hPa.
Checks the internal sampling components, from the water trap through the PGA to R3 in the Patient cassette
docking. This test can also be used to check repair or maintenance performed on these components, for
example replacement of the Nafion tubing.
Part 2, steps 5–7 (refer to section 5.4.3, Sampling line pressure drop test procedure on page 247).
 Sampling line connected.
 Recommended upper pressure drop limit is approximately 60 hPa for System software version 4.04.00
and below.
 Recommended upper pressure drop limit is approximately 75 hPa for System software version 4.04.01
and above.
This part of the test will check the complete sampling system with the sampling line connected between the
water trap and the Y-piece. The Getinge sampling line is designed (as specified in the User’s Manual) for the
System and should be recommended.
Sampling lines with characteristics outside these specifications are improper to use with the system. Such
sampling lines may cause a pressure drop above 70/85 hPa and disable AGC.
The 60/75 hPa limit in this test is chosen to ensure that the pressure drop in the system is, with margin, lower
than the System checkout limit.
5.4.3 Sampling line pressure drop test procedure

1. Remove the sampling line between water trap and Y-piece.

2. Perform the Gas analyzer test (Service & Settings > Tests > Gas analyzer). The test will fail as the
sampling line is removed. This fail can be ignored as the pressure drop value still will be logged.
3. Open the Test results log and tap Display MEA. Go to log post MEA Pressure drop check PGA Y-piece
Sampling Point pressure drop.
4. Check that the pressure drop is below approximately 45 hPa:
 If the pressure drop is below 45 hPa, continue with step 5.
 If the pressure drop is above 45 hPa, troubleshoot the system to remove the cause. For example if
kinked or occluded tubing or the water trap. Redo the test to make sure that the pressure drop is within
limit.
5. Connect the sampling line between water trap and Y-piece.
6. Perform the Gas analyzer test (Service & Settings > Tests > Gas analyzer).
7. In the Test results log (refer to step 3 above), check that the pressure drop is below 60/75 hPa.
 If the pressure drop is below 60/75 hPa, AGC can be used on the system.
 If the pressure drop is above 60/75 hPa, troubleshoot the system to remove the cause.
In this case, the pressure drop is related to the sampling line.
Figure 5-1: Test results log. The pressure drop in this example is 54.4 hPa.
5.5 System software and vaporizer software installation

5.5.1 General
Only personnel trained and authorized by Getinge shall be permitted to install system and
vaporizer software.
For functional enhancement the latest released system software version is recommended. This also applies
to the vaporizer. Make sure to include the vaporizer in every system software and vaporizer software
installation.
Vaporizer software installation is included in the system software installation. From System version 3.0,
Vaporizer software can be installed without performing the complete System software installation. Both
vaporizer slots can be used during the installation procedure. If more than two vaporizers are used, then the
installation procedure must be repeated.
A system software installation may change system functionality and a new version of the User’s Manual may
be required.
The system software package includes:
 Installer application
 System software
If the included installer application is of a different version than the version installed in the system, the
installer application is installed during the first phase of the installation. A restart of the installation is required
to run the new installer application.
CAUTION: The system must be connected to the mains power during the installation process.
Trying to install the software when connected to battery will either fail or cause malfunction to
the system.
CAUTION: Do not switch off the system during the installer application installation process. An
interrupted process may cause damage to the PC boards and the PC boards must be replaced.
Note that the installer application sometimes makes pauses in the installation process.
The system software is distributed to a number of PC boards, refer to section 4.17, PC boards, on page 182.
If any of these PC boards is replaced, then a system software installation must be performed to make sure
that the correct software version is installed on all PC boards in the system. A compatibility check of the PC
boards is performed at every system start-up.
5.5.2 System software installation procedure

Prerequisite tasks:
1. Tap Status to check the installed system software version. It is not recommended to install a system
software of a lower version number than the system software installed in the system.
2. Check the system software version stored on the USB memory stick. Remove old software versions on
the USB memory stick before copying new files to the USB memory stick.
3. Before any software installation, make sure that the system is fully compatible to the software.
Prerequisites and other important information for the different system versions can be found in section
9.1, System revision history on page 363.
Necessary tools:
 USB memory stick with the new system software version. Only Getinge approved USB memory sticks
must be used in the system8.
 Tool for pressing the Boot enable switch, e.g., a 1.5 mm hex key.
 Service key.

1. Insert a USB memory stick with the new system
software version.
2. Tap Service & Settings > Startup configuration
> Save all to USB memory.
3. Set the power button to Off.
4. Make sure that the vaporizer is inserted if the
vaporizer software is not installed separately.
8
From System version 3.0 the Vaporizer software can be installed without performing the complete System software installation, and
USB memory stick with System software is not required.
5. Open the Emergency ventilation cover to

access the Boot enable switch.
6. Insert the hex key and with the boot enable
switch pressed, push the power button.
7. Release the Boot enable switch.
8. The system will start up and the Installer screen

will open.
The installer screen contains a number of
installation progress bars. The screenshot is an
example of an installation in progress.
In this example:
 Installer installation skipped
 System software installation in progress
 No Vaporizer connected
Take note of the information area showing the
system Installer sequence and installation
Status.
Approximate installation times:
System software 20 minutes

(in some cases up to 30
minutes)
Gas analyzer 10 minutes
Vaporizer software 3 minutes
CAUTION: Do not switch off the system during the

Installer application installation process. An
interrupted process may cause damage to the PC
boards and the PC boards must be replaced.
Note: If the included Installer application is of a
different version than the already installed, it will be
installed during the first phase of the installation. A
restart of the installation is required to run the new
Installer application.
9. When the installation is successfully completed

(see screenshot), switch off the system using
the Power button.
In this example:
 Installer installation skipped
 System software installation (including gas
analyzer and vaporizer) successfully
completed.
Take note of the information area showing the
Software installer sequence and Installation
Status with text fields for information on
installation status, recommended actions and
warnings.
The Installer sequence color bar:
 Green = Installation successfully completed
 Red = Installation failed.
10. If another vaporizer must be updated, connect

this vaporizer and repeat the installation
procedure from work step 4 (or perform the
separate Vaporizer software installation).
The Vaporizer software installation time will be
approx. 3 minutes for each vaporizer.
11. Remove the USB memory stick with the

System software.
12. Start the system using the Power button.

A second restart may be required due to
changes in the configuration and/or Technical
alarms.
13. In the Status window, check that correct

System software version is installed.
14. Connect the USB memory stick with the Startup

configuration to the USB connector.
15. In Service & Settings, copy the configuration

from the USB memory stick. Refer to section
5.3.9, Startup configuration on page 245 for
important information.
16. Remove the USB memory stick when

completed.
17. Perform a System checkout and a Manual

check of Emergency ventilation system
according to instructions in the User’s Manual.
Figure 5-2: Installation of the subsystems on different PC boards is shown on this illustration.
5.5.3 Possible failures/problems during system software installation
Problem Recommended action
Installation procedure does not start automatically. Installer application on PC 1922 panel board may
The installer screen does not appear. be corrupt.
PC board must be replaced.
Installation procedure starts, but the Installer status Installer application on PC 2060/PC 1920 control
bar for Monitoring and/or Control is not green. board and/or PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board
may be corrupt.
PC boards must be replaced.
Installer update failed. System software file on the USB memory stick
corrupt, transfer to flash memory failed, checksum
error, etc.
Do not set the power button to off.
Remove the USB memory stick and insert again to
restart the installation.
System software installation failed. System software file on the USB memory stick
corrupt, transfer to flash memory failed, checksum
error, etc.
Set the power button to off and restart the system
software installation.
5.5.4 Vaporizer software installation procedure9

The system software installation also includes the vaporizer software installation 10. The vaporizer software
can also be installed separately. The vaporizer software installation does not require a USB memory stick.
The vaporizer software installation can be performed by a hospital technician.

1. Set the power button to off.
2. Insert the vaporizer in the vaporizer slot.
3. Open the Emergency ventilation cover to

access the Boot enable switch.
4. Insert the hex key and with the boot enable
switch pressed, push the power button.
5. Release the Boot enable switch.
9
Valid only for systems with System software version 3.0 or above.
10
From System version 3.0 the Vaporizer software is also copied to, and stored on, the Compact Flash memory on PC 1922 Panel
board.
6. The system will start up and the Installer screen

will open.
The installer screen contains a number of
installation progress bars. The screenshot is an
example of an installation in progress. Note that
this software installation procedure only covers
the vaporizers (Vap1 and Vap2).
7. The installation procedure will start
automatically after 20–30 seconds and the
installation progress will be shown on the
installation bars. The installation time will be
approx. 3 minutes for each connected
vaporizer.
Note: The system must not be switched off
during the Installation process.
In this example:
 Vaporizer software installation is in
progress on vaporizer in slot 1.
 Vaporizer in slot 2 is not connected.
8. When the installation is successfully completed

(see screenshot), switch off the system using
the Power button.
In this example:
 Vaporizer software installation on Vaporizer
in slot 1 is successfully completed.
 The Installer sequence color bar is green.
Take note of the Status text fields for further
information.
9. If further vaporizers must be updated, connect

these vaporizers and repeat the installation
procedure.
10. With the updated vaporizer(s) connected, start

the system using the Power button.
11. Check that the updated Vaporizer is now

compatible with the system. None of the alarm
messages TE 974 and TE 924 must appear.
12. Perform a System checkout and a Manual

check of Emergency ventilation system
according to instructions in the User’s Manual.
5.6 Software option installation

5.6.1 General
 Only personnel trained and authorized by Getinge is permitted to install Software options.
 A software option is created specifically for a system and can only be installed on the intended system.
When ordering a software option the serial number of the system must be stated.
 Before starting any Software option installation, open the Status windows in Service & Settings. Check
and note the installed Options.
 After installation of the AFGO option, an AFGO leakage check must be performed. Refer to section
AFGO leakage on page 230.
5.6.2 Software option installation procedure

Prerequisite tasks:
1. Copy the Startup configuration to a USB memory stick prior to a Software option installation and reinstall
the configuration afterwards. Some parts of the configuration may be changed during Software option
installation.
2. Make sure that the system is fully compatible to the software before starting any software installation.
Prerequisites and other important information for the different system versions can be found in section
9.1, System revision history on page 363.
Necessary equipment:
 USB memory stick with the software option. Only Getinge approved USB memory sticks must be used in
the system.
 Service key.
 A 14-18-20 rubber plug included in the Leakage detector tool kit, for test of the AFGO option.

1. Insert a USB memory stick.
2. Tap Service & Settings > Startup configuration
> Save all to USB memory.
3. Set the power button to off.
4. Insert the USB memory stick with the software
option.
5. Set the power button to on.

6. When the start screen appears, check that USB
device connected appears on the screen for a
few seconds.
Note: If the System checkout dialog appears do
not push any button.
7. Make sure that Configuration successful is

displayed.
8. Remove the USB memory stick.
9. Restart the system.
10. Configuration changed is displayed.
12. Connect the USB memory stick with the Startup

configuration to the USB connector.
13. Copy the Startup configuration from the USB

memory stick.
14. Remove the USB memory stick.
16. Tap Service & Settings > Status. The new

installed option should be listed in the list of
installed options.
17. After installing the AFGO option, perform an

AFGO leakage check.
Refer to section, AFGO leakage on page 230
for more information.
5.7 Leakage detection

5.7.1 General
The leakage test in the System checkout (SCO), or in the separate Leakage check, is performed using a
pressure of 50 cmH2O for AUTO ventilation and 30 cmH2O for MAN ventilation.
The measured leakage for AUTO and MAN ventilation will be displayed separately in ml/min.
A maximum leakage of up to 150 ml/min is allowed for each of the modes AUTO and MAN.
When a leakage is detected, the leakage check will stop and display AUTO ventilation leakage or MAN
ventilation leakage on the screen.
Note: Test cases related to a leakage in the CGA (Control Gas Analyzer) sampling is not valid for systems
delivered without CGA. From System version 3.0, the Control gas analyzer (CGA) sampling system is
disabled. Older systems may be equipped with CGA sampling parts including three filters in the Insp. sample
filter holder field. On these systems, it is recommended to install the CGA removal kit to reduce leakage risks
in the CGA sampling, see section 4.18.6, Control Gas Analyzer (CGA) – removal, page 190.
5.7.2 Required equipment

 Standard service tools
 Leakage detector tool, P/N 6881146
 Cuff filling and measuring device with valve and pressure gauge, local purchase.
Note that in the leakage detection illustrations below in this section, a calibration manometer and a blood
pressure bulb with valve are used. However, the procedure when using a cuff filling/measuring device with
pressure gauge is the same.
5.7.3 Test sequence flowchart
5.7.4 Test case 1: Patient tubing

1. Replace the patient tubing kit, including manual breathing bag, gas sampling line, and water trap.
2. Redo the leakage test in System checkout.
5.7.5 Test case 2: CO2 absorber

unlocked position.
2. Pull out the CO2 absorber.
The CO2 absorber inlet and outlet in the patient
cassette are now closed by the two spring-loaded
valves in the patient cassette.

locked position.
4. Push down and hold the spring-loaded locking

actuator (ref. no.1) to activate the CO2 absorber
sensor and at the same time do the leakage
test in System checkout.
5. Release the locking actuator after two clicking
sounds.
If the test passes successfully, the leakage was
located in the CO2 absorber or in the CO2 absorber
connections.
Possible causes for leakage in the CO2 absorber:
 Cracks or damages in the plastic absorber
canister.
 Damaged seals in the absorber valves in the
patient cassette.
Note: The compressible volume in the system is
calculated during the AUTO ventilation leakage
test. When the absorber is removed, the calculated
value will be incorrect.
If the message Compressible volume out of range.
Check the breathing system appears during this
test, select Bypass test.
A complete System checkout, with absorber
connected, must be performed after any service
intervention in the system.
5.7.6 Test case 3: Patient cassette

1. Replace the patient cassette.
2. Redo the Leakage test in SCO.
If the test passes, the leakage was located to the
patient cassette.
Possible leakage sources in the patient cassette
(see section 3.12, Patient cassette (8) on page 72
for location):
 Inspiratory and expiratory valve covers
including seals
 Silicone gasket towards Safety valve
 Silicone gasket towards Reflector socket
 Expiratory sampling return R3
 Expiratory pressure Pe
 Inspiratory sampling S1
 Inspiratory pressure Pi
 Inspiratory sampling return R1
 APL/PEEP valve membrane
 Manual Ventilation Valve membrane
Note: The membranes may not close properly due
to cleaning residues on the membranes sealing
surface and/or on the corresponding sealing
surface in the cassette.
5.7.7 Test case 4: Vaporizers

1. Remove the vaporizers, one by one if two are
connected.
2. Redo the leakage check in System checkout.
A successfully passed test indicates that the
leakage was located in the vaporizer docking, or in
the vaporizer.
Move the vaporizer to the other slot and redo the
Leakage check.
 If the test passes, replace the double channel
plate.
 If the test fails, replace the vaporizer.
Vaporizer repair must be carried out by Getinge
only.
5.7.8 Test case 5: Fresh gas line

The test covers the fresh gas line from, and including, the fresh gas module nozzle units to the fresh gas
outlet in the safety valve.

1. Pull out the patient cassette.
2. Connect the leakage detector and manometer

to the fresh gas outlet on the safety valve.
3. Pressurize to 80–100 cmH2O
A pressure drop indicates a leakage in the fresh
gas line.
If the test result indicates a pressure leakage
go to section 5.7.15, Test case 12: Fresh gas
line tests on page 268.
If no pressure drop occurred, continue with next
case.
5.7.9 Test case 6: Reflector gas line

The test includes the reflector gas line from (and including) the Reflector gas module nozzle unit to the
reflector gas outlet on the safety valve.

to the reflector gas outlet on the safety valve.
2. Pressurize to 80–100 cmH2O.
3. Take note of the pressure on the manometer.
A pressure drop indicates a leakage in the
reflector gas line.
o If a pressure drop occurred, go to section
5.7.16, Test case 13: Reflector gas line
tests, page 282.
o If no pressure drop occurred, continue with
next case.
5.7.10 Test case 7: Reflector

The test covers the reflector and the reflector adaptor.

to the reflector gas inlet.
2. Plug the reflector gas outlet.
4. Take note of the pressure on the manometer.
A pressure drop indicates a leakage in the
reflector or reflector adaptor.
o If a pressure drop occurred go to section
5.7.17, Test case 14: Reflector and
reflector adaptor, page 286.
o If no pressure drop occurred, continue with
next case.
5.7.11 Test case 8: APL/PEEP valve coil, Manual ventilation valve actuator and Fresh gas safety
valve

1. Turn the absorber locking switch to the locked
position.
2. Push down the spring-loaded locking actuator

(ref.no.1) to activate the absorber sensor.
3. While holding the piston pushed down, redo the

leakage test in System checkout. During this
test, make sure that the following pistons move
up:
o The valve piston for the APL/PEEP valve
(ref. no. 1).
o The valve piston for the manual ventilation
valve actuator (ref. no. 2).
During the leakage check, the safety valve
must be in closed position and should not
move.
4. After two clicking sounds, release the piston
(that is when the two pistons pop up).
Possible causes for malfunction:

 APL/PEEP valve coil:
o Poor connection/cable to P17 on PC 1900
main backplane board.
o Malfunction in APL/PEEP valve coil.
o PC 1984/PC 1919 expiratory channel board
 Manual ventilation valve actuator:
o Refer to troubleshooting in 5.7.13, Test
case 10: Manual ventilation valve actuator
on page 267.
 Fresh gas safety valve:
o Poor connection/cable to P11 on PC 1900
main backplane board.
o Malfunction in the fresh gas safety valve.
Note: Do not mix up the cable connectors to P11

and P17 on PC 1900 main backplane board:
 P11 = Fresh gas safety valve connector
 P17 = APL/PEEP valve coil connector
5.7.12 Test case 9: Patient cassette lid and sample filters

2. On the patient cassette, plug the holes for the
following:
 R3 (ref. no. 1)
 S1 (ref. no. 3)
 R1 (ref. no. 4)
3. Connect a tube (ref. no. 5) between the
Inspiratory pressure filter and the
corresponding hole (Pi; ref. no. 6) on the patient
cassette.
4. Connect a tube (ref. no. 7) between the
Expiratory pressure filter and the corresponding
hole (Pe; ref. no. 2) on the patient cassette.
5. Disconnect the sampling line adapter (ref.

no. 8) from the Y-piece to disconnect the PGA
sampling.
6. Connect the Y-piece to System checkout plug
(ref. no. 9).
A successfully passed test may indicate that the
leakage was located to the tubes or filters
connected to the patient cassette lid or to the gas
analyzer with sampling.
Possible leakage areas:
 Sampling line, including adapter
 Watertrap
 Water trap receptacle
 Nafion and purge line tubes
 AION
 Gas sampling return tube
 Sampling filter docking O-ring
 Gas sampling filter (return)
5.7.13 Test case 10: Manual ventilation valve actuator

1. Disconnect the manual breathing bag tube (ref.
no. 1) from the patient cassette.
2. Plug the manual ventilation tubing connector
(ref. no. 2) on the patient cassette.
A successfully passed test indicates that the
leakage was located in the manual ventilation valve
actuator. Note that the MAN ventilation leakage test
will fail in this test.
Possible causes for malfunction:

 Adjustment of the Manual ventilation valve
actuator, see section 5.10, Adjusting Manual
ventilation valve actuator PP3, page 294.
 Occlusion in the tube between the gas control
section and the manual ventilation valve
actuator (PP3).
 Malfunction in the manual ventilation valve
actuator.
 Malfunction in regulator REG3 (S/N < 20 000:
REG2 and REG3).
 Malfunction in EMV2 manual ventilation pilot
valve.
Malfunction on PC 2057/PC 1907 valve drivers
board. The green LED D24 on PC 2057 (or LED
D45 on PC 1907) valve drivers board is lit when the
control signal to EMV2 is enabled.
5.7.14 Test case 11: System checkout valve

1. Plug the Y-piece with suitable plug (ref. no. 1).
2. Redo the Leakage test in System checkout.
A successfully passed test may indicate that the
leakage was located in the System checkout valve.
Possible leakage sources:
 Loose inlet connector (test plug) or O-ring
behind the connector.
 Leakage inside the valve. Replace the valve.
5.7.15 Test case 12: Fresh gas line tests

Version B. See sections 5.7.15.1, page 268 to 5.7.15.3, page

273.
Version A. See sections 5.7.15.4, page 274 to 5.7.15.6, page

279.
General
When performing the fresh gas line tests, it is recommended to cross-check the system overview, which can
be found in section 10, Diagrams on page 369.
5.7.15.1 Version B
Preparations
These tests should be performed if a leakage is detected in section 5.7.8, Test case 5: Fresh gas line on
page 262.
Figure 5-3: Valve tests screen.
Use the Valve tests function in Service & Settings to facilitate troubleshooting.
1. Connect the gas supplies.
2. Open Service & Settings > Service functions > Valve tests.
3. Close the Vaporizer bypass valve. This will divide the fresh gas line in two sections:
 Section A: Section A includes the following parts:
o Subtask 1: Isolating faults to the safety valve housing in a removed state.
o Subtask 2: Isolating faults to the O2 flush button.
o Subtask 3: Isolating faults to the PV7 AFGO valve or the OV13 valve.
o Subtask 4: Isolating faults to the PV7 AFGO valve.
o Subtask 5: Isolating faults to the fresh gas pressure transducer.
 Section B: Section B includes the following parts:
o Subtask 6: Isolating faults to the fresh gas modules or docking seals.
Test order
Select the applicable tests and in which order to perform the tests, for example if the leakage is detected in
Section A or Section B.
Test procedure
1. Undock the vaporizers. The vaporizers should not be connected during the fresh gas line leakage tests
(as it was tested in section 5.7.7, Test case 4: Vaporizer on page 261).
2. With the Vaporizer bypass valve closed, pressurize the fresh gas line as described in Test case 5: Fresh
gas line:
 If the leakage remains when the Vaporizer bypass valve is closed, the Fresh gas line leakage is located
in Section A. Check for leakage in main parts included in section 5.7.15.2, Section A, starting on page
270.
 If no leakage is detected when the Vaporizer bypass valve is closed, the Fresh gas line leakage is
located in Section B. Check for leakage in main parts included in section 5.7.15.3, Section B, starting on
page 273273.
5.7.15.2 Section A
Subtask 1: Isolating faults to the safety valve housing in a removed state
Necessary tools:
4 mm hex key
Distilled water
1. Loosen the screw 8 mm (ref. no. 1).
2. Remove the safety valve housing.
3. Remove the valve membrane (ref. no. 3) from
the housing.
4. Make sure that the valve membrane (ref. no. 3)
and valve seat (ref. no. 2) are clean.
5. Mount the valve membrane. Use distilled water
as lubricant and make sure that the membrane
seal mates with the groove.
6. Plug the fresh gas inlet on the safety valve.
7. Connect the leakage detector to the fresh gas
outlet on the safety valve.
8. Push the membrane to close it.
If there is a leakage, the leakage is isolated to
the safety valve housing.
Subtask 2: Isolating faults to the O2 flush button

Note: The fresh gas supply shall be connected.
1. Connect a leakage detector to the fresh gas
If the pressure increases, the leakage is
isolated to the O2 flush button.
Subtask 3: Isolating faults to the PV7 AFGO valve or the OV13 valve

If there is a leakage, the leakage is isolated to one
or more of the following items:
 The PV7 AFGO valve
 The OV13 valve.
Subtask 4: Isolating faults to the PV7 AFGO valve

1. Plug the AFGO outlet.

If there is no leakage, the leakage is limited to
the PV7 AFGO valve.
Subtask 5: Isolating faults to the fresh gas pressure transducer

1. Under Valve tests, open the Vaporizer
bypass valve.
2. Remove the tube to the fresh gas pressure
transducer (ref. no. 1) at the pressure
transducer end.
3. Plug the end of the tube (ref. no. 2).
4. Connect the leakage detector to the fresh

gas outlet.
 If there is no leakage, the leakage is
isolated to the fresh gas pressure
transducer.
 If there is a leakage, the leakage is
isolated to Section B.
5.7.15.3 Section B
Subtask 6: Isolating faults to the fresh gas modules or docking seals

1. Disconnect the plastic collector (ref. no. 1) at
the gas block.
2. Connect the leakage detector to the plastic
collector (ref. no. 2).
the fresh gas modules or docking seals.
To identify which fresh gas module or docking
seal is leaking, remove the modules one by one,
plug each gas module connection, and redo the
test.
5.7.15.4 Version A
These tests should be performed if a leakage is detected in section 5.7.8, Test case 5: Fresh gas line on
page 262.
Figure 5-4: Valve tests screen.
Use the Valve tests function in Service & Settings to facilitate troubleshooting.
1. Connect the gas supplies.
2. Open Service & Settings > Service functions > Valve tests.
3. Close the Vaporizer bypass valve. This will divide the fresh gas line in two sections:
 Section A: Section A includes the following parts, from the fresh gas outlet in the safety valve to the
double channel plate outlets.:
o Subtask 1: Isolating faults to the fresh gas safety valve housing in a removed state.
o Subtask 2: Isolating faults to the O2 flush button.
o Subtask 3: Isolating faults to the PV7 AFGO valve or the OV13 valve.
o Subtask 4: Isolating faults to the PV7 AFGO valve.
o Subtask 5: Isolating faults to the fresh gas filter outlet connector.
o Subtask 6: Isolating faults to the fresh gas filter.
o Subtask 7: Isolating faults to the vaporizer valve section outlet.
 Section B: Section B includes the following parts, from the double channel plate inlets to the fresh gas
modules nozzle units:
o Subtask 8: Isolating faults to the vaporizer valve section inlet.
o Subtask 9: Isolating faults to the fresh gas supply.
o Subtask 10: Isolating faults to the fresh gas pressure transducer.
o Subtask 11: Isolating faults to the fresh gas modules or docking seals.
Test order
Select the applicable tests and in which order to perform the tests, for example if the leakage is detected in
Section A or Section B.

1. Undock the vaporizers. The vaporizers should not be connected during the fresh gas line leakage tests
(as it was tested in section 5.7.7, Test case 4: Vaporizers, on page 261).
2. With the Vaporizer bypass valve closed, pressurize the fresh gas line as described in Test case 5: Fresh
gas line:
o If the leakage remains when the Vaporizer bypass valve is closed, the Fresh gas line leakage is
located in Section A. Check for leakage in main parts included in section 5.7.15.25.7.15.5, Section
A, starting on page 275.
o If no leakage is detected when the Vaporizer bypass valve is closed, the Fresh gas line leakage is
located in Section B. Check for leakage in main parts included in section 5.7.15.6, Section B,
starting on page 279.
5.7.15.5 Section A
Subtask 1: Isolating faults to the safety valve in a removed state

1. Loosen the screw (ref. no. 1) 8 mm.
3. Carefully remove the valve membrane (ref. no.
3) from the housing.
4. Make sure that the valve membrane (ref. no. 3)
and valve seat (ref. no. 2) are clean.
5. Mount the valve membrane. Use distilled water
as lubricant and make sure that the membrane
seal mates with the groove.
6. Check the silicone docking seal for the safety
valve housing.
7. Plug the fresh gas inlet on the safety valve.
outlet.
9. Press the membrane to keep it closed.
10. Pressurize to 80 –100 cmH2O.
If there is a leakage, the leakage is isolated to the
safety valve housing. Fix the leakage.
11. Mount the safety valve housing to the system.
12. Pressurize the fresh gas line according to Test
Case 5, see section 5.7.8, page 262.
If the leakage remains, covers must be removed to
continue the leakage check:
13. Switch off the system.
14. Open the rear cover to access the internal parts
of the fresh gas line, see section 4.13.3, Rear
cover – removal, page 169.
Subtask 2: Isolating faults to the O2 flush button

Note: The fresh gas supply shall be connected.
1. Connect a leakage detector to the fresh gas
If the pressure increases, the leakage is isolated
to the O2 flush button.
Subtask 3: Isolating faults to the PV7 AFGO valve or the OV13 valve

If there is a leakage, the leakage is isolated to one
or more of the following items:
 The PV7 AFGO valve
 The OV13 valve.
Subtask 4: Isolating faults to the PV7 AFGO valve

1. Disconnect the fresh gas filter outlet pipe (ref.
no. 1) from the AFGO valve inlet.
2. Plug the AFGO valve inlet (ref. no. 2).

4. Pressurize to approx. 80–100 cmH2O.
 O2 flush connection and tubing.
 CGA (R2) connection and tubing.
Installation of the CGA removal kit is
recommended if CGA still is connected.
 Oxygen flow one-way valve OV 13 (S/N 4000
and below).
 Internal AFGO valve leakage.
 Fresh gas connection between safety valve and
AFGO valve.
Subtask 5: Isolating faults to the fresh gas filter outlet connector

1. Switch on the system.
2. Log in to the Service & Settings menu.
Go to the Service functions > Valve tests menu:
Close the Vaporizer bypass valve.
filter outlet pipe (ref. no. 1).
 Fresh gas filter outlet connector (elbow)
 For systems with CGA only: CGA sampling.
Installation of the CGA removal kit is
recommended if CGA still is connected.
 Fresh gas filter.
 Vaporizer valve section – Outlet.
Subtask 6: Isolating faults to the fresh gas filter

3. Connect the leakage detector to the Fresh gas
filter (ref. no. 1).
 Fresh gas filter
 Vaporizer valve section – Outlet
Subtask 7: Isolating faults to the vaporizer valve section outlet

3. Remove the Fresh gas filter (ref. no. 1).
4. Connect the leakage detector to the vaporizer
valve section outlet.
 Double channel plate not correctly mounted
(the bypass valve not engaged).
 Double channel plate. Check the silicone
bypass channel at PV5.
 Vaporizer outlet valves. Contact MCC HSC or
your local Getinge representative for further
information.
5.7.15.6 Section B
Subtask 8: Isolating faults to the vaporizer valve section inlet

3. Disconnect the fresh gas inlet pipe (ref. no. 1)
from its left joint.
inlet pipe (ref. no. 1).
 Vaporizer valve section inlet (elbow).
 Double channel plate not correctly mounted
(the bypass valve not engaged).
 Double channel plate. Check the silicone
bypass channel at PV5.
 Vaporizer inlet valves. Contact MCC HSC or
your local Getinge representative for further
information.
Subtask 9: Isolating faults to the fresh gas supply

1. Disconnect the Vaporizer valve section inlet
pipe (ref. no. 1) from the elbow (ref. no. 2).
2. Connect the leakage detector to the pipe.
 Fresh gas pressure transducer including
connectors and tubing.
 Fresh gas modules and docking seals.
Subtask 10: Isolating faults to the fresh gas pressure transducer

1. Disconnect the Vaporizer valve section inlet
pipe (ref. no. 1) from the elbow (ref. no. 2).
2. Connect the leakage detector to the pipe.
3. Disconnect the pressure transducer tube
(disconnected in figure) and plug the hole (ref.
no. 3).
Possible leakage source:
 Fresh gas pressure transducer including
connectors and tubing if no leakage is detected
in this test.
Subtask 11: Isolating faults to the fresh gas modules or docking seals

2. Disconnect gas supply.
3. Remove a Fresh gas module, one by one.
4. Plug at the docking seal (ref. no. 1).
inlet pipe (ref. no. 2).
 Fresh gas module docking seal.
 Fresh gas modules.
5.7.16 Test case 13: Reflector gas line tests

Version B. See section 5.7.16.1, Version B, page 282.
Version A. See section 5.7.16.2, Version A, page 285.
5.7.16.1 Version B
Isolating faults to the safety valve housing in a removed state
This test case follows on section 5.7.9, Test case 6:

Reflector gas line on page 263, which indicates that
a there was a leakage in the reflector gas line.
Necessary tools:
4 mm hex key
Distilled water
3. Plug the reflector gas inlet on the safety valve.
4. Connect the leakage detector to the reflector
gas outlet on the safety valve.
the safety valve housing.
Isolating faults to the reflector gas pressure transducer

1. Disconnect the tube to the reflector gas
pressure transducer (ref. no. 1) at the
pressure transducer end.
2. Plug the end of the tube (ref. no. 2).
3. Connect the leakage detector to the

reflector gas outlet.
If there is no leakage, the leakage is
isolated to the reflector pressure
transducer or the pressure transducer
tube.
Isolating faults to the reflector gas module docking

2. Disconnect the gas supply.
3. Remove the reflector gas module.
4. Plug at the docking seal.

If there is no leakage, the leakage is isolated to the
docking seal for the refle ctor gas module.
5.7.16.2 Version A
Isolating faults to the safety valve housing in a removed state
This test case follows on section 5.7.9, Test case 6:

Reflector gas line on page 263, which indicates that
a there was a leakage in the reflector gas line.
Necessary tools:
4 mm hex key
Distilled water
3. Plug the reflector gas inlet on the safety valve.
If there is a leakage, the leakage is isolated to the
safety valve housing.
Isolating faults to the reflector gas pressure transducer

1. Disconnect the tube to the reflector gas
pressure transducer (ref. no. 1) at the pressure
transducer end.
2. Block the tube with a finger.
gas outlet (ref. no. 2).
reflector pressure transducer or the pressure
transducer tube.
Isolating faults to the reflector gas module docking

2. Disconnect the gas supply.
3. Remove the reflector gas module (ref. no. 1).
4. Plug at the docking seal (ref. no. 2).
gas outlet (ref. no. 3) on the safety valve.
docking seal for the reflector gas module.
5.7.17 Test case 14: Reflector and reflector adaptor
This test case follows on section 5.7.10, Test case

7: Reflector on page 263, which indicated that a
there was a leakage in the reflector or in the
reflector adaptor.
1. Pull out the reflector adaptor (ref. no. 1).
2. Pull out the reflector (ref. no. 2).
inlet (ref. no. 3) and plug the outlet.
4. Pressurize to approx. 80–100 cmH2O.
A pressure drop indicates a leakage in the reflector.
If the pressure does not drop, this indicates a
leakage in the reflector adaptor.
Possible leakage sources in reflector and reflector
adaptor:
 Silicone gasket on the reflector adaptor.
 Cracks or damages in the plastic.
5.7.18 Test case 15: Manual breathing bag and tubes

1. Replace the manual breathing bag tube and/or
the manual breathing bag.
2. Redo the Leakage test in system checkout.
If the MAN ventilation leakage test passes, the
leakage was located to the manual breathing bag
tube and/or the manual breathing bag.
5.8 Pressure regulators

Version B. Uses two regulators, REG1 and REG3, see

section 5.8.2, Version B, page 288.
Version A. Uses four regulators, REG1 – REG4, see section

5.8.3, Version A, page 289.
5.8.1 General
The pressure regulators are located on the back of the gas inlets and outlets and are accessed by opening
the right front cover. There are two (S/N < 20 000: three) test points where a pressure gauge can be
connected to check and adjust the regulators.
The pressure regulators must be checked or adjusted:
 During preventive maintenance
 During troubleshooting
5.8.2 Version B
5.8.2.1 Required equipment

 Standard service tools.
 Connector kit for pressure gauge.
 Pressure gauge, local purchase. The gauge must be suitable for the REG1 (120 kPa) and REG3
(240 kPa) pressure values and must have an accuracy of ±2% (or better) at these pressures.
 A digital handheld pressure gauge is used in the illustrations below.
5.8.2.2 Procedure
Prerequisite tasks:
Necessary tools:
4 mm hex key
1. Connect the Connector for pressure gauge
(ref. no. 1) and the pressure gauge (ref. no. 2)
to the relevant test point.
2. Check the regulator output pressure on the

pressure gauge. Adjust if required.
Test sequence and pressure values:
1. Connect O2 supply.
2. Connect the pressure gauge to test point
T1 (ref. no. 1) and check that the output
pressure from REG1 (ref. no. 4) is 120 kPa
±5 kPa.
T2 (ref. no.3) and check that the output
±10 kPa.
3. If adjustment of the pressure regulator is

required:
1. Loosen the lock nut (ref. no. 1) on the
adjustment screw.
2. Set the regulator to correct output pressure
with the adjustment screw (ref. no. 2) using
a 4 mm hex key.
Note: Handle the plastic screw carefully.
Careless handling of the screw or the lock
nut can damage the screw.
3. Secure the adjustment screw with the lock
nut.
Note: Tightening the lock nut may affect
the output pressure. Re-check the regulator
output pressure and adjust if required.
5.8.3 Version A
5.8.3.1 Required equipment

 Connector kit for pressure gauge.
 Pressure gauge, local purchase. The gauge must be suitable for the REG1 (120 kPa) and REG2 –
REG4 (200 kPa) pressure values and must have an accuracy of ±2% (or better) at these pressures.
 A digital handheld pressure gauge is used in the illustrations below.
5.8.3.2 Procedure
Prerequisite tasks:
167.
 Connect mains power and start the system.
 Disconnect gas supply (AIR and O2).
 Start case and let the system ventilate a few
breaths to depressurize the system.
 Switch the system to Standby mode.
Necessary tools:
 3 mm hex key
1. Connect the Connector for pressure gauge
(ref. no. 1) and the pressure gauge (ref. no. 2)
to the relevant test point (see below).
2. Check the regulator output pressure on the

pressure gauge. Adjust if required.
Test sequence and pressure values:
1. Connect O2 supply. AIR supply must be
disconnected.
T4 (ref. no. 7) and check that the output
±10 kPa.
T1 (5) and check that the output pressure
from REG1 (ref. no. 1) is 120 kPa ±5 kPa.
T2/T3 (6) and check that the output
pressure from REG3 (3) is 200 kPa ±10
kPa.
5. Disconnect O2 supply and press the O2
flush button to depressurize the system.
6. Connect AIR supply.
7. Check that the output pressure from REG2
(ref. no. 2) is 200 kPa ±10 kPa.
Pressure regulators and test points, Version A1 and
Version A2:
1. REG1
2. REG2
3. REG3
4. REG4
5. Test point T1
6. Test point T2/T3
7. Test point T4
If adjustment of the pressure regulator is required:
1. Carefully loosen the lock nut on the adjustment
screw.
2. Set the regulator to correct output pressure with
the adjustment screw using a 3 mm hexagonal
wrench.
Note: The plastic screw must be handled
carefully. Careless handling of the screw or lock
nut can damage the screw.
3. Carefully secure the adjustment screw with the
lock nut.
4. Tightening the lock nut may affect the output
pressure. Re-check the regulator output
pressure and adjust if required.
5.9 Mechanical APL calibration (emergency ventilation)

Version B. For calibration procedure, see section 5.9.4,

Calibration procedure, Version B, page 292.
Version A. For calibration procedure, see section 5.9.5,

Calibration procedure, Version A, page 293.
5.9.1 General
The Mechanical APL must be calibrated:
 If a check of the Mechanical APL shows that calibration is required.
After replacement of parts included in the Emergency APL device.
5.9.2 Required equipment

 Standard service tools
 Patient tubing and Y-piece
 Plug for the manual ventilation bag connector on the patient cassette.
 Pressure gauge, local purchase. The gauge must be suitable for the calibration pressure values
6/34/80 hPa (1 hPa ≈ 1 cmH2O) and must have an accuracy of ±5% (or better) at these pressures. A
calibration manometer is used in the illustrations below.
5.9.3 Check procedure

1. Connect O2 to the system.
2. Connect patient tubing and Y-piece.
3. Connect the pressure gauge to the Y-piece.
4. Plug the manual ventilation bag connector on the patient cassette.
5. Switch on Emergency ventilation.
6. Set the O2 flowmeter to 10 l/min.
7. Turn the APL knob counter-clockwise to stop.
8. Check that the pressure gauge shows 6 hPa ±4 hPa.
9. Turn the APL knob clockwise to the first tactile resistance can be felt (and a slight 'click').
11. Turn the APL knob clockwise to stop.
5.9.4 Calibration procedure, Version B
Prerequisite tasks:
167.
Necessary tools:
 Screwdriver
2. Connect patient tubing and Y-piece (ref.
no. 1).
3. Connect the pressure gauge to the Y-piece
(ref. no. 2).
4. Plug the pressure gauge inlet (ref.no.3).
5. Plug the manual ventilation bag connector (ref.
no. 4).on the patient cassette.
6. Switch on Emergency ventilation (ref. no. 4).

7. Set the O2 flowmeter to 10 l/min (ref. no. 5).
8. Turn the APL knob counter-clockwise to stop
(ref. no. 6).
9. In this position, release the center screw (ref.
no. 7) securing the wire wheel, from the inside.
10. Adjust to 6 hPa by turning the wire wheel (ref.
no. 8). The pressure is shown on the pressure
gauge.
11. Carefully secure the center screw whilst
holding the wire wheel firmly.
12. Check that the calibration was approved.
Refer to section 5.9.3, Check procedure on
page 291.
5.9.5 Calibration procedure, Version A

Prerequisite tasks:
2. Connect patient tubing and Y-piece (ref. no. 1).
3. Connect the pressure gauge to the Y-piece (ref.
no. 2).
4. Plug the manual ventilation bag connector (ref.
no. 4) on the patient cassette.
5. Pull off the Mechanical APL knob (ref. no. 1).
6. Turn the wheel (ref. no. 1) counter-clockwise to

stop.
7. In this position, lock the wheel by pushing a
metal pin (ref. no. 2) through the hole in the
wheel and into the corresponding hole in the
panel. A 2.5 mm hexagonal wrench can be
used.
8. Carefully loosen the lock nut (ref. no. 3) on the
adjustment screw (13 mm spanner).
9. Adjust the regulator to 6 hPa with the
adjustment screw (ref. no. 4). The pressure is
shown on the pressure gauge.
10. Carefully secure the adjustment screw with the
lock nut.
11. Remove the metal pin.
12. Mount the APL knob. The knob can only be
mounted in one position.
13. Check that the calibration was approved. Refer
to section 5.9.3, Check procedure on page 291.
5.10 Adjusting Manual ventilation valve actuator PP3

The position of the Manual ventilation valve actuator PP3 can be adjusted. This adjustment must be
performed when replacing the actuator. The adjustment is also a recommended action in case of leakage in
the Manual ventilation valve.
5.10.1 Procedure
Prerequisite tasks:
Necessary tools:
1. Loosen the screw (ref. no. 1) slightly to release
the gas connection.
2. Loosen the lock nut (ref. no. 2).
3. Turn the actuator (ref. no. 3), clockwise or
counterclockwise, to the correct position A
indicated in the illustration, where A= 6.6 ± 0.5
mm.
The valve piston is magnetic. A hex key can be
attached horizontally to be used as a reference.
4. Secure this position with the lock nut (ref.
no. 2).
Tighten the screw (ref. no. 1), tightening torque

approx. 1 Nm.
5.11 Adjustment of friction joints

5.11.1 Control panel and Patient monitor
5.11.1.1 Swivel adjustment
WARNING! The swivel adjustment knob must be tightened, holding the arm firmly in its
position.

1. Tighten or loosen the knob (ref. no. 1) for swivel
adjustment.
2. Make sure that the spring washers (ref. no. 2)
are correctly mounted as shown in illustration.
Note: On some Patient monitor mountings, the
knob is replaced by a nut. The adjustment
procedure is however the same.
5.11.1.2 Tilt adjustment
WARNING! The tilt adjustment screw must be tightened, holding the monitor/control panel
firmly in its position.

1. Remove the plastic cover (ref. no. 1) to make
the tilt screw accessible.
2. Tighten or loosen the screw (ref. no. 2) for tilt
adjustment. Use a 5 mm hexagonal wrench.
3. Mount the plastic cover (ref. no. 1).
5.11.2 Additional table and Adjustable arm for parameter modules
5.11.2.1 Swivel adjustment
WARNING! The swivel adjustment knob must be tightened, holding the arm firmly in its
position.
Necessary tools:
 8 mm hex key
 5 mm hex key
Tighten or loosen the screws (ref. no. 1 or 2) for
swivel adjustment.
5.12 Model C40 – Transportation and prerequisites

5.12.1 General
Only personnel trained and authorized by Getinge is permitted to install, service or repair the Flow-i
Anesthesia System, base unit as well as optional equipment.
Installation of the C40 unit is described in the document Flow-i Anesthesia System, Models C20, C30 and
C40 – Installation Instruction.
Manual check of the Emergency ventilation system according to instructions in the User's Manual.
WARNING! This device, when removed from its wall or ceiling mount, does not meet the
stability requirements of ISO 80601-2-13 and IEC 60601-1 respectively. Special caution has to
be taken.
CAUTION: Disconnect all electrical cables and gas connections before undocking the system
from the ceiling pendant.
5.12.2 Interhospital transportation of the C40 unit

When delivered, the C40 unit is equipped with lifting straps. If a lifting device is available, the C40 unit can be
lifted out of the shipping container and placed on a trolley. The lifting device must have a capacity of at least
200 kg.
 If a lifting device and trolley is not available, the C40 unit must be transported on the pallet included with
the shipping container.
 The built-in wheels in the C40 base are intended only for short transports within the operating room.
 For interhospital transportation of the C40 unit, the C40 Service trolley is recommended.
CAUTION: Make sure that the swivel arm, extra equipment and accessories, e.g. support arm
and additional table, are positioned as shown in the User’s Manual, chapter Storage and
transportation.
5.12.3 Transportation with the Service trolley

The service trolley is a Flow-i C40 service tool,
intended for:
 Unloading the unit from the shipping container.
 Transporting the unit to and from the installation
site.
 Service purposes.
5.12.4 Transportation without Service trolley

If a different type of trolley (or a pallet and pallet
jack) the following requirements must be taken into
account:
 The trolley must be able to carry a load of 250
kg,
 The trolley must have a wheelbase and track
width equal to or greater than the C20/30
carrier
 The trolley must have at least 2 lockable
wheels.
 The C40 wheels must be relieved when placed
on the trolley.
 The C40 must be secured with straps to
prevent it from tipping while transported on the
trolley or pallet.
Front view
Rear view
5.12.5 Before mounting the C40 unit on the ceiling pendant

Make sure that the following requirements are fulfilled before installing the C40 unit on the ceiling pendant:
 Verify that the ceiling pendant arm complies with IEC 60601-1.
 Verify that the ceiling pendant arm complies with ISO 11197.
 Verify that the ceiling pendant arm have a net load capacity of at least 200 kg.
 The net weight of the C40 unit, including ceiling pendant interface but without accessories, is approx.
150 kg:
o Verify that the combined weight of the C40 unit, with additional accessories, do not exceed the net
load capacity of the ceiling pendant.
o Verify that the combined weight of C40 with additional accessories do not exceed 250 kg, which is
the net load capacity of the ceiling pendant interface.
 Verify that the vertical movement of the ceiling pendant arm fulfills the following criteria:
o Movement is in the operator’s field of view.
o Movement is only possible by continuous activation of the control.
o An emergency stopping device is provided.
5.13 Installation of optional equipment

Optional equipment is delivered with an Installation Instruction (if instructions are required). These
documents describe installation of the equipment. For clinical information of the optional equipment, refer to
the User’s Manual. Some options do not require specific user instructions.
 Check for visible damages on the delivered optional equipment. If damages are found, the equipment
must not be used.
 All packing material, replaced and left-over parts must be discarded in accordance with appropriate
industrial and environmental standards.
After connecting any external electric device to the system:
 Ensure that the whole combination complies with the international standard
IEC 60601-1 and the requirements of the local authorities.
 Perform an electrical safety test of the complete system. For electrical safety test of the system, refer to
chapter Preventive Maintenance, section Safety inspection.
Manual check of Emergency ventilation system according to instructions in the User's Manual.
5.13.1 Maximum weight, number, and position of accessories

Accessories must be installed according to any installation and safety guidelines given in the accessories’
installation instruction. Additional local, regional, and/or national guidelines related to occupational safety
may apply.
Accessary/Option Equipment C20 C3011 C4012
weight (kg) Max. load (kg) Max. load (kg) Max. load (kg)
Additional writing table 4.5 5 5 5
Drawer N/A 5 5 5
Patient monitor mounting position N/A 13.5 13.5 13.5
Auxiliary O2 & Suction module N/A 2.5 2.5 2.5

mounting position
Parameter box support arm 3 5 5 5
Working surface/writing table N/A 20 5 5
4 vertical shafts 2 10 kg/shaft13 10 kg/shaft13 5 kg/shaft
Horizontal rails for hanging accessories N/A 3 3 3
Additional arm 5.8 12 1214 12
Backup gas rack 20 7 kg/cylinder 7 kg/cylinder N/A
Backup gas holder 5.5 7 714 7
Top shelf15 1 20 20 20
Vaporizer holder N/A 4 4 4
Universal bracket for C20 2 30 N/A N/A
Universal bracket for C30 2 N/A 30 N/A
Cable support arm 1.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
5.13.2 Interchangeability – Control panel and Patient monitor

The interchangeability function gives a possibility to switch mounting position between the Control panel and
Patient monitor.
The procedure is described in the document Flow-i, Interchangeability, Control Panel - Patient Monitor,
Installation Instructions. If further information is required, contact MCC HSC or your local Getinge
representative. Note: Only applicable for S/N > 1112
11
To maintain the lift function, the combined load of the extra equipment and accessories mounted on the height adjustable part should
not exceed 30 kg.
12
Maximum configurations is dependent on the lift capacity (minimum requirement 200 kg) of ceiling pendants approved for C40 and the
maximum capacity of the C40-pendant interface (250 kg). This gives a range of approx. 50-100 kg for accessories and extra equipment,
depending on the ceiling pendant.
13
Applies when using a single arm per system, attached to 1 or 2 shafts and with a load at a maximum distance of 500 mm from the
system.
14
C30 can only be equipped with the additional arm or the backup gas holder.
15
The system can be equipped with either Top shelf or Patient monitor.
5.14 Functional check of backup gas supply

 Only personnel trained and authorized by Getinge shall be permitted to install, service or repair the
system, the base unit as well as any optional equipment.
 The gas tube connections must be tightened firmly with a wrench. It must not be possible to disconnect
the gas tubes by hand (without wrench).
The Functional check can also be used during troubleshooting and after a service intervention in the backup
gas accessories.
Note: The Functional check must be performed on all connected gas cylinders, i.e., gas supply from the
Backup gas rack.
5.14.1 Performing the Functional check

Perform a System checkout with the system connected to central gas supply to ensure that the system is
fully functional and has no leakage.
5.14.1.1 With the O2 backup gas cylinder connected

1. Connect patient tubes and a Getinge adult test lung.
2. Set the Auto/Man switch to Auto.
3. Set the ventilation mode to Volume Control.
4. Set Tidal Volume = 300 ml and Resp. rate = 15.
5. Set Fresh gas flow = 6 l/min.
6. Set Gas Mix = O2/Air.
7. Set O2 conc. = 50%.
9. Disconnect the central gas supply for O2. This displays a dialog box that prompts the user to open the O 2
backup gas supply.
10. Confirm the dialog box.
11. Open the O2 cylinder and let the system ventilate for 90 seconds.
12. Check that the O2 concentration metric values on the screen are within 43–57% and that no N2O metric
is shown.
13. Push the End case button.
14. Restore the central gas supply for O2.
15. Close the O2 cylinder.
5.14.1.2 With the Air backup gas cylinder connected

3. Set the ventilation mode to Volume Control.
6. Set Gas Mix = O2/Air.
7. Set O2 conc. = 50%.

9. Disconnect the central gas supply for Air. This displays a dialog that prompts the user to open the Air
backup gas supply.
11. Open the Air cylinder and let the system ventilate for 90 seconds.
12. Check that the O2 concentration metric values on the screen are within 43–57 % and that no N2O metric
is shown.
14. Restore the central gas supply for Air.
15. Close the Air cylinder.
5.14.1.3 With the N2O backup gas cylinder connected

3. Set ventilation mode to Volume Control.
6. Set Gas Mix = O2/N2O.
7. Set O2 conc. = 30%.
9. Disconnect the central gas supply for N2O. This displays a dialog that prompts the user to open the N2O
backup gas supply..
11. Open the N2O cylinder and let the system ventilate for 90 seconds.
12. Check that the O2 concentration metric values on the screen are within 23–37% and that N2O metric is
shown.
14. Restore the central gas supply for N2O.
15. Close the N2O cylinder.
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
6 Troubleshooting
6.1 General
Before starting troubleshooting, try to eliminate all possibilities of operational errors. If the malfunction
remains, use the troubleshooting guides below as well as the information in section 3, Description of
functions, starting on page 31, to locate the faulty part.
There should be a logical trend to your troubleshooting. First try to trace the faulty function. Then the most
suitable procedure is to track down the exact fault by systematically replacing individual spare parts, one at a
time. One purpose of section 3, Description of functions starting on page 31 and section 10, Diagrams,
starting on page 369 in this Service Manual is to make it easier to trace faults.
When the fault is corrected, carry out a complete System checkout as described in the User’s Manual.
The troubleshooting guides below are focused only on technical problems. Information about clinical related
problems can be found in the User’s Manual.
For functionality enhancement, the latest released System software version is always recommended.
The information in this chapter applies to System software version 4.7.
gas supply connected.
Possible causes to malfunction not mentioned in the following troubleshooting guides are:
 The system has not been correctly assembled after cleaning, maintenance or service.
 Disconnection or bad connection in cable connectors, PC board connectors, and interconnection boards
(PC 1900 main backplane board, PC 1909 vaporizer adapter board, etc.).
 Pinched cables. Defective cables may short-circuit the power supply, CAN bus signals, etc.
 Disconnected or defective gas tubes, breathing gas as well as drive gas.
Note: Repeated disconnection/connection of tubes in quick couplings may cause a leakage.
These possible causes to malfunction must always be considered during troubleshooting.
Troubleshooting is divided into four sections:
1. System checkout: This section describes the System checkout to give knowledge about all tests
included. The Test results log, and associated log interpretation, is available only for personnel trained
and authorized by Getinge. Refer to section 6.2, System checkout on page 304.
2. Technical error codes and messages: The Technical error code interpretation is available only for
personnel trained and authorized by Getinge. Refer to section 6.3, Technical error codes and messages
on page 320.
3. PC board LED indicators: This section describes LED indicators on some of the PC boards used to
indicate activities and errors. Refer to section 6.4, PC board LED indicators on page 321.
4. Other errors and remedies: This section describes possible causes and recommended actions in case
of other technical errors in the system. Refer to section 6.5, Other errors and remedies on page 329.
6.2 System checkout

The system demands the user to start the automatic System checkout at every start-up of the unit. The
User’s Manual describes how to perform the System checkout.
The System checkout description on the following pages gives more detailed information about the System
checkout. This information can be used, e.g. during troubleshooting of the unit.
Some of the recommended actions described below refer to Service & Settings. The Service key is required
to access Service & Settings. Troubleshooting can of course be performed without access to Service &
Settings, but for some of the recommended actions, Service & Settings will make troubleshooting faster and
easier.
Check if the fault remains after each performed service action. Re-run the full System checkout or run the
concerned test using Service & Settings.
Some of the tests will fail due to leakages in the breathing system, improper sampling line, etc. If they fail, a
dialog box will open and make it possible to redo the test when these parts have been adjusted.
It is also possible to select System checkout via the Standby menu; a Full check as well as separate
Leakage check and Vaporizer check. The Leakage check also measures circuit compliance. These separate
checks do not replace the complete System checkout.
Tests included in System checkout
Test number Test name
1 Initial gas supply test
2 O2 flush test
3 Insp. & exp. valves test
4 Internal tests
4.1 Absorber switch test
4.2 Water trap test
4.3 Mains connection test
4.4 Control disable vaporizer test
4.5 Monitoring disable vaporizer test
4.6 Panel audio test
4.7 Power failure test
4.8 Initial battery test
4.9 Vaporizer 1 initial test
4.10 Vaporizer 2 initial test
4.11 AFGO valve test
5 Barometer test
6 Gas supply pressure test
7 Pressure transducer tests
7.1 Control and Monitoring pressure transducers
7.2 APL/PEEP valve
8 Safety valve tests
9 Vaporizer inlet/outlet valve test
10 Flow transducer tests
10.1 Control flow transducer
10.2 Monitoring flow transducer
10.3 Fresh gas filter test
11 AUTO ventilation leakage test
12 MAN ventilation leakage test
13 Gas analyzer test
14 Battery test
15 Vaporizer 1 test
16 Vaporizer 2 test
17 Technical alarm test
Acronyms in test logs
Acronym Test log entry type
CHK Check Failure
DLG Dialog Choice
FIN Test Result
INF Info
MEA Measurement Value
MVG Measurement Value Group
RST Reset
SFIN Sequence Result
SRST Sequence Reset
SSTA Sequence Start
STA Test Start
6.2.1 Preparations prior to System checkout start
Follow the on-screen instructions and check that:

 The breathing circuit is correctly mounted and
connected to the test plug.
 The water trap and sampling line are correctly
mounted.
 The absorber is correctly mounted and
unsaturated.
 The vaporizer is adequately filled.
 The Anesthesia Gas Scavenging System
(AGSS) flow indicator is above dashed area.
 The central gas supplies are connected. Figure 6-1: System checkout start menu –
Preparations.
 A resuscitator is available.
 There is adequate suction pressure in the
suction device.
 The central gas supplies are connected
Tap Continue when ready.
6.2.2 Initial Gas supply test

This test checks central and backup gas
connections and pressures before the manual tests.
This is to inform the user about any potential
problems in an early stage.
 The test checks if the machine is enabled to
use N2O according to its configuration.
 The Initial Gas Supply test always passing and
its’ result does not influence the SCO result.
Figure 6-2: Initial gas supply test
Figure 6-3: Initial gas supply test – Test result
6.2.3 O2 flush test
This test checks the O2 flush mechanism.

Tap Start check to start the O2 flush test.
The test is divided in three parts:
1. Before pushing the O2 Flush button:
When the test is started, it is checked whether
O2 supply pressure is present and that the
Patient Cassette is mounted. The O2 flow,
which is measured by the expiratory flow
transducer, must not exceed 1 l/min prior to
pushing the O2 Flush button. The test will fail if
the button is not pressed within 20 s. Figure 6-4: O2 flush test, step 1
2. When pushing the O2 Flush button:

Push and hold the O2 Flush button until you
hear a beep (after approx. 3 s). The test waits 1
second before reading the O2 flow. The flow
must be within 35–65 l/min. The test will fail if
the button is not released within 22 s.
3. After the beep - when the O2 Flush button is
released:
The test waits 1 second before reading the O2
flow. The flow must not exceed 1 l/min.
Figure 6-5: O2 flush test, step 2
6.2.4 Insp. and Exp. valves test
This test checks that the Insp. and Exp. valve discs
are in place and are able to move.
1. Tap Start check to start the Insp. and Exp.
valves test.
2. Visually check that the ceramic Insp. and Exp.
valve discs in the patient cassette are moving
Figure 6-6: Insp. and Exp. valves test – Start test
3. If necessary, open the lid to look at the valve

discs. Close the lid after the check.
o If the ceramic Insp. and Exp. valve discs
moves, tap Yes and the test will pass.
o If not, tap No and the test will fail.
4. Tap Continue when ready.
Figure 6-7: Insp. and Exp. valves test – Complete test
If the system detects that the patient cassette lid is open after the user tapped Yes, a dialog box will appear.
The user gets the choice to close the lid, or to tap Bypass in case the system has problems detecting the lid
position. Tapping Bypass will not affect the test result, but generate an event in the log.
At the start of this test, it is verified that the Air inlet supply pressure is within range. The APL/PEEP valve is
open. The test is started by opening the Fresh gas module Air. The Vaporizer bypass valve is closed in order
to build-up a pressure of approx. 110 cmH2O (measured by the Fresh gas pressure transducer). When the
target pressure is reached, the bypass valve is opened. This creates a pressure wave which will cause the
inspiratory and expiratory valve to move. Actual generated pressure will be shown in the test log. If the
pressure reaches 140 cmH2O or fails to reach 50 cmH2O, the test will be aborted.
The pressure wave is repeated for 90 s or until the test is manually deactivated.
6.2.5 Internal tests
6.2.5.1 Absorber switch test

This test checks that the Absorber switch is in correct position, i.e., the absorber is docked.
6.2.5.2 Water trap test

This test checks that the water trap is connected and is of type “Adult”.
6.2.5.3 Mains connection test

This test checks that mains power supply is connected. If the system is running on battery, the user will be
notified to connect mains supply. A check of presence of errors in the Power control subsystem is performed.
6.2.5.4 Control disable vaporizer test

This test verifies that the vaporizer slot can be disabled by the Control subsystem and that the power supply
voltage to the vaporizer can be switched on and off. It also tests that the slot can be enabled in the case that
there are no vaporizer connected when the test is run.
6.2.5.5 Monitoring disable vaporizer test

This test verifies that the Monitoring system can disable the slot where a vaporizer is connected. It also tests
that the Monitoring system cannot enable power to a slot where no vaporizer is connected.
6.2.5.6 Panel audio test

A constant sound is generated for about 1 second at the medium sound level, 60%. The panel measures
and calculates the average sound level. The average sound level is then compared to a minimum limit.
The test checks that the loudspeaker in the Control panel generates an adequate sound level.
A medium sound level, i.e., 60%, is generated for 1 second. A microphone mounted nearby the loudspeaker
measures the sound. The Panel subsystem calculates an average sound level to verify that the sound level
meets the required sound level of 60 dB @ 1 m.
6.2.5.7 Power failure test

The following checks are performed during the Power failure test:
 Function of the buzzer on PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board. The buzzer is switched on and off.
 Upper and lower power failure alarm (PFA) limits of the internal voltages: 5 V, 3.3 V, 2.5 V, and 1.5 V.
Note: During this test, the “Disable_valves” signal will be activated for the 5 V check. This will cause all
valves to be deactivated repeatedly. As a result of this, the safety valve will be causing loud banging sound.
6.2.5.8 Initial battery test

This test checks the Power backup battery status and, if necessary, initiates a more thorough test. The more
thorough test will be performed while other System checkout tests are executed. Refer to section 6.2.15,
Battery test on page 318.
6.2.5.9 Vaporizer 1 and 2 - initial test

The test of Vaporizer is divided in several subtests. For a complete test description, refer to section 6.2.16,
Vaporizer 1 and 2 test on page 318.
6.2.5.10 AFGO valve test

The AFGO valve test starts with a check that the AFGO option is installed. If it is not installed, no further
tests will be performed and the AFGO valve test will be passed.
Valid in-pressure
 2450 – 6050 hPa
 2450 – 6550 hPa
If the AFGO option is installed, the test will now start:

1. Central gas supply pressure for Air is checked. Pressure must be within valid limits (see above).
2. The APL/PEEP valve is opened.

3. The AFGO valve is set to Patient cassette position. Checks that the average expiratory flow is in the
range 500–2500 ml/min and that the pressure limit 30 cmH2O (measured by the Fresh gas pressure
transducer) is not exceeded.
4. The AFGO valve is set to AFGO position. Checks that the average expiratory flow is max. 500 ml/min
and that the pressure limit 30 cmH2O (measured by the Fresh gas pressure transducer) is not exceeded.
5. The AFGO valve is set to Patient cassette position. Checks that the average expiratory flow is in the
range 500–2500 ml/min and that the pressure limit 30 cmH2O (measured by the Fresh gas pressure
transducer) is not exceeded.
6.2.6 Barometer test

Checks that the barometric pressure, measured by the internal barometer on the Monitoring board, is within
limits (670–1080 hPa):
 Monitoring: Checks that the barometric pressure, read by Monitoring, is within limits.
 Control: Checks that the barometric pressure, read by Control, is within limits.
 The difference between the pressures read by Monitoring and Control must not be greater than 26 hPa.
6.2.7 Gas supply pressure test

Valid in-pressure:
 2450 – 6050 hPa
 2450 – 6550 hPa
The Gas supply pressure test checks that:

 Central O2 gas supply pressure is within limits (see above).
 Central Air gas supply pressure is within limits (see above).
 Central N2O gas supply pressure is within limits (2450–4550 hPa)
(if N2O is enabled and connected).
 Central N2O gas supply pressure is within limit. (0–1000 hPa)
(if N2O is not enabled and/or not connected).
For each gas, it is checked that the difference between gas module pressure and central gas supply
pressure is less than 10% of the lower of the two values. For O 2, both the reflector gas and fresh gas
pressure is compared with central gas pressure.
Note: This check is only performed if one of the following conditions are fulfilled:
 No backup gas supply is connected and central gas supply is connected, i.e., backup gas supply
pressure <1000 hPa and central gas pressure >1000 hPa.
or if
 Backup gas supply is connected and central gas supply pressure is higher than backup gas supply
pressure, i.e., backup gas supply pressure >1000 hPa and central gas pressure >3800 hPa.
Gas module pressure readings, measured by Monitor and Control for each gas, are compared. For O2, both
the reflector and fresh gas pressures are compared. (Difference ≤150 hPa).
If backup gas cylinders are connected, the Gas supply pressure test checks that:
Backup gas cylinder pressure is within limits (40000–220000 hPa). Same limits for all three gases.
Figure 6-8: 1 = Central gas supply pressure transducer; 2 = Gas module pressure transducer.
6.2.8 Pressure transducer tests
6.2.8.1 Control and Monitoring pressure transducers

The purpose of this test is to balance the Fresh gas pressure transducer (F), Inspiratory patient pressure
transducer (I), Expiratory pressure transducer (E), and Reflector gas pressure transducer (R). During the
test, new gain and offset coefficients are calculated.
The DC signals from the pressure transducers are digitalized and converted to pressure values.
The Gas modules are first set to deliver no flow (closed). Control and Monitoring measures the pressure from
all four pressure transducers. These values are set to correspond to 0 cmH2O in the Control and Pressure
Transducer EEPROMs. The offset must be within ±0.3000 V from the factory offset for the test to pass.
Then a pressure of 60 cmH2O is generated by the Fresh gas module Air, using the Fresh gas pressure
transducer as reference. Control and Monitoring measures the pressures from Reflector, Insp. and Exp.
pressure transducers. The gain factor is then calculated for the Reflector, Insp. and Exp. pressure
transducers to correspond to the Fresh gas pressure transducer value. The values are stored into the
Pressure transducer EEPROMs.
The gain factors must be within ±5% from the factory calibration for the test to pass.
The pressures are measured one more time at 60 cmH2O, using the calculated gain factors. The Monitoring
and Control value for each pressure transducer is compared. The pressures are not allowed to differ more
than 1 cmH2O. All measured pressures must be within 55–65 cmH2O.
Leakage may cause these tests to fail. If so, a dialog will appear and give the user the possibility to check for
leakage and redo the test.
6.2.8.2 APL/PEEP valve

The purpose of this test is to check and calibrate the APL/PEEP Valve.
The Fresh gas modules Air and O2 are set to generate a flow and the APL/PEEP valve is set to regulate the
pressure to 60 cmH2O.
When the pressure is steady at 60 cmH2O, the APL/PEEP valve is set to regulate at:
 50 cmH2O
 40 cmH2O
 5 cmH2O
 2 cmH2O
These pressure levels are measured with the Reflector pressure transducer together with the electric current
required holding the valve. The measured pressures must be within the set value ±15 cmH2O for all of the
subtests for the test to pass.
New offset and gain factors are calculated using the values from the subtests as a reference.
 The new offset is within the valid range 0.06768 A to 0.15684 A.
 The new gain factor is within the valid range 0.00730 A/cmH2O to 0.01130 A/cmH2O.
The values from the subtests are tested again, but in theory using the new gain factor and offset. The
pressures must be within the set value ±2 cmH2O or ±10%, whichever is greater.
The Fresh gas module Air and O2 are set to generate a flow and the APL/PEEP valve is again set to regulate
the pressure to 60 cmH2O.
When the pressure is steady at 60 cmH2O, the APL/PEEP valve is set to regulate at:
 50 cmH2O. The pressure must be within 45–55 cmH2O.
 2 cmH2O. The pressure must be within 1–3.5 cmH2O.
The pressures are measured by the Reflector pressure transducer.
6.2.9 Safety valve tests

The purpose is to test the safety valve and its controlling signals, including VALVES DISABLE. An
adjustment of the release pressure of the safety valve to 117 cmH2O ±3 cmH2O is also performed.
The safety valve is opened and closed again by Monitoring. If this fails, the safety valve test is aborted.
Control performs calibration of the Safety valve opening pressure by closing the APL/PEEP valve and then
opens the Fresh gas module Air to pressurize the system. The pressure is measured by the Inspiratory
pressure transducer. The pressure shall be 117 cmH2O ±3 cmH2O. If correct opening pressure is not
obtained the first time, another attempt will be performed. Maximum allowed attempts is 6. If all attempts fail
the test will be aborted.
6.2.10 Vaporizer inlet/outlet valve test

The purpose of the test is to verify that the Vaporizer Inlet and Outlet valves (PV1 - PV4) and Vaporizer
bypass valve (PV5) can be opened and closed. The test can be performed with or without vaporizer
connected.
The test is divided into two sub tests.
6.2.10.1 Vaporizer bypass valve

1. APL/PEEP valve is closed.
2. The Reflector gas module and Fresh gas module Air are now opened, delivering different flows to create
a pressure difference on the two sides of the Vaporizer bypass valve. The following is tested:
o The reflector side must reach at least 5 cmH2O measured by the Reflector gas pressure transducer.
The fresh gas side must reach at least 10 cmH2O measured by the Fresh gas pressure transducer.
o A pressure difference of 30% of the higher pressure must be obtained in order to proceed with the
test. If adequate pressure difference is not obtained within 7 s, the test will be aborted.
o The vaporizer bypass valve is now opened to equalize the pressure in the system. If this is not
obtained within 7 s, the test is failed.
3. The vaporizer bypass valve is closed and pressure is released by opening APL/PEEP valve.
6.2.10.2 Vaporizer inlet/outlet valves

1. Vaporizer Inlet/Outlet valves, Vaporizer bypass valve and APL/PEEP valve are closed.
2. The Reflector gas module and Fresh gas module Air are now opened, delivering different flows to create
a pressure difference on the two sides of the Vaporizer bypass valve. The following is tested:
o The reflector pressure must reach at least 5 cmH2O measured by the Reflector gas pressure
transducer. The fresh gas pressure must reach at least 10 cmH2O measured by the Fresh gas
pressure transducer.
o A pressure difference of 30% of the higher pressure must be obtained in order to proceed with the
test. If adequate pressure difference is not obtained within 7 s the test will be aborted.
o When adequate pressure difference is obtained, the vaporizer inlet/outlet valves in vaporizer slot 1
are opened. If a vaporizer is connected; the measured pressure from the pressure transducers shall
be equalized. If no vaporizer is connected; the measured pressure shall reach 0 cmH2O on both
pressure transducers.
3. The vaporizer Inlet/Outlet valves are closed and pressure is released by opening APL/PEEP valve.
6.2.11 Flow transducer tests

The purpose of this test is to adjust offset in gas modules flow transducers and the Expiratory flow
transducer. Furthermore, the Expiratory flow transducer is checked against known flows from the gas
modules.
6.2.11.1 Control flow transducer
Zeroing
The DC signals from the Gas modules and Patient cassette are digitalized and converted to pressure values.
PC 2060/PC 1920 control board must adjust the offset for these signals.
 All Gas modules are set to deliver no flow.
 PC 2060/PC 1920 control board will now measure the flow from the Gas modules and Patient cassette.
These values are set to correspond to 0 l/min in the Control software.
 The offset must be within 0.000–0.040 V for each Gas module and 2.480–2.520 V for the Patient
cassette.
Calculation of false flow correction and dynamic common mode correction

The parameters below are used for Gas module regulation.
 The false flow correction and dynamic common mode correction is calculated for each Gas module and
is used for the control of the modules.
 The false flow correction must be within 225 to 775 DAC steps and the dynamic common mode
correction must be within –1371 to 1371 DAC steps.
Gas supply test

Control measures the gas supply pressure with the internal gas supply pressure transducers.
The pressure must be within 2450-6050 or 2450 – 6550 hPa (depending on model) for each Gas module
except for the N2O Gas module where the pressure must be within 2450–4550 hPa.
The gas supply test for the N2O Gas module is only performed if the system is enabled to use N 2O according
to its configuration.
6.2.11.2 Monitoring flow transducer
Zeroing
The DC signals from the Gas modules and Patient cassette are digitalized and converted to pressure values.
The PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board must adjust the offset for these signals.
 All of the Gas modules are set to deliver no flow.
 PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board will now measure the flow from the Gas modules and Patient
cassette. These values are then set to correspond to 0 l/min in the Monitoring software.
 The offset must be within 0.000–0.040 V for each Gas module and 2.480–2.520 V for the Patient
cassette.
Flow test
If the N2O module is supplied with gas, the tests of the Fresh gas modules are tested two by two. The
Reflector gas module is tested individually.
Order: Air + N2O, O2 + N2O, Air + O2 and Reflector.
If the N2O module is not supplied with gas, the tests of the Fresh gas modules are first tested individually and
then two by two. The Reflector gas module is tested individually.
Order: Air, O2, Air + O2 and Reflector.
 The modules to be tested are set to deliver 30 l/min.
 The Control and Monitoring system receives the measured values from all Gas modules and the Patient
cassette. The measured value from the modules must be within the following limits in order for the test to
pass:
o Active modules: 29.4–30.6 l/min
o Inactive modules: -0.096–0.096 l/min
o Patient cassette: 90–110% of the sum of all Gas modules flow as measured by the same subsystem
(CON and MON).
Note: When the Fresh gas module O2 is active, the value from Reflector gas module will be ignored and
when the Reflector gas module is active, the value from Fresh gas module O2 will be ignored. This is due to
that the modules are using the same gas supply.
Noise measurement
The amplitude of the sound pulses generated by the ultrasonic transducers/receivers in the Expiratory flow
transducer is measured at zero gas flow.
The amplitude of the received sound pulse is measured in an earlier timeframe than during ordinary
operation. The measured amplitude gives an indication of how much of the transmitted sound pulse that
travels through the solid cassette material instead of through the gas mixture in the Expiratory flow
transducer.
The values from both upstream and downstream directions are logged.
k value
First the sum of the flow values from all of Gas modules in the flow tests is calculated.
Secondly the sum of all the flow values from the Patient cassette is calculated, where the flow value from the
gas reflector tests is absolute.
The k value is produced by dividing the Gas module flow sum with the Patient cassette flow sum. The k
value must be within:
 0.92 – 1.08 for System version 4.2 and below.
 0.88 – 1.08 for System version 4.3 and above.
The k value is tested by multiplying each Patient cassette flow value measured by the Monitoring system
with the k value. If the sum of the flow values from the Gas modules differ more than 8% from the new
Patient cassette flow value in a subtest, the test will fail.
6.2.11.3 Fresh gas filter test

The purpose of this test is to check that the Fresh gas filter has not been clogged.
 The Safety valve is opened and the APL/PEEP valve is closed.
 The value from the Fresh gas pressure transducer is measured and must not exceed 2 cmH2O.
 A fresh gas flow of 100 % O2 at 90 l/min is started and is reduced to 60 l/min after 2 seconds.
 The value from the Fresh gas pressure transducer is measured and must not exceed 11 cmH2O.
Note: The measured value from Fresh gas pressure transducer at 60 l/min shall be checked during
Preventive Maintenance. The Fresh gas filter should be replaced if the measured value exceeds 10 cmH 2O.
6.2.12 AUTO ventilation leakage test

The purpose of the AUTO ventilation leakage test is to:
 Measure leakage in gas sampling system.
 Measure leakage in patient circuit (manual breathing bag with tubing excluded).
 Measure leakage in connected vaporizer.
 Measure patient circuit compliance.
 Detect internal leakages into the system.
 Detect if the manual ventilation bag is connected to the expiratory outlet.
The following tests must be passed prior to the AUTO ventilation leakage test:
 Pressure transducer test.
 Flow transducer test.
 Central gas supply must be available.
Furthermore, the CO2 absorber must be docked in order to provide a correct system volume.
The Reflector gas module is used to pressurize the system to a pressure level of approx. 50 cmH2O. The
pressure is measured by the Fresh Gas, Exp., Insp. and Reflector pressure transducers. A leakage
calculation is made by measure the pressure after 10 s and 16 s.
Maximum allowed leakage is 150 ml/min.
Compressible volume compensation factor is calculated during this test and shall be within the limits of:
 2.6 – 6.0 ml/cmH2O for System version 4.2 and below.
 2.6 – 8.0 ml/cmH2O for System version 4.3 and above.
6.2.13 MAN ventilation leakage test

The purpose of the MAN ventilation leakage test is to:
 Measure and check leakage in Manual ventilation bag and tubing (internal and external) involved in
manual ventilation.
 Check function of the Manual ventilation valve.
The test is performed at a pressure of approx. 30 cmH2O.
The Fresh air gas module is used to pressurize the system.
The Fresh gas and Reflector pressure transducers are used to control the pressure during the test.
The system is first pressurized to slightly above 30 cmH2O. The pressure is then allowed to stabilize while
the Manual ventilation bag expands. Thereafter the leakage is measured by calculation of the added volume
needed to keep the pressure stable at approx. 30 cmH2O. This method is used due to the expandable nature
of the Manual ventilation bag and differs from the measurement method used by AUTO ventilation leakage
test.
Some types of larger Manual ventilation bags may continue their expansion during the measurement period
and render a measured leakage above 150 ml/min. In such a case, the measurement procedure is repeated
up to 3 times to allow the expansion of the Manual ventilation bag to cease before a leakage value of at most
150 ml/min is measured.
Upon completion of leakage measurement, the function of the Manual ventilation valve is checked:
 After the leakage measurement step the Manual ventilation valve is closed.
 The pressure inside the rest of the system is evacuated via the APL/PEEP valve and the Fresh gas
safety valve.
 The manual ventilation valve is then opened and the Expiratory flow transducer is used to detect an
(negative) Air flow from the manual bag within a timeframe of 0.5 s from valve opening. A mean flow
value (which is negative) is calculated. The mean flow shall be less than –0.4 l/s (i.e., higher than 0.4 l/s
in absolute terms).
6.2.14 Gas analyzer test

The purpose of this test is to check the PGA. However, no gas concentration measurement is performed,
except for O2 in conjunction with the leakage in gas sampling channel check.
Note: With System software version 4.01.00 (and above) the System checkout will not perform Vaporizer
tests 1 and 2 if the Gas analyzer test fails.
The gas analyzer test is divided into eight steps:
1. Initial status check
2. Zero reference measurement (ZRM) tube check
3. PGA zero calibration
4. O2 sensor offset
5. Gas analyzer pressure drop check
6. Gas analyzer flow check
7. O2 concentration and sampling point check
8. Final status check and finishing
6.2.14.1 Initial status check

The following initial status checks are performed:
1. Water trap is connected.
2. O2 central gas supply is connected and within pressure limits.
3. The error status is checked for PGA. No errors must be indicated. If errors are detected, the gas
analyzer test will fail and be aborted.
4. In case PGA reports occlusion, a dialog is displayed asking the user to check sampling line and water
trap. The dialog offers the possibility to redo the test.
6.2.14.2 Zero reference measurement (ZRM) tube check

1. The pump flow in PGA is set to zero and the zero calibration valve (ZCV) is set to sample room Air.
2. The pressure transducer inside PGA measures the ambient pressure.
3. The pump flow is then set to 200 ml/min. This will create a slight pressure drop in the Gas analyzer zero
calibration gas intake which is measured by the pressure transducer.
4. The pressure drop is compared to the previously measured ambient pressure and must be less than
70 hPa for Patient gas analyzer AION Platinum.
5. The Zero calibration valve (ZCV) is set to sample from the Y-piece.
6.2.14.3 PGA zero calibration

PGA performs zeroing (ZRM).
6.2.14.4 O2 sensor offset

Checks the O2 sensor @ 21%:
1. The Zero calibration valve (ZCV) is set to sample room Air.
2. The pump flow is set to 200 ml/min.
3. To stabilize the flow, room Air is flushed for 10 s and then sampled 10 times during 2.5 s.
4. An O2 mean value is calculated. The mean value may not differ more than ±3% (abs) @ 21% and the
noise level must not be more than 6% (abs).
5. The Zero calibration valve (ZCV) is set to sample from the Y-piece.
6.2.14.5 Gas analyzer pressure drop check

 Checks that the pressure drop values in the PGA sampling line are stable, i.e., sampled pressure values
differ ≤ 1 hPa.
 The measured pressure drop must be within 25–125 hPa.
6.2.14.6 Gas analyzer flow check

 The PGA pump is set to operate at 40% duty cycle, without regulation.
 Checks that the average flow values in the PGA sampling line are stable, i.e., sampled flow values differ
≤ 1 ml/min.
 The measured PGA average flow must be at least 80 ml/min.
6.2.14.7 O2 concentration and sampling point check

This test is performed to determine whether there is a leakage in the gas sampling channel.
1. A fresh gas flow of 100% O2 at 30 l/min is started.
2. The SCO valve is opened and the Manual ventilation valve and the APL/PEEP valve are closed.
3. The pump flow is set to 200 ml/min.
4. The O2 concentration is checked by PGA and must be within 92–108%. The primary aim of the check is
to:
o Verify tightness, rather than the accuracy of measurement.
o Verify that O2 delivery is correct (no erroneous gas supply connection).
5. The pressure drop in the sampling line is continuously measured. The measured values must be within
25 hPa to 125 hPa. The measured pressure drop is saved persistently, for use to detect if sampling tube
is disconnected or not in run mode. The pressure drop value is shown in the Test results log, refer to
section 5.4, Sampling line pressure drop test on page 246.
6. The O2 fresh gas flow is stopped.
7. The SCO valve is closed and the Manual ventilation valve and the APL/PEEP valve are opened.
8. The pump flow is stopped.
6.2.14.8 Final status check and finishing

1. Checks that the Water trap is connected.
2. Checks error status for PGA. No errors must be indicated.
6.2.15 Battery test

The purpose of this test is to check that the battery is connected, has sufficient capacity, and is free from
errors. In addition, the battery power path and the condition of the battery is checked on a daily basis.
The battery test is divided into two parts, the Initial battery test and the final Battery test. The reason for this
is that the analysis of battery condition involves a measurement, which will take about 2 minutes, and be
performed in parallel by the Power Control subsystem while other test are being executed. However, notice
that the measurement is not performed during every System checkout.
6.2.15.1 Initial battery test

Initial battery test starts the battery power path test and the internal resistance test (if necessary). The
Internal resistance test should be performed at least every 4 days. Since there are some preconditions to
start the test, the system will attempt to perform the test every day. If more than 4 days has passed since the
last internal resistance test was performed, it will be logged.
As the vaporizer will reboot during tests prior to the Battery test, resulting in a major fluctuation in power
usage, the battery tests will not start before the connected vaporizer is properly initiated.
The Initial battery tests are:
 Battery power path test. Checks that the power supply switches to battery, when the input voltage is
decreased. The test fails if no battery current is detected.
 Internal resistance test. Checks the condition of the battery by measuring the internal resistance. The
test fails if the resistance is too high. As mains power is disconnected (by the system) during this test,
the blue Mains LED goes out.
6.2.15.2 Final battery check

The estimated battery operation time is checked. If the estimated time is below 18 minutes, the user will be
prompted to remain connected to mains power.
6.2.16 Vaporizer 1 and 2 test

Checks the Vaporizers one at a time. Will be shown as Vaporizer 1 check and Vaporizer 2 check in the logs.
The test is divided in three parts:
 Initial vaporizer test
 Vaporizer leakage test
 Vaporizer final test.

The two first tests are started during the internal tests. Vaporizer leakage test is performed in the background
while other System checkout tests are executed. The tests will be interrupted if any test fails.
o System software 4.5.2 and below:
A fail will also disable the vaporizer and generate a Technical alarm; TE 59/TE 922 for Vaporizer 1 or TE
60/TE 972 for Vaporizer 2.
o System software 4.7 and above:
All three parts of the Vaporizer test are performed approximately every five days. When a complete
Vaporizer test has passed, only parts of Vaporizer initial test are performed during SCO.
However, it is possible to perform all three test by running a Vaporizer test from Standby or from Tests in
Service and settings between the five days interval.
6.2.16.1 Initial vaporizer test

 Checks that the Vaporizer is connected and enabled and that it is possible to communicate with its
internal software.
 Checks that the agent liquid level is sufficient to perform the test (>5%).
 Checks that the vaporizer lid is closed.
 Checks that it is possible to evacuate the vaporizer and reach a pressure below
o 700 hPa for all agents
o 200 hPa (700 hPa for Desflurane)
 Checks that the vaporizer internal tests passed.

 Checks that the vaporizer reaches a stable pressure of 1000–1400 hPa during 5 s within a period of 20 s
when pressurized.
Note: this sub-test is only performed during the complete test every five days or during a separate
Vaporizer test.
6.2.16.2 Vaporizer leakage test

Checks that the leakage in the vaporizer is within –15 to 20 ml/min when the vaporizer is pressurized and the
pressure is stable.
6.2.16.3 Vaporizer final test

Checks the vaporizer safety valve, which includes agent delivery. The test requires that the following criteria
are fulfilled, during the entire test.
NOTE: The test is performed one vaporizer at a time. For System Software 4.7 or above the test will only be
done every 5:th day. For a complete vaporizer test perform a separate vaporizer test.
 The Vaporizer leakage test passed.
 The latest result of AUTO ventilation leakage test and MAN ventilation leakage test passed.
 PGA reports no error and gas sampling and analysis is started successfully at the beginning of the
Vaporizer final test.
 Central gas supply pressure for Air and O2 is above 1800 hPa.
 Gas analyzer test passed.
Vaporizer is enabled and free from pending errors.
When these criteria are fulfilled, the test proceeds:

1. Checks that the vaporizer reaches a pressure of 1000–1400 hPa during 1 s within a period of 10 s.
2. The APL/PEEP valve and Fresh gas safety valve are closed.
3. Vaporizer Inlet and Outlet valves for vaporizer being tested are opened and Vaporizer bypass valve is
closed.
4. SCO valve is opened.
5. Delivers a fresh gas flow (Air) of 12 l/min.
6. Opens the vaporizer safety valve.
7. Depending on the anesthetic agent used, requests a concentration of:
 12% for Desflurane
 4% for Sevoflurane
 4% for Isoflurane
8. Checks that a necessary temperature is reached and that the measured concentration is within the
following range:
 9-15% for Desflurane
 3-5% for Sevoflurane and Isoflurane
The PGA is used for measuring. The actual concentration value is stored. The value will be used for
validation in step 10.
9. Closes the vaporizer safety valve.
10. Checks – within a specified time limit - that the measured gas concentration is < 2/3 of the stored value
in step 8.
11. The agent delivery is stopped and a gas flow is delivered to flush the system.
12. The PGA pump is stopped and the vaporizer is depressurized.
13. SCO valve is closed.
14. If the test is passed, time and date for the test will be stored in the Vaporizer.
6.2.17 Technical alarms test

The Monitoring subsystem checks if technical alarms are active. The Alarm state test is run as the last test
case to be able to catch technical alarms activated during the System checkout.
6.3 Technical error codes and messages

6.3.1 General
Two classes of alarms exist:
 Clinical alarms intended to notify the staff of changes in patient condition. These alarms are described
 Technical alarms related to the technical status of the system. All technical alarms are displayed using
the prefix “TE” along with a reference number linked to the specific problem, e.g., “TE 12: Ventilation
control error”. The Technical error code interpretation is available only for personnel trained and
authorized by Getinge.
Alarms are divided into groups of priority:
 High priority alarm (black text on red background, flashing)
 Medium priority alarm (black text on yellow background, flashing)
 Low priority alarm (black text on blue background).
6.3.2 Initial troubleshooting

In case of Technical alarms, always start troubleshooting with a System checkout:
 Switch off the system. This will disable active Technical alarms that may interfere with the System
checkout.
 Start up the system and run a full System checkout. The System checkout can correct some errors and
thus remove the cause of the Technical alarm.
6.3.3 Troubleshooting vaporizer and anesthetic agent delivery

If the System checkout indicates a fault condition in a vaporizer or in the anesthetic agent delivery, always
start with an initial troubleshooting to isolate the error cause as follows:
 Check that the vaporizer contains anesthesia agent (is not empty).
 Switch vaporizer slot. Remove the vaporizer from the used slot and connect it to the other slot. Repeat
the test:
o If the fault condition remains, the error is related to the vaporizer or the fresh gas sampling.
o If the fault condition does not recur, the error is related to the original slot.
 Switch vaporizer. If another vaporizer is available, connect this vaporizer:
o If the fault condition remains, the error is related to the fresh gas sampling.
o If the fault condition does not recur, the error is related to the original vaporizer.
 If possible, test the vaporizer(s) in another system.
6.4 PC board LED indicators

This section describes the green and red LED indicators on some of the PC boards that are used to indicate
activities and errors, see diagrams below.
Uses PC 2057
Uses PC 1907
6.4.1 PC 2057 valve drivers board
The LEDs on PC 2057 valve drivers board, as described here, indicates that a control signal to the
concerned valve is enabled.
LED Led indication
D1 VAP 2 selection pilot valve EMV5
D2 VAP 2 pressure valve EMV11
D3 VAP 2 scavenging valve EMV12
D4 VAP bypass pilot valve EMV4
D5 VAP 1 selection pilot valve EMV6 (not used)
D6 SCO pilot valve EMV3
D7 VAP 1 scavenging valve EMV10 (not used)
D8 VAP 1 pressure valve EMV9 (not used)
D17 AFGO valve EMV18
D24 Manual vent. pilot valve EMV2
6.4.2 PC 1907 valve drivers board
LED# Valve LED# Valve
D35 VAP 1 Lock pilot valve EMV7 D42 VAP bypass pilot valve EMV4
D36 VAP 1 selection pilot valve EMV6 D43 VAP 2 pressure valve EMV11
D37 VAP 1 scavenging valve EMV10 D44 SCO pilot valve EMV3
D38 VAP 1 pressure valve EMV9 D45 Manual vent. pilot valve EMV2
D39 CGA inlet valve EMV14 (not used) D46 AFGO valve EMV18
D40 VAP 2 selection pilot valve EMV5 D47 VAP 2 scavenging valve EMV12
D41 VAP 2 lock pilot valve EMV8 D48 CGA outlet valve EMV16 (not used)
6.4.3 PC 1984/PC 1919 expiratory channel board
Uses PC 1984
Uses PC 1919
LED#
PC 1919 PC 1984 LED indication
D38 – Heating foil on Expiratory flow transducer in operation (power supply monitored).
D1 – Communication with temperature sensor or E2Prom on PC 1917 expiratory channel

cassette board (inside Patient cassette) established.
D2 Communication with temperature sensor or E2Prom on PC 1917 expiratory channel

cassette board (inside Patient cassette) established but error(s) are reported.
Possible causes: poor contact, broken temperature sensor or checksum error.
D2 Processor reset.
D3 D3 Normal operation.
D4 D4 Startup process.
6.4.4 PC 2060/PC 1920 control board
Uses PC 2060
Uses PC 1920
LED # LED indication
D1 WD = Watchdog triggered. PC board in reset state.
D2 CHKS = LED not used.
D3 +1.5 = +1.5 V power available.
D6 +5V = +5 V power available.
D7 L_1G = Flashing in sequence (back and forth) with D8, D9 and D10 indicates checksum (SW or
HW) error.
D8 L_1R = Flashing in sequence with D10 indicates memory (RAM) error.

Flashing in sequence (back and forth) with D7, D9 and D10 indicates checksum (SW or HW)
error.
D9 L_2G = Flashing in sequence (back and forth) with D7, D8 and D10 indicates checksum (SW or
HW) error.
D10 L_2R = Flashing in sequence with D8 indicates memory (RAM) error.

Flashing in sequence (back and forth) with D7, D8 and D9 indicates checksum (SW or HW)
error.
6.4.5 PC 2061/PC 1921 monitoring board
Uses PC 2061
Uses PC 1921
LED#
– D78 DISV = Disable valves. Will close gas modules and open Fresh gas safety valve and
APL/PEEP valve.
D1 D1 DISV = Disable valves. Will close gas modules and open Fresh gas safety valve and
APL/PEEP valve.
D2 D2 WD = Watchdog triggered. PC board in reset state.
D3 D3 CHKS = LED not used.
D4 D4 +1.5 = +1.5 V power available.
D7 D7 +5V = +5 V power available.
D8 D8 L_1G = Flashing in sequence (back and forth) with D8, D9 and D10 indicates
checksum (SW or HW) error.
D9 D9 L_1R = Flashing in sequence with D10 indicates memory (RAM) error. Flashing in
sequence (back and forth) with D7, D9 and D10 indicates checksum (SW or HW)
error.
D10 D10 L_2G = Flashing in sequence (back and forth) with D7, D8 and D10 indicates
checksum (SW or HW) error.
LED#
D11 – L_2R = Flashing in sequence with D8 indicates memory (RAM) error. Flashing in
sequence (back and forth) with D7, D8 and D9 indicates checksum (SW or HW)
error.
6.4.6 PC 1922 panel board

LED indicators on PC 1922 panel board are not visible (covered by the connector panel) and cannot be used
during troubleshooting.
6.4.7 PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board
Uses PC 2063
Uses PC 1923
LED #
LED indication
PC 2063 PC 1923
D1 D1 WD RESET = Watchdog triggered. PC board in reset state.
D2 D2 CPU EXEC = Solid green indicates normal CPU operation. Flashing green indicates
that PC board calibration is required (not possible during field service).
D97 – +5V_START-UP
D3 D3 +3.3V = +3.3 V power available.
D4 D4 +3.3V_INT = +3.3 V internal power available.
LED #
LED indication
PC 2063 PC 1923
D7 D7 –12V = –12 V power available.
D8 D8 +12V_M_VALVES = +12 V power for valves controlled by PC 2057/PC 1907 valve

drivers board available.
D9 D9 +24V_AN_MON = +24 V power for Patient gas analyzer available.
– D10 +24V_AN_CON = +24 V power for Control gas analyzer available.
D11 D11 +24V_INSP_1_2 = +24 V power for Gas modules 1 and 2 (upper modules) available.
D12 D12 +24V_INSP_3_4 = +24 V power for Gas modules 3 and 4 (lower modules) available.
+12V_UNREG:
D13 D13 _CORE = +12V_UNREG for general system functions available.
D14 D14 _EXP_S_VALVES = +12V_UNREG for Fresh gas safety valve and APL/PEEP valve
available.
D15 D15 _VAP1 = +12V_UNREG for Vaporizer 1 available.
D16 D16 _VAP2 = +12V_UNREG for Vaporizer 2 available.
D17 D17 _DISPLAY = +12V_UNREG for Control Panel available.
D18 D18 _EXPANSION = +12V_UNREG for LED Lamp and Cylinder pressure (functions
controlled by PC 1903 external connectors board) available.
6.5 Other errors and remedies

6.5.1 System
This section describes possible causes and recommended actions in case of other technical errors in the
System.
Symptoms of errors Possible causes Remedy
The system will not start up. The The Emergency ventilation switch 1. Turn off the switch.
ON/OFF switch is not lit. is active. 2. Replace the switch in case of
malfunction.
No connection of battery voltage to 1. Check power cable

PC 2063/PC 1923 power control connections at the battery and
board. at PC 1903 external
connectors board.
2. Check fuses F1 and F2 on
PC 1903 external connectors
board. If fuse(s) are blown, the
root cause must be found.
Probable causes are
 Short circuit of the positive
battery pole to
chassis/ground. Check
battery position in the
 Malfunction on PC
2063/PC 1923 power
control board. Check
PC 2063/PC 1923 power
control board for
component damages.
When the root cause is
remedied, replace PC 1903
external connectors board.
Battery is deeply drained Battery 1. Check battery.

pole voltage <8 V. 2. Replace battery if battery pole
voltage is <11 V.
Malfunction in Fan. Check/replace Fan.

Note: PC 2063/PC 1923 power The check can be done by
control board must detect that the manually rotate the fan, e.g., by
fan starts rotating. Otherwise, using a pen.
PC 2063/PC 1923 power control
board will not power up the
system.
Malfunction in PC 2063/PC 1923 Check/replace PC 2063/PC 1923

power control board. power control board.
The system is ON, but not Malfunction in the Power button. Check/replace the Power button.
possible to switch OFF.
Poor cable connections. 1. Check Power button
connection to PC 1928 power
on/off board.
2. Check PC 1928 power on/off
board cable connector to P29
on PC 1900 main backplane
board.
The system will only run on power The AC/DC converter will not 1. Check cables and cable
backup battery. supply power to PC 2063/PC 1923 connectors between AC/DC
power control board. converter and PC 2063/
PC 1923 power control board.
2. Check/replace the AC/DC
converter.
The system will not run on power The power backup battery will not 1. Check power backup battery
backup battery. supply power to PC 2063/PC 1923 cables and cable connectors.
power control board. 2. Check power backup battery.
3. Check fuses F1 and F2 on
PC 1903 external connectors
board. If fuse(s) are blown, the
root cause must be found.
Probable causes are
 Short circuit of the positive
battery pole to
chassis/ground. Check
battery position in the
 Malfunction on PC
2063/PC 1923 power
control board. Check PC
2063/PC 1923 power
control board for
component damages.
When the root cause is
remedied, replace PC 1903
external connectors board.
4. Replace PC 2063/PC 1923
power control board.
During a Leakage check the Drive gas supply is added into the Check/replace the O2 flush valve.
message: Leakage into the system patient circuit.
appears
Fresh gas or reflector gas is added Check all four gas modules. Check
to patient circuit. that nozzle units are properly
inserted and not damaged.
The Mechanical APL knob does Poor adjustment of the Mechanical Adjust regulator according to
not respond with a distinct feeling APL pressure regulator REG5. instructions in section 5, Service
or gives an incorrect pressure procedures on page 221.
level.
Defective drive gas supply tube to Check tubing.
emergency ventilation section.
The set APL value will not When Emergency ventilation is Set Mechanical APL to minimum.
correspond to the value displayed switched Off, the Mechanical APL
on the Control panel. must be set to minimum. If the
Mechanical APL is set to a higher
pressure, the Emergency APL
actuator may not be depressurized
through the Excess pressure vent
in the regulator. This may affect
the normal APL function.
The set APL value will not APL knob is not calibrated. Perform an APL knob calibration
correspond to the value displayed Calibration lost e.g., during according to instructions in section
on the Control panel. System software installation. 5, Service procedures on
page 221.
The APL potentiometer defective. Check/replace the APL

potentiometer.
PC 2057/PC 1907 valve drivers Check/replace PC 2057/PC 1907

board defective. valve drivers board.
6.5.2 Suction unit

This section describes possible causes and recommended actions in case of other technical errors in the
Suction unit.
No or low vacuum Suction On/Off switch is closed Switch on the suction unit.
Hydrophobic bacterial/viral filter is Connect a hydrophobic

missing. bacterial/viral filter to the suction
unit.
Suction unit is leaking. 1. Check all hose/tubing

connections for leakage
2. Check that fluid jar tubing’s
are properly connected to
correct inlets
3. Check that fluid jar is airtight
4. Suction unit service
Clogged/contaminated suction Replace the suction unit

filter hydrophobic bacterial/viral filter.
Intermediate tube between suction Shorten the intermediate tube to

filter and suction jar too long. max. 100 cm length.
Intermediate tube between suction Replace the tube (vacuum proof

filter and suction jar collapsed tube up to 95kPa, fulfills ISO
10079-3:2014, Medical suction
equipment).
The inner diameter of the tubing,
connecting the fluid jar with the
suction unit, shall be at least
6 mm.
AIR supply and/or hoses 1. Check that the AIR supply is

(venture suction) >3000 hPa (3.0 bar).
2. Check/replace the AIR hose
that supplies the suction unit.
Insufficient vacuum supply Check that vacuum level is

according to specification.
Pressure level set too low. Adjust the pressure level with the
regulating valve.
Septic fluid jar volume. Ensure that the septic fluid jar
used with the unit must have a
usable volume of at least 500 ml.
Full septic fluid jar, overflow 1. Empty/replace septic fluid jar,

protection system closed. clean or replace overflow
protection system.
2. Check/replace suction filter.
Difficult to switch on the suction The suction unit module is 1. Loosen the screws that fasten
unit. tightened too hard to the system. the suction unit.
2. Suction unit service
Too high pressure. Pressure level set too high. Adjust the pressure level with
regulating valve.
6.5.3 Emergency ventilation section

No flow to the manual Tubing’s disconnected Check/replace patient tubing’s
ventilation bag when the
Low pressure to the 1. Check REG4
emergency ventilation is
emergency ventilation 2. Check that O2 flush gives sufficient flow
active.
section. (see SCO test result).
O2 flush also uses REG4.
Emergency O2 flowmeter 1. Check Emergency Ventilation Switch.
shows no flow 2. Check REG4.
3. Check that tubing’s at the front door
hinge is not pinched.
Emergency APL pressure Pressure too high
is not possible to adjust
Check that the bleed-flow device to the

mushroom valve is not blocked.
Check the wire functionality.
Pressure too low
Mushroom valve leaking.
1. Check the wire functionality.

2. Check bleed-flow device in the
emergency valve section.
3. Check REG4.
Chapter 7 – Preventive maintenance
7 Preventive maintenance
7.1 General
A cleaning of the system shall be performed before carrying out Preventive maintenance. Only personnel
trained and authorized by Getinge are permitted to perform the cleaning. Instruct the system owner to
perform this cleaning and include extra patient cassettes, extra volume reflectors any other accessories and
auxiliary equipment used for the system. Refer to the User’s Manual – Cleaning and Maintenance.
In some parts of the Preventive maintenance, as described in this section, access to Service & Settings is
required.
Optional equipment not covered by this Service Manual, may also demand maintenance actions. Refer to
the documentation for the optional equipment.
The system must not be serviced or maintained while in use with a patient, with the exception to fill a
vaporizer.
Trained and authorized personnel. The system must be serviced at regular intervals by
personnel trained and authorized by Getinge. It is recommended that service and maintenance
is done as a part of a service contract. Any maintenance or service must be noted in a log book.
7.2 Preventive maintenance intervals

Preventive maintenance of the system must be performed once every year, or every 5000 hours of
operation, whichever comes first.
The calculated hours before Preventive maintenance include only operating hours, standby hours are
excluded.
There are two preventive maintenance procedures
7.2.1 Preventive maintenance (PM)

Interval: Every 12 months.
 Check the system, according to Table 7-1 in section 7.3
 Replace defective or damaged parts.
7.2.2 Preventive maintenance + (PM+)

Interval: Every 24 months.
 Check the system, according to section 7.3, Preventive maintenance actions (PM and PM+) on page
336.
 Clean the EVAC system.
 Replace defective or damaged parts.
 Replace all parts in the
o Flow family maintenance kit 24 months.
o Flow family maintenance kit cassette 24 months.
o Flow family maintenance kit backup gas.
7.2.3 Additional maintenance actions

 Replace power backup battery: Every four or three years depending on model, see section 4.19.3,
Batteries, page 209.
 Replace memory backup batteries: Every four years
The memory backup batteries are present on the following boards:

Figure 7-1: Battery replacement intervals.
7.3 Preventive maintenance actions (PM and PM+)

Table 7-1: Actions to be performed during the different preventive maintenance procedures.
PM PM+
Preparation
General inspection and visual check X X
Initial functional check X X
Parts to be cleaned
EVAC system16 - X
Parts to be replaced
Flow family maintenance kit 24 months - X
Flow family maintenance kit cassette 24 months - X
Flow family maintenance kit backup gas - X
Parts to be checked
Cables – external X X
Expiratory outlet X X
Cables – internal - X
Tubing and leakage – internal - X
Drive gas supply section - X
Fan X X
16
Only for units without EVAC filter.
Control panel X X
Barometric pressure X X
Gas analyzer section X X
AFGO leakage (option) X X
Fresh gas filter X X
Vaporizer section17 X X
Carrier X X
Backup gas (option) X X
Auxiliary O2 and suction module X X
Safety inspection
Electrical safety test and check of labels and fuses X X
Completing actions
Final functional check X X

 System checkout
 Check of emergency ventilation
Table 7-2: Additional maintenance actions relating to power and memory backup batteries.
Additional maintenance actions 3 years 4 years
Power backup battery replacement X18 X18
Memory backup battery replacement X
17
Only systems with Locking device, see section 3.9.7, Vaporizer 1 and 2 locking device, on page 63.
18
Depending on model, see section 4.19.3, Batteries, on page 209.
7.4 Required equipment

 Connector kit for pressure tester P/N 6685355.
Figure 7-2: Connector kit for pressure tester, P/N 6685355.
 Pressure gauge, local purchase. Refer to section 5.8,Pressure regulators, on page 287.
 Calibration equipment. Refer to section 5.3.5, Calibration on page 231.
 O2 compatible grease, P/N 9573700. Lubricants should normally not be used when servicing the unit. If
lubricants must be used, use only small amounts of the O2 compatible grease.
 Gas evacuation system.
 Barometer, or information about the actual barometric pressure.
 Access to Service & Settings (S&S).
 If the silicone gaskets are difficult to mount, lubricate the gaskets with a small amount of distilled water.
7.5 Accessories, spare parts and maintenance kits

Only original parts from the manufacturer must be used.
7.5.1 Flow family maintenance kit 24 months

 Filters for the gas modules
 Nozzle units for the gas modules
 O-rings for gas module docking
 Inspiratory sample filter holder
 Expiratory sample filter holder
 Sampling line Nafion
 Dust filter for the fan
 Evac filter
 Rotary encoder including knob
 Absorber valve
7.5.2 Flow family maintenance kit cassette 24 months

Each patient cassette requires one maintenance kit.
In the Flow family maintenance kit 24 months one Flow family maintenance kit cassette is included.
 Absorber valve
7.6 Preventive maintenance

The Preventive maintenance procedure consists of six steps:
1. Preparation
2. Parts to be cleaned (PM+ only)
3. Parts to be replaced (PM+ only)
4. Parts to be checked
5. Safety inspection
6. Completing the Preventive maintenance
All steps during Preventive Maintenance should be documented.
Disassembling and assembling of the unit is required during the Preventive Maintenance. If not stated
otherwise, refer to section 4, Disassembling and assembling starting on page 147.
7.6.1 Preparation
1. Make a general inspection/visual check for external defects or damages on the system.
2. Replace defective or damaged parts. The check shall also cover extra patient cassettes, extra volume
reflectors and other optional equipment used for the system.
3. Make sure that gas supply hoses, connectors and color codings are correct.
4. Check and note serial number, system software version and operating time. Refer to Service & Settings.
5. Check that a User’s Manual corresponding to the installed System version is available. Also check that
operating manuals for optional equipment connected to the system are available.
6. Check if there are any unexpected Technical alarms in the logs. A Service key with access to Service &
Settings is required.
7. Perform a complete System checkout according to instructions in the User’s Manual.
8. After completed System checkout, download all logs.
9. Perform a manual check of emergency ventilation system according to instructions in the User’s Manual.
11. Disconnect the mains power cable.
12. Disconnect the gas supplies (wall and/or cylinder).
13. Disconnect the following items:
 patient tubing
 gas sampling tube
 water trap
 manual breathing bag
 bacteria filter (-s) from the patient cassette, if any.
WARNING! With mains power supply connected to the unit, there are energized electrical
components inside the equipment. All personnel must exercise extreme caution when in the
vicinity of this equipment if maintenance, fault tracing or adjustments are performed with mains
power supply connected and with the covers/doors opened or removed.
CAUTION: The anesthetic gas and the calibration gas contain substances that may be
detrimental to your health. During use of such gases, assure that the system is connected to an
effective gas evacuation system, e.g., the hospital’s AGSS system.
7.6.2 Parts to be cleaned (PM+)
7.6.2.1 EVAC system (only systems without EVAC filter)
Figure 7-3: Three-dimensional view of the EVAC system.

Ref.no Description
1 EVAC reservoir
2 EVAC indicator
3 Hytrel tubing
4 EVAC filter and holder

1. Clean the parts. Wash by hand. Do not use dishwasher or autoclave.
2. Make sure that the parts are clean and emptied from fluids.
3. Restore the EVAC system properly. It is however recommended to restore the EVAC system later in the
maintenance procedure, when all parts in the PM+ kit are replaced.
CAUTION: Ensure that the EVAC system is correctly connected after any service intervention.
Running the system with a poor connection may result in anesthetic agent being emitted into the
operation environment. Leakages in the EVAC system will not be detected by the System
checkout.
7.6.3 Parts to be replaced (PM+) – overview
Figure 7-4: Parts to be replaced during PM+ – front view
Figure 7-5: Parts to be replaced during PM+ – rear view
7.6.4 Parts to be replaced (PM+) – details
7.6.4.1 Flow family maintenance kit 24 months
Gas module filter

Replace the filter in all gas modules.
Refer to section 4.15.3, Filter – replacement, page
174, for instructions.
Nozzle unit
Replace the nozzle unit on all gas modules.
Refer to section 4.15.4, Nozzle unit – replacement,
on page 175, for instructions.
Optional, perform a leakage test.
O-rings in the gas module docking
Remove and replace the 4 O-rings on the gas

module docking.
Refer to section 4.15.5, O-rings on gas module
docking – replacement on page 176 for instructions.
Only for systems with Gas distribution section of Version A (S/N 4000 and below):
 Check the position of the Reflector gas selector, see section 4.15.4, step 5, page 175.
Patient cassette docking

Remove and replace the inspiratory sample filter
holder and the expiratory sample filter holder.
Version A and B:
 Refer to section 4.10.1, Inspiratory sample filter
holder – removal on page 157 for instructions.
 Refer to section 4.10.2, Expiratory sample filter
holder – removal on page 158 for instructions.
Version B
Version A
Sampling line Nafion

Remove and replace sampling line Nafion.
Refer to section Refer to section 4.14, Sampling
line Nafion – replacement on page 170 for
instructions.
Fan filter
Remove and replace the fan filter.
Refer to section 4.8, Fan filter – on page 156 for
instructions.
EVAC filter
Remove and replace the EVAC filter.
Refer to section 4.9.1, Filter – replacement, page
156 for instructions.
Rotary encoder including knob

Remove and replace the rotary encoder including
knob.
Refer to section 4.7.3 - Rotary encoder –
replacement, page 155 for instruction
7.6.4.2 Flow family maintenance kit cassette 24 months

When performing PM+, note that:
 PM parts for one cassette is included in the Flow family maintenance kit 24 months.
 For each extra cassette one Flow family maintenance kit cassette 24 months is required.
The following parts (included in one kit) must be replaced:
APL/PEEP valve membrane

Remove and replace the APL/PEEP valve
membranes (ref. no. 2).
Refer to section 4.11.4, APL/PEEP valve
membrane – removal, on page 161, and section
4.11.5, APL/PEEP valve membrane – installation,
page 161, for instructions.
Absorber valves
Remove and replace the absorber valves (ref. no.
1).
Refer to section 4.11.2, Absorber valves – removal
on page 160 and section 4.11.3, Absorber valves –
installation on page 160 for instructions.
7.6.4.3 Flow family maintenance kit backup gas

than 3000 kPa.
Necessary tools:
4 mm hex key
1. Pull off the gasket.
2. Insert the hex key to remove the filter holder.
3. Pull out the filter holder and filter.
4. Replace the filter.
5. Mount the filter holder.
6. Mount the new gasket.
Note: The illustration shows the PISS (pin index
safety system) cylinder connection standard.
Other standards include DIN, which also has a filter
that shall be replaced.
7.6.5 Parts to be checked
7.6.5.1 System status, scenario 1

Prerequisite tasks:
 Disconnect gas supply.
 Switch off the Power
The mains power cable must be secured with a
cable clamp (ref. no.1)
Check the following:

1. Cables – external: Check that cables and connections are not damaged or loose.
o Mains power cable (also check cable clamp, see figure above).
o Control panel cable
o For systems with an optional patient monitor or other connected devices: check cables and
connectors (power and communication)
o For systems with an optional Backup gas trolley, Backup gas rack or Backup gas holder: check the
respective cable and connector (connected to PC 1903).
2. Expiratory outlet
o Expiratory outlet one-way valve OV12
o Silicone seal between the expiratory outlet on the patient cassette and the EVAC system.
3. Cables – internal (PM+). Check cables and connections to the following:
o AC/DC converter
o Power backup battery
o Isolation transformer.

Prerequisite tasks:
 Connect the gas supply.

 Switch off the power.
4. Tubing and leakage (PM+).
o Check for leakage at the N2O gas inlet.
o Check that the internal tubes and hoses are in good condition.
o Check that internal tubes and hoses are properly connected.
o Check for damage on tubing and connectors that can cause leakage in gas conveying parts that are
not covered by the System checkout.
5. Drive gas supply section (PM+)
o Check pressure regulators REG1- REG4 (S/N > 20 000: REG1 and REG3 only)

Prerequisite tasks:
 Connect the mains power cable.
 Connect the gas supply.
 Set the System in Standby.
6. Fan
o Check that the cooling air flow is directed into the unit. The fan rotation is monitored and the system
will not start if the fan works incorrectly.
7. Control panel
o Check screen readability.
o Check screen transparency.
o Check screen surface.
o Check screen brightness. Go to Service & Settings and check the backlight operating time.
- Version A (with lamps): Estimated lifetime (with acceptable brightness level) for the lamps is
30000 hours.
- Version B and C (with LEDs): It is estimated that the LED backlight will maintain an acceptable
brightness level during the unit’s lifetime.
The time meter must be reset after backlight replacement. The replacement date is set in
Service & Settings > Service report > Replaced backlight.
o Check if any pixels on the screen are defective. A few defective pixels may be accepted but if there
are clusters of defective pixels on a small area the readability may be affected.
o Check that the software responds to the following actions:
- Touch screen check: Tap on different functions on the screen.
- Rotary knob check: Turn the knob and check that there is no sluggishness or that the knob does
not stay in pressed position. Replace if needed.
- Membrane check: Push all buttons. Note that some of the buttons are active only when the
system is in running mode.
8. Barometric pressure.
 Check that the barometric pressure value in

Service & Settings > Calibration > Barometer >
Current barometer pressure corresponds to
the actual barometric pressure value at the
local site.
 The current pressure should not differ more
than ±5% from the actual barometric pressure.
 If required, enter a new pressure value. The
barometer calibration is described in the
section Barometer calibration procedure on
page 233.
9. Gas analyzer section
Check and - if required - calibrate the following:

 Patient gas analyzer AION.
 Patient O2 sensor.
Check and calibration of Gas analyzer and O2
sensor are described in section 5.3.5.3, Gas
analyzer on page 233.
Note: A System Checkout is required for the gas
analyzer check/calibration.
Perform the Sampling line pressure drop test.

The sampling line pressure drop test is described
in section 5.4, Sampling line pressure drop test on
page 246.
10. AFGO leakage
Check AFGO leakage in Service & Settings:

 Plug the AFGO outlet with a 14-18-20 mm
rubber plug, included in the Leakage detector
tool kit.
 Start the AFGO leakage check in Service &
Settings > Tests > Leakage check > AFGO
leakage.
 After the performed check, remove the rubber
plug from the AFGO outlet.
11. Fresh gas filter
Check the service log Test results for the System checkout (performed during Gas analyzer
check/calibration), see work step 9, Gas analyzer section. The value can be found in the Flow transducer
test.
 A measured Fresh Gas Pressure at 60 l/min that exceeds 10 cm H2O indicates a clogged Fresh gas
filter. The filter should be replaced. In the log example below the measured value is 7.86 cm H2O.
2017-05-26 14:54:48 FIN Fresh gas filter test Result Passed
2017-05-26 14:54:48 MEA Measured O2 flow 0.99 l/s]
2017-05-26 14:54:48 MEA Fresh Gas Filter pressure drop at 60 l/min 1.44 cmH2O
2017-05-26 14:54:48 MEA Fresh Gas Pressure at 60 l/min 7.86 [N/A, 11.00] cmH2O
2017-05-26 14:54:46 MEA Measured O2 flow 1.49 l/s
12. Man Vent Valve diaphragm

 Check the diaphragm of the Man Vent Valve by performing the leakage test in section 5.7.6, Test case 3:
Patient cassette on page 261.
7.6.5.4 System status, scenario 4 (software version 4.5.2 or lower only)

Prerequisite tasks:
 Connect the Gas supply.
 Set the System in ventilation mode.
13. Vaporizer locking device
 Check the function of the Vaporizer locking device (see section 3.9.7, Vaporizer 1 and 2 locking device,
page 62):
o Activate the vaporizer and check that the release handle is locked.
o Check both vaporizer slots.
o Re-assemble the system (covers, doors and optional equipment that has been removed).

Prerequisite tasks:
 Connect the Gas supply.
 Switch off the power.
14. Emergency ventilation section
 Refer to section Manual check of Emergency Ventilation System in the User’s Manual.
15. Carrier:
WARNING! Make sure that all mounted arms are properly secured, including friction joints for
adjustment of swivel, tilt and height. Where applicable all mounting screws must be tightened
with the correct torque, see section 5.11, Adjustment of friction joints, for details.
o Check the control panel arm friction. Adjust if required.

o Check the patient monitor mounting friction (option).
o Check that the wheels and wheel brake work correctly:
- Put four pieces of plastic film on the floor.
- Roll the System onto the four pieces of film.
- Push down the brake pedal to lock the wheels, one at the time.
- Pull each piece of film to see if the wheel moves, in which case the central brake is not working
properly.
o Check that the drawers work correctly.
o Check that the lift (C30 only) works properly.
o Check that any optional equipment is correctly mounted onto the carrier. Check friction joints and
adjust if required.
16. Vaporizer:
For each Vaporizer to be used on the system:
 Check that the O-ring (ref. no.1) is mounted in
the Docking valve and that the O-ring is in good
condition.
17. Backup gas:

Applicable only for systems with Backup gas trolley, Backup gas rack or Backup gas holder option installed:
o Check the gas hoses between the backup gas unit and the gas connections on the system. The gas
hose connections must be tightened firmly with a wrench. It must not be possible to disconnect the
gas hoses by hand (without wrench).
o Check that the cable and connector (cable connected to the backup gas unit) is not damaged or
loose. Cable/connector at PC 1903 is already checked in work step 1, section 7.6.5.1, Check cables.
o Check that the gas cylinder straps are not damaged and that they work properly.
o Make sure the gas cylinders are properly secured using the straps.
18. Auxiliary O2 and suction module
Applicable only for systems with Auxiliary O2 and Suction module option installed:
o Make a general inspection/visual check of the Auxiliary O2 and Suction module for external defects
or damages.
o Check that gas supply hoses between the Auxiliary O2 and Suction module and the Gas distribution
section are correct.
o Check seat and seal for the bacterial and hydrophobic filter. Make sure that installation of the filter
works properly.
o Check that the Auxiliary O2 and Suction module work properly. Test instructions for the Flowmeter
unit and the Suction unit are included in the User's Manual.
o Check that the knobs and switches work properly and are not loose.
7.6.6 Safety inspection

19. Check that country specific warning labels are present.
20. Check that accessible fuses have correct values.
21. Perform an electrical safety test. Using an Electrical safety tester is recommended.
The electrical safety test is a standard procedure according to IEC 60601-1 or IEC 62353:2014 (or
corresponding national standards). Allowable values and test methods are defined in the standards.
The following tests are recommended to be performed (IEC 62353 terminology in brackets):
 A:Protective earthing (Protective earth resistance).
 B:Touch current (Equipment leakage current – direct method).
 D: Insulation (Insulation resistance) – Measured between mains and protective earth.
Within these standards, the system base unit and connectors are classified and shall be tested as follows:
 System base unit: Class 1, Type B. Test A, B, D.
7.6.7 Completing the Preventive maintenance

22. Perform a System checkout. Refer to the User’s Manual for instructions on how to do this.
23. Perform a manual check of emergency ventilation. Refer to the User’s Manual for instructions on how to
do this.
24. Connect extra equipment such as extra patient cassettes, volume reflectors, and vaporizer. Perform a
System checkout.
25. Create and save a Service report in Service & Settings. Report all performed actions:
o Performed preventive maintenance. Resets the preventive maintenance time counter on the Status
menu.
o Replaced expiratory membrane. Resets the remaining capacity meter for the APL/PEEP valve
membrane in the Status menu. If the unit is equipped with several patient cassettes, the remaining
capacity meter must be reset for each cassette. Enter the cassette S/N in the text field for each
cassette in Service report > Replaced expiratory membrane.
o Replaced backlight. Resets the backlight operating time counter on the Status menu.
o Replaced internal battery. Updates the replaced date for power backup battery on the Status menu.
o Replaced memory backup batteries.
26. Save system log files.
27. Make a note in the customer’s log book that Preventive maintenance has been performed.
28. Inform the customer that Preventive maintenance has been performed.
7.6.8 Power backup battery
The power backup battery shall be replaced every three or four years, depending on model.
Refer to section 4.19, Power backup battery – replacement, page 209.
Note: When removing or installing the battery, be careful not to short-circuit the battery.
Note: The power backup battery replacement date must be reset after replacement. The replacement
date is set in Service & Settings > Service report > Replaced internal battery).
7.6.9 Memory backup battery
The memory backup battery shall be replaced

every four years.
Refer to section 4.17.3, Memory backup battery –
replacement on page 184 for instructions.
8 Index
abbreviations APL potentiometer, 53

BM, 83 APL/PEEP
EMV, 31 valve, 33, 74
GMB, 82 valve coil, 33, 97, 98, 100
OV, 31 valve coil, leakage test, 264
PM, 83 valve membrane, installation, 161
PP, 31 valve membrane, removal, 161
PV, 31 APL/PEEP valve, 120
REG, 31 Artema Developer’s Toolkit software, 233
SV, 31 articles of consumption, 20
T, 31 AUTO mode, 48
VI, 31 AUTO ventilation leakage
absorber in Service & Settings, 229
bypass valve, 74 automatic zero calibration, 82
sensor, 89 auxiliary O2
valves, installation, 160 regulator, 138
valves, removal, 160 auxiliary O2 and suction module
Absorber main description, 136
sensor, 44 Auxiliary O2 and suction unit, 25
AC/DC backlight inverter, 110
converter, 112 backup gas rack (option)
AC/DC converter, 128 main description, 143
Additional fresh gas outlet backup gas supply
connector, 132 functional check, 301
additional fresh gas outlet valve PV7, 33 barometer, 232
AFGO calibration procedure, 233, 349
fresh gas supply tube, 130 Barometer
main description, 129 in Service & Settings, 231
pilot valve, 132 base module, 83
pilot valve EMV18, 52 Baxter, 63, 66
schematic view, 130, 131 bleed-flow device, 99, 100
three-dimensional view, 130 BM, 83
valve PV7, 33 boot enable switch, 118
AFGO leakage, 230 Boot enable switch, 119
in Service & Settings, 229 Calibration
AFGO pilot valve EMV18, 32 in Service & Settings, 225, 231
Agent usage CAN bus, 28
in Service & Settings, 246 protocol, 28
AGSS CEE 7/4 (Type F) power outlets, 133
flow indicator, 106, 107 CGA
outlet, 38 sampling gas return point, 132
AION Platinum gas analyzer, removal, 187 CO2 absorber
Alarms leakage test, 259
in Service & Settings, 226 main description, 87
amplifier, 84 schematic view, 87
anesthesia gas versions of, 89
scavenging system, 105 collar nut, installation, 151
anesthetic agent, 82 conductive wire, 84
level, 67 Configurations
Anesthetic Gas Scavenging System, 38 in Service & Settings, 226
outlet, 38 connectors
APL knob, 232 control panel, 125
in Service & Settings, 231 drive gas to PP4, 104
Chapter 8 – Index
EVAC, 104 three-dimensional view, 98, 101

LAN, 126, 144 emergency ventilation switch, 98, 99
manual breathing bag, 96 Emergency ventilation switch, 113
network, 126 EMV10 Vaporizer scavenging valve, 61
RS-232 connector, 125, 127, 144 EMV11 vaporizer pressure valve, 32, 46, 52
to EVAC, 71 EMV11 Vaporizer pressure valve, 61
to expiratory outlet on cassette, 71 EMV12 vaporizer scavenging valve, 32, 38, 46, 52
USB, 126, 144 EMV12 vaporizer scavenging valve, 52
VGA, 125 EMV18 AFGO pilot valve, 32, 46, 52
construction materials EMV2 manual ventilation pilot valve, 32, 51
electronics, 19 EMV3 system checkout pilot valve, 32, 46, 51
metals, 19 EMV4 vaporizer bypass pilot valve, 32, 46, 51
polymeric material, 19 EMV5 vaporizer selection pilot valve, 32, 46, 51
Control EMV9 vaporizer pressure valve, 46, 61
in Service & Settings, 228 environmental declaration, 17
control panel Equipotential terminal, 116
connector, 125 error codes, 303, 320
disassembly, 153 EVAC
functional view, 108 connector, 104
main description, 107 filter holder, removal, 157
removal, 153 filter, removal, 156
three-dimensional view, 108 flow restrictor, 107
Control panel, 126 main description, 105
Control Panel position on system, 25
serial number, 107 reservoir, 106
control subsystem, 29 schematic view, 105
default positions of the pneumatic valves, 32 three-dimensional view, 106
Desflurane, 63, 66, 77, 82 evacuation
display/touch screen, 108, 109 from drive gas safety valve, 106
docking pipe, 61 from vaporizer scavenging valve, 106
docking seal Events
leakage test, 273 in Service & Settings, 226
docking valve OV9, vaporizer, 66 exhaust gas from patient cassette, 106
drain plug, vaporizer, 67 Expiratory
drive gas sample filter holder, 75
connector, 104 expiratory flow meter subsystem, 29
filter, vaporizer, 66 expiratory flow transducer, 74
one-way valve OV7, 40, 43 expiratory gas, 92
safety valve SV3, 41, 43 expiratory outlet one-way valve OV12, 38, 75
supply, 42 installation, 163
drive gas safety valve SV3, 38 removal, 162
Drive gas supply expiratory sample filter holder, 76
section, 39 removal, 158, 344
drive gas supply section extra mains power outlets (option)
position on system, 26 main description, 133
three-dimensional view, 39, 41 fan, 114
EEPROM, 31 fan filter, removal, 156
electronic subsystems, 29 FCI protocol, 30
EMC gasket, vaporizer, 66 filter
emergency APL actuator, 33, 98, 100 drive gas, 66
Emergency APL actuator, 100 in fresh gas module, 57, 58
emergency manual ventilation, 40 in reflector gas module, 94, 95
emergency manual ventilation section flash memory, 31
main description, 97 flow transducer, 58
Emergency manual ventilation section, 25 in fresh gas module, 57
emergency ventilation in reflector gas module, 94, 95
lid, removal, 205 Flowmeter
switch, 97 outlet, 137
emergency ventilation panel regulating valve, 138
three-dimensional view, 99 tube, 137
emergency ventilation section fresh gas
schematic view, 98, 101 pressure, 54
Chapter 8 – Index
fresh gas channel, 71 gas measurement chamber, 82

fresh gas inlet filter gas module
vaporizer, 69 disassembly, 173, 174
fresh gas inlet, vaporizer, 66 docking, 36, 38
fresh gas line filter, replacement, 174, 343
leakage test, 262 key, in fresh gas module, 57
fresh gas line tests key, in reflector gas module, 94
leakage test, 268 removal, 173, 174, 175, 176
fresh gas module gas module docking, 36
air, 36, 55 three-dimensional view, 36
functional view, 57 gas module key, 58
leakage test, 273 in reflector gas module, 95
N2O, 36, 55 gas outlets, 35, 37
O2, 36, 55 three-dimensional view, 35
fresh gas outlet, 66 GMB, 82
fresh gas outlet filter functional view, 82
vaporizer, 69 three-dimensional view, 82
fresh gas pressure transducer graphical user interface, 126
leakage test, 272 hazard notices, 15
fresh gas safety valve, 71 heating foil
fresh gas safety valve SV1, 33, 38 in vaporizer, 69
leakage test, 264 temperature sensor in vaporizer, 69
fresh gas supply IEC power outlets, 133
main description, 54 injection detection, vaporizer, 68
schematic view, 54, 56 injector, vaporizer, 68
three-dimensional view, 55 Inspiratory
functional units, 23 sample filter holder, 75
functional views valve, 73
fresh gas module, 57 inspiratory and expiratory valve
gas measurement bench, 82, 84 assembly, 164
GMB, 84 disassembly, 164
reflector gas module, 94 installation, 164
fuses removal, 164
for isolation transformer, 117 inspiratory sample filter holder, 76
gas analyzer, 233 removal, 157, 344
Gas analyzer inspiratory valve, 73
in Service & Settings, 231, 244 installation
gas analyzer section software options, 255
main description, 77 system software, 248
schematic view, 78 vaporizer software, 248
Gas analyzer section, 24, 78, 79, 80 Installation
gas analyzer tool, 222 in Service & Settings, 226
gas control section Instant O2 supply pressure regulator, 43
main description, 44 internal leakage, 230
schematic view, 45 Internal leakage
gas distribution section in Service & Settings, 229
main description, 33 IR light detector, 82
position on system, 26 Isoflurane, 63, 66, 77, 82
schematic view, 34, 37 Isolation transformer, 136
three-dimensional view, 33 fuse, 116, 134
gas escape pipe knob for Emergency APL, removal, 207
filter, in vaporizer, 67 knob for O2 gas supply and flow meter, removal,
in vaporizer, 67 207
gas inlet Lamp connector, 112
in fresh gas module, 57 LAN connector, 126, 144
in reflector gas module, 94 leakage check, 229
gas inlets, 35 leakage detection, 257
three-dimensional view, 35 LED
gas measurement bench, 82 driver, 111, 115
functional view, 82 lamp, 115
three-dimensional view, 82 LED indicators, 321
Gas measurement bench, 80, 81, 84 level indicator, vaporizer, 67
Chapter 8 – Index
lid, vaporizer, 66 multiple pressure leakage, 230

light source, 84 Multiple pressure leakage
liquid agent filter, vaporizer, 67 in Service & Settings, 229
liquid container, vaporizer, 66 Nafion tube, 85, 86
log files network connector, 126
saving, 226 non-volatile memory, 31
Logs nozzle uni
in Service & Settings, 225 in fresh gas module, 57
loudspeaker, 110 nozzle unit, 58
mains power inlet, 117 in reflector gas module, 94, 95
maintenance kits replacement, 175, 343
maintenance kit backup gas, 346 O2 flush
maintenance kit cassette 24 months, 338 connector, 40
maintenance kits 24 months, 338 leakage test, 270
MAN mode, 48 valve, 53
MAN ventilation leakage O2 sensor, 83
in Service & Settings, 229 three-dimensional view, 83
manual breathing bag o-ring
leakage test, 287 kit for Dryline receptacle, 186
manual ventilation on gas module docking, replacement, 176, 344
bag, 97 OV12 expiratory outlet one-way valve, 38
pilot valve EMV2, 32, 51 OV13 oxygen flow one-way valve, 98
switch, 47 leakage test, 271
valve, 74 OV7 O2 drive gas one-way valve, 40, 43
valve actuator PP3, 96 oxygen
valve actuator, leakage test, 264 paramagnetic, 85
Manual ventilation oxygen flow meter, 97, 98, 99
switch, 50 oxygen flow one-way valve OV13, 100
valve actuator, 95 Panel
valve membrane, 73 in Service & Settings, 228
Manual ventilation bag, 95 panel subsystem, 29
manual ventilation section paramagnetic measurement, 85
main description, 95 paramagnetic technology, 85
schematic views, 96 parts
three-dimensional view, 96 to be checked, 347
manual ventilation valve, 33, 96 to be replaced, 336
manual ventilation valve actuator PP3, 32 patient cassette
adjustment, 294 docking, main description, 75
leakage test, 267 docking, schematic view, 76
Maquet filling, 63, 66 docking, three-dimensional view, 76
mechanical APL, 98 leakage test, 261
knob, 97 lid, leakage test, 266
mechanical APL knob, 99 main description, 72
membrane buttons, 108 removal, 159
membrane pump, 83 schematic view, 72
memory backup battery three-dimensional view, 73
replacement, 184, 353 Patient monitor
memory types, 31 fuse, 133, 134
EEPROM, 31 patient monitor mountings, 144
flash memory, 31 patient O2 sensor
non-volatile memory, 31 calibration, 238
RAM, 31 check, 237
mirror, 84 patient tubing
modes leakage test, 258
AUTO, 48 PC 1781
MAN, 48 (E) expiratory pressure transducer board, 46,
Monitoring 52
in Service & Settings, 228 (F) fresh gas pressure transducer board, 121
monitoring subsystem, 29 (I) inspiratory pressure transducer board, 121
MSync (option) (R) reflector pressure transducer board, 91
main description, 143 pressure transducer board, 17
schematic view, 144
Chapter 8 – Index
PC 1781 (R) reflector pressure transducer board, photo diode, 84

127 pilot valve
PC 1781 Expiratory pressure transducer, 49 pressure regulator (REG3), 40, 42
PC 1900 main backplane board, 17, 91, 127 removal, 177
main description, 127 PM, 83
three-dimensional view, 127, 128 pneumatic module, 81
PC 1903 external connectors board, 17, 113 Pneumatic module, 81
removal, 183 pneumatic valves
PC 1906 gas block board, 17, 36, 38 default positions, 32
replacement, 176 positions of the pneumatic valves, default
PC 1909 vaporizer adapter board, 17 positions, 32
PC 1910 vaporizer controller board, 18, 69 power backup battery, 115
PC 1911 vaporizer connector board, 18, 69 replacement, 353
PC 1912 vaporizer liquid detector board, 18, 69 Power backup battery
PC 1913 vaporizer liquid level detector board, 18, main description, 115
70 power button, removal, 201
PC 1914 vaporizer spray LED board, 18, 70 power connection
PC 1917 expiratory channel cassette board, 17, main description, 116
75 schematic view, 116
PC 1918 expiratory channel connector board, 17, power consumption, 21
76 power on/off
PC 1922 panel board, 18, 28, 126 button, 117, 118
LED indicators, 327 main description, 117
main description, 124 Power outlets
position on system, 27 fuse, 134
schematic view, 125 power section
three-dimensional view, 125 main description, 110
PC 1922 panel board, removal, 182 schematic view, 111
PC 1924 display connection board, 18, 109 three-dimensional view, 112
PC 1924 display connection board., 109 power supply, 144
PC 1925 display CPU board, 18, 110 PP3 manual ventilation valve actuator, 32, 96
PC 1926 vaporizer spray detector board, 18, 70 PP4 system checkout valve actuator, 32
PC 1927 O2 flush board, 118 Pressure drop, 75
PC 1928 power on/off board, 18, 99, 330 pressure supply pilot valve, 51
PC 1931 vaporizer lid sensor board, 18, 70 pressure supply pilot valves
PC 1984 expiratory channel board, 17, 28 EMV18, 52
LED indicators, 324 EMV2, 51
removal, 182 EMV3, 51
schematic view, 120 EMV4, 51
PC 1984/PC 1919 expiratory channel board, 119 EMV5, 51
PC 2054 mains connection board, 117 pressure test points T1 and T2, 41, 43
PC 2057 valve drivers board, 18, 31, 52 pressure transducer
LED indicators, 322, 323 in vaporizer, 67
replacement, 178 tubing installation, 152
PC 2058 power on/off board, 18, 117 preventive maintenance, 335
PC 2060 control board, 16, 18, 28 actions, 335, 336
LED indicators, 325 completing actions, 337
main description, 121 intervals, 335
removal, 182 parts to be checked, 336, 347
schematic view, 122 parts to be replaced, 335, 336
PC 2061 monitoring board, 16, 18, 28 PM scope, 335
LED indicators, 326 PM+ scope, 335
main description, 123 safety inspection, 337
removal, 182 pump module, 83
schematic view, 123 Pump module, 81
PC 2063 power control board, 18, 113 purge flow
LED indicators, 327 forced function, 82
removal, 182 Purge flow valve, 82
PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board, 113 Purge Flow Valve, 81
PC board LED indicators, 321 Purge inlet, 85
Performed preventive maintenance Purge tube, 86
in Service & Settings, 245 PV1 pilot valve, 40
Chapter 8 – Index
PV1 Vaporizer 1 inlet valve, 47 housing, leakage test, 270

PV2 Vaporizer 1 outlet valve, 47 main description, 70
PV3 Vaporizer 2 inlet valve, 47 membrane housing, 71
PV3 vaporizer inlet valve, 32 schematic view, 70
PV4 Vaporizer 2 outlet valve, 47 three-dimensional view, 71
PV4 vaporizer outlet valve, 32 safety valve housing
PV5 vaporizer bypass valve, 32 leakage test, 282, 285
PV6 system checkout valve, 32, 104 sample filters
PV7 additional fresh gas outlet valve, 33 leakage test, 266
leakage test, 271 sample gas
PV7 AFGO valve susceptibility, 85
leakage test, 271 sampling line Nafion, replacement, 170, 345
QUIK FIL®, 63, 66 sampling line pressure drop test, 246
RAM, 31 sampling tubing
reflector installation, 152
adaptor, 91 removal, 152
leakage test, 263, 286 saving log files, 226
schematic view, 90 schematic views
reflector adaptor, 91 AFGO, 130, 131, 133, 134, 135
leakage test, 286 CO2 absorber, 87
reflector gas channel, 71 control panel, 108
reflector gas line drive gas supply section, 39, 41
leakage test, 263, 282 emergency manual ventilation section, 98, 101
reflector gas module, 92 EVAC, 105
docking, leakage test, 284 fresh gas supply, 54, 56
functional view, 94 gas analyzer section, 78
O2, 36 gas control section, 45
reflector gas pressure transducer gas distribution section, 34, 37
leakage test, 283, 285 manual ventilation section, 96
Reflector gas selector, 93 MSync (option), 144
reflector gas supply patient cassette, 72
main description, 91 patient cassette docking, 76
schematic view, 91 PC 1900 main backplane board, 127
three-dimensional view, 92 PC 1922 panel board, 125
Reflector gas supply, 26 PC 1984 expiratory channel board, 120
REG1 vaporizer pressure regulator PC 2060 control board, 122
replacement, 179 PC 2061 monitoring board, 123, 124
REG1 vaporizer pressure regulator, 40, 42 power connection, 116
REG3 pilot valve pressure regulator, 40, 42 power section, 111
replacement, 179 reflector, 90
Replaced backlight reflector gas supply, 91
in Service & Settings, 245 safety valve, 70
Replaced expiratory membrane system checkout valve, 104
in Service & Settings, 245 vaporizer, 64
Replaced internal battery volume reflector, 90
in Service & Settings, 245 screen, 108
Replaced memory backup batteries serial number, 14
in Service & Settings, 245 Service & Settings, 223
Reset internal battery errors Service functions
in Service & Settings, 245 in Service & Settings, 225, 243
rotary encoder, 108, 110 service key, 221
removal, 155 service procedures, 221
RS-232 connector, 125, 127, 144 Service report
pin configuration, 127 in Service & Settings, 225, 226, 245
SAFE-T-FIL®, 66 Settings
SAFE-T-SEAL®, 66 in Service & Settings, 225, 246
safety fill valve Sevoflurane, 63, 66, 77, 82
in vaporizer, 65 Silicone gasket, 73
safety fill valve, vaporizer, 66 software option installation, 255
safety inspection, 337 solenoid, 58
safety valve in fresh gas module, 57
fresh gas, 71 in reflector gas module, 94, 95
Chapter 8 – Index
span calibration fresh gas supply, 55, 60

failure, 242 gas control section, 46
of O2 sensor, 240 gas distribution section, 33
Startup configuration gas inlets, 35
in Service & Settings, 225, 245 gas measurement bench, 82
Status gas module docking, 36
in Service & Settings, 225 gas outlets, 35
subsystems manual ventilation section, 96
control, 29 MSync (option), 144
expiratory flow meter, 29 O2 sensor, 83
monitoring, 29 patient cassette, 73
panel, 29 patient cassette docking, 76
tests, 228 PC 1900 main backplane board, 128
suction unit, 138 PC 1922 panel board, 125
supply pressure transducer, 58 power section, 112
in fresh gas module, 57, 62 reflector gas supply, 92
in reflector gas module, 94, 95 safety valve, 71
suspension assembly, 85 system checkout valve, 104
SV1 fresh gas safety valve, 33, 38 vaporizer, 65
SV2 vaporizer safety valve, 33 water trap, 86
SV3 drive gas safety valve, 38, 40 water trap receptacle, 85
system checkout, 228 Touch screen
troubleshooting, 304 in Service & Settings, 231
System checkout touch screen calibration, 243
actuator, 104 transducers
valve, 105 expiratory flow, 74
system checkout pilot valve EMV3, 32, 51 troubleshooting, 303
system checkout valve system checkout, 304
actuator PP4, 32 tubing between flow indicator and AGSS outlet,
leakage test, 268 106
main description, 104 tubing between reservoir and flow indicator, 106
PV6, 32 types of memory, 31
schematic view, 104 ultrasonic
three-dimensional view, 104 sound direction, 74
system checkout valve PV6, 104 ultrasonic transducer, 74
System diagnostics US 5-15R power outlets, 133
logging, 30 USB
system software memory stick, 126
installation, 69, 248 Service key, 126
version, 14 USB connector, 126, 144
system version, 14 V1 vaporizer pressure, 40
T2 pressure test point no. 2, 40 Vacuum gauge, 138
tacho sensor, 114 valve diaphragm, 95
Technical alarms Valve tests
in Service & Settings, 226 in Service & Settings, 244
technical error codes, 303, 320 valves
temperature sensor absorber bypass, 74
in fresh gas module, 57, 62 APL/PEEP, 74
in reflector gas module, 94, 95 expiratory outlet one-way, 75
Temperature sensor, 58 inspiratory, 73
Test results manual ventilation, 74
in Service & Settings, 226 safety valve, 70
test sequence flowchart, 258 system checkout, 104
Tests vaporizer
in Service & Settings, 225 bypass pilot valve EMV4, 32, 51
three-dimensional views bypass valve PV5, 32
AFGO), 130, 131 docking valve OV9, 66
CO2 absorber, 88 drain plug, 67
control panel, 108 drive gas filter, 66
emergency ventilation panel, 99 EMC gasket, 66
emergency ventilation section, 98, 101 fresh gas inlet, 66
EVAC, 106 fresh gas inlet filter, 69
Chapter 8 – Index
fresh gas outlet, 66 Vaporizer

fresh gas outlet filter, 69 liquid container, 61
gas escape pipe, 67 outlet valve, 68
gas escape pipe filter, 67 PC board section, 117, 118
heating foil, 69 vaporizer controller
heating foil temperature sensor, 69 board, 67
injection detection, 68 Vaporizer lock pilot valve, 50
injector, 66, 68 Vaporizer tool, 222
inlet valve PV3, 32 Vaporizer valve
leakage test, 261 block, 44
level indicator, 67 Vaporizer valve section, 60
lid, 66 Vaporizer Valve Section, 44, 59
liquid agent filter, 67 Ventilation settings
liquid container, 65, 66 in Service & Settings, 226
outlet valve PV4, 32 VGA connector, 125
PC 1910 vaporizer controller board, 69 volume reflector
PC 1911 vaporizer connector board, 69 adaptor, 91
PC 1912 vaporizer liquid detector board, 69 leakage test, 263
PC 1913 vaporizer liquid level detector board, main description, 89
70 schematic view, 90
PC 1926 vaporizer spray detector board, 70 Volume reflector, 25, 91
position on system, 24 water trap, 86
pressure regulator (REG1), 40, 42 three-dimensional view, 86
pressure transducer, 67 Water trap
pressure valve EMV11, 32, 52 receptacle, 80, 81, 86
safety fill valve, 65, 66 water trap receptacle, 85
safety valve, 68 removal, 186
safety valve SV2, 33 three-dimensional view, 85
scavenging valve EMV12, 32, 38, 52 zero calibration
schematic view, 64 gas intake, 103
selection pilot valve EMV5, 32, 51 Zero calibration
software installation, 69, 248 gas filter, 80
three-dimensional view, 65 gas tubing, 80
vaporizing chamber, 66, 68 valve, 82
vaporizing chamber temperature sensor, 68 Zero Calibration
window, 69 Valve, 80
9 Revision history
9.1 System revision history

System version # Status Comments
System version 1.0 Not valid Replaced by System version 1.1 in mandatory update
MCC/10/009/NU.
MCC/11/001/IU.
MCC/11/006/IU.
MCC/11/006/IU.
System version 2.1 Valid only in Replaced by System version 4.2 in the mandatory update
countries where MCC/16/001/NU in all countries where System version 4.2 is
System version 4.2 regulatory approved.
is not yet regulatory
System conditions:
approved
 Control Gas Analyzer CGA and Patient Gas Analyzer
PGA installed and active.
 Double sampling used for CGA.
 System checkout valve deactivated. Not mounted on
units with S/N 1500–2000.
Software improvements:
approved
 New system software installer interface.
 The APL calibration values are not lost during System
software installation.
 More robust monitoring of the Power Backup Battery.
 Increased MAN/AUTO switch reliability.
 Improved EEPROM write algorithm.
 Possibility to reset the EEPROM on PC 1900 in Service &
Settings.
 Improved Service & Settings functions.
 Flow-i Communication Interface (FCI) Protocol version
0004 introduced.
Other changes compared to System version 2.1:
 Improved Fresh Gas Sampling IFGS (single sampling)
containing:
o Fresh Gas Filter.
o Improved gas sampling point S2.
Chapter 9 – Revision history
To retrofit units with IFGS, the 'Improved fresh gas

sampling kit' must be installed prior to System version 2.2
upgrade.
 As in System version 2.1, the System checkout valve
deactivated. Not mounted on units with S/N 1500–2000.
Software improvements:
approved
 System software installer improvements.
 Vaporizer software can be installed without using an USB
memory stick.
 Remote Services is implemented.
 Preventive Maintenance counter is now reset to 5000
hours when checking and saving with the “Performed
preventative maintenance”-button in the Service &
Settings menu.
 The Units menu in Service & Settings is allowed for
changes from the access level Biomed.
 Stabilized TE16 alarm. I2C messages are sent twice
before triggering the TE16 alarm.
0005 introduced.
 Control Gas Analyzer CGA not used:
o For Flow-i field upgraded to System version 3.0, CGA
will remain mounted but will be disabled. CGA
sampling and return points S1/S2 and R1/R2 will
remain connected but not used.
o For Flow -i delivered from factory with System
version 3.0, CGA will not be included. CGA sampling
and return points S1/S2 and R1/R2 will be plugged.
Note that the Fresh gas filter introduced with IFGS (in
System version 2.2) is required even though the
improved sampling point S2 is not used.
 System checkout valve reintroduced. Units with S/N
1500–2000 were manufactured without the System
Checkout Valve PV6 and the System Checkout Pilot
Valve EMV3. These units must be retrofitted with a
System checkout valve kit prior to System version 3.0
upgrade.
is not yet regulatory Major software improvements related to service:

approved
 System software adapted to AGC:
o System checkout (Gas analyzer test).
o Service & Settings (Startup configuration).
o AGC tool available in Tools.
0006 introduced.
 Sampling line pressure drop test to be performed at AGC
installation and during Preventive Maintenance.
Major software improvements related to service:
approved
 Conditions for displayed measured flow and volume
values adapted to BTPS.
 Improved vaporizer stability.
 Vaporizer 1 and 2 test will not be performed if the Gas
analyzer test fails during System checkout.
0007 introduced.
Other changes of the system:
 From S/N 4001:
o New design of Gas distribution section and Drive gas
supply section.
o New design of Emergency manual ventilation section.
 From S/N 5001:
o New design of Patient Cassette Docking.
o New design of CO2 Absorber locking switch.
Other hardware changes:
 New design of Display/Touch screen and PC 1924
Display Connection from Control Panel S/N 320000.
 New design of PC 1903 External Connectors due to new
LED Lamp. Introduced in production Q2 2015.
 Changed fuses on PC 1938 Power Connection.
 Auxiliary power outlets, US version new option.
System version 4.2 Valid Major software improvements related to service:

 AUTO ventilation leakage test is updated to discover if
the manual ventilation bag is connected to the expiratory
outlet.

 System checkout:
o Extended limits of the k-value during Flow transducer
test.
o Calibration of the APL/PEEP valve changed,
calibration is now done at the same pressure as
measured during Pressure transducer test.
o Limit of compressible volume compensation factor
during AUTO ventilation leakage test, is changed
from 6.0 ml/cmH2O to 8.0 ml/cmH2O.
 Adapted to PC 1984 Expiratory channel. PC 1984 will
replace PC 1919.
 Stability enhancement to reduce the occurrence of
Technical Error 81.
 Stability enhancement to avoid that displayed settings in
some cases differ from actual/delivered settings.
 Improvements in Service & Settings section Ventilation &
gas intended for the software option Recruitment
Maneuvers.
 PC 1984 Expiratory channel (replaces PC 1919).

 System software version 4.04.00
o Manual leakage test improved for manual bags with
high compliance.
o Correction of missing loops in some very specific
conditions.
o Improved stability of set O2 value when changing
vaporizer slot and agent concentration.
o Gas analyzer test in System checkout and the
Sampling line pressure drop test adapted to AION
Platinum.
 New design of the MAN/AUTO switch.

o Improved gas analyzer algorithm regarding FiCO2
measurements.
o CO2 measurements presented in BTPS.
o MAN leakage test: If the test is passed (≤ 150 ml/min)
it will only present “pass”. If the test fails with 151-300
ml/min leakage, the value will be presented.
o Results from SCO and vaporizer check will be stored

in the vaporizer enabling tested vaporizer, as long as
the slot has been tested and passed within 24 h.
o Improved test sequence for backup gas in SCO.
o Remote Services: Faster transfer of files and more
robust, also improved DHCP handling and logging.
o Reducing consequences after Panel subsystem
restart by adding dialog after a restart.

 Gas consumption available in the menu and in Remote
services.
 When SCO passes, the system returns to standby mode
without user intervention.
 Less agent consumption during SCO – Vaporizers are
tested every SCO. However, every 5 days an extended
test is performed. Performing a Vaporizer test from
Standby or in Service & Settings will always run the
extended test.
9.2 Service Manual revision history

Revision Comment
13 New baseline. Internal release only.
14 First approved version with new baseline, but not released.
9.2.1 Service Manual revision 15

Revision 15 is the next external release of Service Manual and includes all changes from revisions 13 and
14. However, there are extensive changes and the amendments regarding the new core (serial number
>20000) introduced in revision number 15. Therefore, revision 15 forms a new manual baseline.
9.2.2 Service Manual revision 16

The table below shows the most important changes compared to the previous version of the Service Manual.
The following keywords are used:
A = Added. Information about new functionality added.
B = Changed. Information about changed functionality or data.
C = Corrected. Corrections made due to clarifications or clerical errors.
A B C Section Comment
X 1.6, Service Added a note with complaint handling information.
Note: Revision 17 is created only for editorial changes on the cover page.
Chapter 10 – Diagrams
10 Diagrams
On the following pages:

 PC 1900 board layouts and signals
 Service & Settings menu tree
 System overview
7
1 N7 N8
PC1781
A10
A10 A1 A1
MODUL1
B10 B1 B1
C10 C1 C1
C10
R1 R2
C3 C4
C8
R5
C7
A1 B1 C1
N6A
1
P11
C1
P17
P15
P16
1 1 1
P14
2
1
C1 C32
B1 B32
A1 A32
N1B N1A
C2
IC1
C1 C32
1 2 B1 B32
A1 A32
N2B N2A
P18
C1 C32
B1 B32
A1 A32
N3B N3A
N6B
A1-H1
A2-H2
C1 C32
B1 B32
A3-H3
A1 A32
N9 N10
N4
A4-H4
A10 A1
B10 B1
C10 C1 D6 D10 D14 D18 D22 D26 D30
C1 C32
B1 B32
A1 A32
R3 R4
N5A
C5 C6
Z4 Z8 Z12 Z16 Z20 Z24 Z28 Z32
N5B Pb
PC1900E
200 205
Vy.plac/Proj.method Film Scan Dokument id/Document id
---------
CAD-system Datum/Date Utf{rdad av/Issued by Namnf|rtydl. kod/Name. dept.
MENTOR ---- e-sign, see top left corner Jonas Hintze 1

Seen from top side
Ben{mning/Denomination
PC1900
PCB Assembly Top side view

A F Typnr/Type No Skala/Scale Blad/Sheet Artikelnr/Part No Rev./Ver
GETINGE GROUP
the use or communication of the contents thereof are
Copying of this document, and giving it to others and

forbidden without express authority. Offenders are
liable to the payment of damages. All rights are re-
served in the event of the grant of patent or the
registration of a utility model or design.
8 2 E426E 1:1 1(2) 66 72 837 06
K J H G F E D C B A
Copying of this document, and giving it to others and
the use or communication of the contents thereof are
forbidden without express authority. Offenders are
liable to the payment of damages. All rights are re-
served in the event of the grant of patent or the
registration of a utility model or design.
K
J
H
2
1
N30
G
F
1
2
E
P31
1
2
Seen from bottom side
D
P32
GETINGE GROUP
C
A
8
F
2
Ben{mning/Denomination
Typnr/Type No
E426E
B
Skala/Scale
1:1
2 P29 16
PCB Assembly
Blad/Sheet
2(2)
PC1900
Artikelnr/Part No
A
Bottom side view
66 72 837
Rev./Ver
06
1
6
7
2
4
5
Critical Care AB
Critical Care AB
Critical Care AB
Critical Care AB
Service & Settings
System version 4.7
User category: Field service engineer (SSU/SSP)
Access code: Service key
Page 1 (2)
Overview
Service
Status Logs Tests Calibration Service report
functions
System Gas analyzer Hardware Software Options LOGS System checkout: APL knob barometer Touch screen Valve tests Gas analyzer SERVICE TASKS:
Gas analyzer
-Alarms -O2 flush -Performed preventive
Central gas pressure PATIENT System item System item Installed software -Ventilation settings -Insp. & Exp. valves -1. Set APL value to SP -Current barometer - Calibration process for Touch Screen calibration System Valves - Connect maintenance
-O2 Software version PC board name Version no. options. -Events -Internal tests -2. Set APL Value to 30 pressure the Patient gas analyzer - Interface for calibration -Manual to AION through COM2 -Replaced expiratory
-Air Article no. -Vaporizer 1 -Barometer -3. Set APL Value to 80 -New barometer AION Platinum of the touch screen Ventilation(EMV2) membrane
AION -Replaced backlight
-N2O Version no. -Vaporizer 2 SERVICE LOGS -Gas supply pressure pressure -Fresh gas Safety (SV1)
.Type -Replaced internal
Serial no. -Test results -Pressure transducer -AFGO (EMV18)
Backup gas pressure -Serial number
-Technical alarms -Safety valve -PEEP/APL battery
-O2 -Hardware revision
-Configuration -Vaporizer inlet/outlet -System checkout (EMV3) -Reset internal battery
-Air -Operating time
-Installation valve errors
-N2O -Gas measurement bench
-Service report -Flow transducer Vaporizer valves -Replaced memory
Vaporizer 1 -Serial number
-AUTO ventilation -Vaporizer 1 in/out backup batteries
-Agent -Hardware revision
leakage (EMV6)
-Liquid level -Operating time
-MAN ventilation leakage -Vaporizer 2 in/out Write comment and sign.
-Status -Pump module
-Gas analyzer (EMV5)
Vaporizer 2 -Serial number
-Battery -Vaporizer Bypass
-Agent -Hardware revision
-Vaporizer 1 (EMV4)
-Liquid level -Operating time
-Vaporizer 2 -Vaporizer 1 pressure
-Status -Calibration dates
-Technical alarms (EMV9)
Battery status -Factory
-Remaining time -Last calibration -Vaporizer 1 Scavenging
Control: (EMV10)
-Voltage -Last calibration check
-Control disable -Vaporizer 2 pressure
-Battery replaced O2 sensor vaporizers (EMV11)
Product -Serial number -AFGO valve -Vaporizer 2 Scavenging
Serial number -Last calibration -Control pressure (EMV12)
transducer
System version -APL/PEEP valve
System software version -Control safety valve
Operating time -Vaporizer inlet/outlet
valve
Next preventive -Control flow transducer
maintenance -AUTO ventilation
Patient cassette status leakage
- APL/PEEP valve -MAN ventilation leakage
membrane -Vaporizer 1
-Remaining capacity -Vaporizer 2
-First day of use
-Operating time Monitoring:
-Initial gas supply
Network status
-O2 flush
-Remote Services URL
Absorber switch
-IP address
-Water trap
-Netmask
-Mains connection
-Gateway
-Monitoring disable
-DNS server
vaporizer
-Network address
-Power failure
-Network interface status
-Barometer
Control panel status -Gas supply pressure
-Backlight operating time -Monitoring pressure
transducer
-Monitoring safety valve
-Monitoring flow
transducer
-Gas analyzer
-Battery
-Technical alarms
Panel:
-Panel audio
Leakage check:
-Multiple pressure
leakage
-Internal leakage
-AFGO leakage
-AUTO ventilation
leakage
-MAN ventilation leakage
Service & Settings
System version 4.7
User category: Field service engineer (SSU/SSP)
Access code: Service key
Page 2 (2)
Overview
Startup configuration Settings
General Units Screen layout Displayed Waveforms Alarm general Adult AUTO Infant AUTO Biomed Date & Agent Network
Ventilation and gas
measurements alarm limits alarm limits access code time consumption
-Date format - Airway pressure -Loops Ventilation Waveform 1: -Alarm sound 1(2) 1(2) -Current code Date -ISO -Remote Services
-Time format - Flow -Gas mix measurements -Pressure level Lower/ Upper Lower/ Upper -Enter new -Day -SEV URL
-Decimal -Dynamic rotameter and placements Waveform 2 -20-100% -Ppeak -Ppeak code -Month -DES -Address setting
separator compliance -Numerical gas -Flow -Apnéa mute -MVe -MVe Startup Startup 1(6) Startup 2(6) Startup 3(6) Startup 4(6) Startup 5 and -Confirm new -Year Reset - IP address
-Language - CO2 pressure Page 1 -Volume -Heart Lung -RR -RR -Start Patient range Ventilation Pause Gas delivery 6 (6) code Time - Netmask
-Medical gas - Gas supply -Graphical gas Page 2 -CO2 Machine/Cardio -PEEP -PEEP Infant age mode: function: settings Summary of -Hour - Gateway
colour code pressure pressure Enable MAC -O2 Bypass mode Apnea time Apnea time Infant, VT/ Infant pause settings -Minute - DNS server
-Remote services - Barometric -Short trends presentation -Agent -Abbreviation PBW Parameter period -Second
-Flashing Standby pressure -Volume reflector -Blank -HLM 2(2) 2(2) Adult age Widgets Pause - Network
Message indicator (VRI) Waveform 3 -CPB Lower/ Upper Lower/ Upper Adult, VT/ for chosen function: Interface status
-Prediceted body -Flow -FiCO2 -FiCO2 PBW ventilation Adult pause
weight (PBW) -Volume -EtCO2 -EtCO2 Volume mode period
-CO2 -FiO2 -FiO2 setting Vaporizer
-O2 -EtO2 -EtO2 Breath Cycle slot
-Agent -FiISO -FiISO setting Activate N2O
-Blank -EtISO -EtISO Activate Activate N2O
Waveform 4 -FiDES -FiDES insp./exp cylinder
-Flow -EtDES -EtDES hold check during
-Volume -FiSEV -FiSEV PBW-based System
-CO2 -EtSEV -EtSEV values used checkout
-O2 automaticall Activate air
-Agent Reminder to turn Reminder to turn y cylinder
-Blank agent on agent on check during
Waveform 5 System
-Flow checkout
-Volume Activate O2
-CO2 Guard
-O2
-Agent
-Blank
Waveform 6
-Flow
-Volume
-CO2
-O2
-Agent
-Blank
Sweep speed
-5 mm/s
-10 mm/s
-20 mm/s
A B C D E F G
System overview: Flow-i anesthesia system S/N > 20 000 6 Vaporizer 1

Reflector pressure Pr
Not activated in this diagram 26 PC 1900 Main backplane Xnn from Reflector
gas supply
Doc-ID: EVU-191422 For revision history see EVU-191411 XXX

= Connector on
PC 1900 Main backplane Reflector
Docking valve Drive gas pressure R
Vaporizer E2Prom “000” PC 1781
3 Gas control section
transducer
31 Backup gas rack/trolley OV9 filter lid sensor XXX- I2C-
= Internal CAN 2
PC Xxxxx Monitor E2Prom “100”
EMV 9 /10 serial communication
30 Auxiliary O2 and
1931 P50
Vaporizer 1 Vaporizer 1 Safety fill
scavenging pressure suction module 18 Control panel
MOD1
Serial com. 2
Backup O2 supply To EVAC Vaporizer valve
REG21 O2 120 kPa T
heating foil
I2C Vap 2
O2 240 kPa
21 Power On/Off and 1

Cylinder gas 310 kPa V2 E2 PV2 PP4 120 Alarm
1
TFT / LED display
1
IN Profile
Vaporizer PC boards
inlet filter System From PV 1 Gas escape
AUTO checkout Vaporizing Touch screen
EMV5 EMV11 EMV12 EMV4 EMV6 EMV3 EMV10 EMV9 pipe filter CPU T Start
MAN
valve PV1 Vaporizer chamber Stop
Reset
actuator inlet valve
O2 cylinder O2 cylinder SV21 I2C-Onboard
"8051"
CPU
gas pressure gas pressure 650 kPa EMV6 Trends Vaporizer LEDs
transducer regulator O2 cylinder E2Prom ”000”
Vap 2 Vap 2 Vap 2 Vaporizer Vap 1 System Vap 1 Vap 1
PV2 Vaporizer
Save End
gas safety selection pressure scavenging bypass selection checkout scavenging pressure outlet valve Screen Case From O2 P217 PC 1927 O2 Flush P216
pilot valve valve valve pilot valve pilot valve pilot valve valve valve
OUT
valve T Vaporizer PC 1925 Flush Valve
P56 P60 P61 P57 P55 P58 P66 P65 To PV 2 liquid Display CPU
PC1910 Power
Gas escape pipe

container button
N256 N257 N258 PC 2057 P64 P63 NTC NTC
EMV18 PC 1926 PC 1914 Auxiliary O2
Ejector From P29
O2 Pf Valve drivers APL MAN/AUTO N5 Emergency Power
VI On LED
Fresh gas PF AFGO Ventilation
Filter
PC 1912
PC 1913
Pc 1916 Exp. pressure transducer pilot Vaporizer P10 Screen
pressure to E2Prom ”001” valve Config.
Menu Switch
Cylinder pressure connection Vap = Vaporizer injector Silencer
P149 P151 P154 P153 P152
P70
PC 1781 (F) I/O port “001”
E2Prom “111”
on PC 1984 EMV2
PC 1781
Internal Boot enable switch Mains LED
MOD1
N259
ADC ”00”
P50
Pe gas channel P
PC 1911
Liquid agent P1 P4
34 Patient Monitor Backup Air supply From I/O port “000” PP3
SV2 Vaporizer filter
Suction P2
P67
REG22 Patient P3 P8 PC 1928 Power On/Off
Manual Manual PC 1924 Display connection
E
To P42 on PC 1903 Vaporizer pressure
Cylinder gas 310 kPa cassette vent. ventilation Drive gas O2 (from O2 Out) AIR (from AIR Out) N1A
pilot safety valve transducer
P59
inlet filter External connectors valve valve 240 kPa Drain plug
ADC ”01” P68
actuator
N1B P1B P1A
AIR cylinder Air cylinder SV22

I2C-
Monitor
I2C-
Control
I2C-
Panel
P14 Absorber
sensor Drive gas 6 Vaporizer 2 Activated in this diagram
10 Gas analyzer section CAN 1
gas pressure gas pressure 650 kPa CPU FPGA

120 kPa I2C-
transducer regulator Air Zero calibration gas inlet Exp.
cylinder Vaporizer 1 pressure/scavenging Vaporizer 2 pressure Docking valve chan.
Drive gas
Vaporizer R3
gas safety OV9 filter
EMV 9 EMV11 lid sensor P1 I2C-
valve Vaporizer 1 PC E2Pot “01”
Water trap Monitor
pressure EMV10 EMV12 1931 P2
EMV4
2
Vaporizer 2 Vaporizer 2
2
receptacle
2
Air/N2O Safety fill Inspiratory
Vaporizer 2 scavenging Water 0
PV5 Vaporizer scavenging pressure Sampling line
Serial com. 2
Fresh gas Vaporizer valve trap pressure Pi
bypass valve T W2 W2
heating foil
I2C Vap 2
Vaporizer to vaporizer from Patient
W3 W3 cassette NTC
PV1 inlet valve PV3 IN
27 Lift
Purge line
32 Backup gas holder
To Vaporizer 1 O2 P111
Vaporizing Gas escape Water Fresh gas Pf
AFGO pipe filter RS-232 (2) pressure
Pf PV3 Vaporizer chamber trap
valve CPU from Gas
Backup N2O supply To inlet valve detector Patient
RS-232 (4) control
AFGO
"8051"
CPU
REG23 EMV18 EMV5 O2 sensor section
Cylinder gas 310 kPa W1 P32
PV7 Vaporizer F I
Fresh gas PV4 Vaporizer
inlet filter outlet
from vaporizer outlet valve
Patient gas analyzer PC 1781 PC 1781
valve OUT Agent gas T Vaporizer P15 AION Platinum E2Prom “011” E2Prom “010”
From Vaporizer 1 liquid
PC1910
Gas escape pipe

PV2 PV4 container P50 P50
AC/DC N2O cylinder N2O cylinder O2 PC 1926 PC 1914
Converter MOD2 MOD1
gas pressure gas pressure
transducer regulator VI Fresh gas Inspiratory
PC 1912
PC 1913
SV23 Vaporizer pressure pressure
650 kPa P81 P82 injector transducer transducer
To P42 O2 flush
N 2O PC 1909
on PC 1903 valve P110
cylinder
9 Patient cassette
To P217 on Vaporizer adapter
22 PC 1984
External gas safety P
N2O/O2 PC 1927 O2 Flush P30
lid
connectors Liquid agent
PC 1911
valve
SV2 Vaporizer filter Expiratory channel
Power 20 N30
Vaporizer
safety valve
pressure
transducer
R3
N2A
Connection Drain plug Pe
Expiratory pressure to N2B P2B P2A
6A PC 1781 (E) on PC 2057
AUT. 12 A
Isolation
Transformer
1 Gas distribution section 2 Drive gas supply section Flush
Fresh gas from vaporizer to patient cassette
RS-232
Mux
OV1-OV3 = Gas inlet One-Way valves P103 P45 E2Prom “000”
Instant O2 supply Emerg
OV4-OV6 = Backup gas Inlet One-Way valves
3 P225 PC 1938
Mains OV7 Pressure test point 2 T2
Reflector gas
P104
33 MSync CAN 1 CPU
I2C-Onboard
3 3
PC 1906 I2C- PC 1918
Connection PLD
Gas block Monitor Expiratory I2C-
P223 Pilot valve drive gas PV1
channel Control 48 MB Flash
16 System checkout valve
ADC ”00”
REG3 240 kPa SV3 connector
Pilot valve 300 kPa Vaporizer I2C- I2C 128 MB SDRAM
E2Prom “101”
N253 P249 O2 Out pressure Drive gas drive gas P46 Vap 1 Mux
V1 PP4 System checkout Pi 1 MB SRAM
(Auxiliary O2 ) regulator safety valve Inspiratory pressure to
valve PV6 and PC 1781 (I) I2C-
N233 T1 Test plug actuator PP4 Battery
on PC 1984 Vap 2
P250 O2 in NTC P48 OV4

REG1 120 kPa
Vaporizer pressure Pressure
+12 V RS-232 LAN
23 PC 2060 Control
Central regulator test point 1
Fuse F6
N235 gas supply
7 Safety
P OV1 N3A
Fuse F5 Pressure
N239
Fuse F1 transducer O2 4 Fresh gas supply 28 AFGO valve N3B P3B P3A
N243 Air out Barometric
Fuse F2 (Suction module) 1 SV1 CAN 1 NTC pressure
T P Additional fresh gas From AFGO in
19 Power section
Fresh gas safety transducer
P247 P222 outlet connector Gas control section valve 117 cmH2O
Serial Ser.
comm. 2 Mux PS1
S1 PLD
8 Patient cassette
OV5 CPU
Air In R1 LED Lamp 24 V Serial
Central Fresh gas comm. 3 E2Prom “000”
Pi RS-232
Filter
Mains gas supply P

module
I2C- Mux
OV2 E2Pot “00”
220-240 VAC Power O2 RS-232 (2)
100-120 VAC Inlet Pressure
transducer Air E2Pot “0111” ”1111”
Valve
N7
12 Volume reflector OV10
From connector Fuse
RS-232 (4) I2C-Onboard
P1
P250 on PC 1938 I2C

P11 Inspiratory Fuse Mux
Mains connection 48 MB Flash
11 CO2 absorber
valve I2C-
AC/DC power inlet Valve Buzzer
128 MB SDRAM
I2C-
OV6
13 Reflector gas supply Exp.
chan.
PC 1903 AC/DC
converter
I2C-
Monitor
2 MB SRAM RTC
4
External
4 To AC/DC Power Inlet
in External connectors
To connector
P146 on PC2063 2
Reflector pressure
to PC1781(R) OV12 Expiratory
APL/
PEEP N46 12 V connectors I2C-
Battery
4
Power Control T P on PC 1900
Pr
outlet one-way valve valve E Prom “000”
2 CO2 P40 AC/DC
Power
PC 2061
PC 1917
24 V
P43 P6A N6A 24 Monitoring
Absorber
Extra mains 29 N 2O
Central Reflector
P17
APL/PEEP
Expiratory sensor
Cylinder
pressure P42
power outlet
Filter
channel N4
gas supply P OV3 gas module A
REG 6 I2C- valve coil B Air /O2 / N2O
Pressure O2 cassette HB ADC “10” P4
400kPa Valve HA
transducer N2O E Pot “0110” ”1110”
2 T1 T2 I C-
2
CAN 1
N2O gas supply To P67 on I/O Port" 000"
P1
1A N8 Monitor
pressure regulator Reflector PC 2057 120
AUT. 2A
adaptor Emergency T Valve drivers E2Prom " 110" CAN 2
Patient Monitor
APL actuator T CAN 1 120
CPU
I2C-
IEC
power
Gas module docking Expiratory flow transducer
Pe
Battery
sense
P38
120 P41
Panel
I2C-Onboard
outlets P18 P19
RS-232 (FCI 1) N137
P39 Fuse F1 P6B N6B E2Prom ”000”
External input/output ports

OV11 Battery
3 Manual RS-232 (FCI 2) N136
T P Expiratory Fuse F2 ADC ”00”
ventilation valve
valve LVDS 64 MB Flash
N135
2A P16 128 MB SDRAM
AUT. Fresh gas Tacho
N134
15 Emergency manual ventilation section
4A S3 Fan VGA
sensor
Filter
Power AGSS module 2 MB SRAM

Outlets Air I2C- USB N133
Valve Battery
E2Pot “0011” ”1011” Ethernet N132
P1
From N9 PGA Gas Manual

Power In Power Out EMV 10 analyzer PP3
25 PC 1922 Panel
OV13 Oxygen flow ventilation
EMV 12 4 zero calibr.
1 2 1 3 one-way valve valve
T P gas intake
actuator
PP3
APL/PEEP
Transformer 17 EVAC AGS flow Mechanical
valve coil
5 5
Switching indicator 10 APL
Fresh gas
14 Manual
Relay N5A
Emergency
Filter
T
1 2 34 module I2C- ventilation
Air N 2O Valve switch ventilation P5B P5A
E2Pot “0010” ”1010”
0
section + N5B
P1
N10
Power backup battery I2C- ADC “01”
Power
Oxygen flow
O2 l/min. ADC “00”
P142
Emergency P144 CPU T

To connector P151 on APL actuator
PC 1928 Power On/Off P146 PLD
EVAC Reservoir
Transformer Bleed-flow device From connector P249 on PC 1938 Mains connection
PC 2063 Power control
D
A B C E F G
For revision history,
Flow-i Anesthesia System S/N <20 000 For information regarding other versions of this functional unit, refer to chapter 3. Description of functions in the Service Manual. EVU-123791_16
see EVU-191414 System Overview
A B C D E F G H
XXX- = Internal serial
Xxxxx communication
26 PC 1900 Main Back-plane Reflector Pressure
From Reflector gas
Pr
To connector supply
Backup Gas Holder 32 P42 on PC 1903 Backup Gas Trolley/Rack Gas Control From AFGO Pilot Manual Ventilation switch APL Vaporizer (VAP1) Vaporizer (VAP 2) XXX Xnn = Connector on PC 1900 Main Back-plane
External Valve EMV18 MAN E2Prom “000” R
N2O/O2
Connectors O2 Cylinder Gas 31 Section 6 Vaporizer Drive Docking
PC Lid Gas Filter Valve
6 Vaporizer Drive Docking
PC Lid Gas Filter Valve
I2C- PC 1781
Pressure Regulator AUTO Safety Fill 1931 Sensor Safety Fill 1931 Sensor Monitor E2Prom “100”
Cylinder Gas Cylinder Gas
Pressure N2O/O2 Cylinder
Gas Pressure
Inlet Filter 3 P62 P70
Valve Valve
Control Panel 18 Reflector Pressure P50
PC1910 PC1910 Transducer
P64
Transducer Pin Index OV9 OV9 MOD1
Regulator Vaporizer Gas Vaporizer
P63
O2 Exp. Pressure Gas
Heating Foil Heating Foil
"8051"
REG23 Escape
1
REG21 Escape
"8051"
from Patient PC 1907
CPU
SV21 T T
Power On/Off and 21
CPU
310 kPa 310 kPa Valve Drivers Pipe Pipe
Cylinder Gas O2 In 650 kPa Cassette P60 P61 P65 P66 From Absorber Sensor
Filter Vaporizing Filter Vaporizing
Inlet Filter O2 Cylinder
Pin Index Gas Pressure
O2 Cylinder Gas
Safety Valve E2Prom ”001”
Pe P67 EMV2 PP3 Chamber IN Chamber IN
120
N5 Display/Touch Panel
Alarm
profile Vaporizer PC boards
Gas Escape Pipe
Gas Escape Pipe

Transducer T Agent Gas T Agent Gas
N2O/O2 P59 I/O port “001” Exp. Pressure NTC NTC P59 Version A: I2C- I/O-port ”001”
Transducer OUT OUT Start
Panel
P58 ADC ”00” Vaporizer Vaporizer CPU T With lamps Stop
Reset
N2O/O2 In SV23 N256 N257 N258 EMV3 PP4 Liquid PC 1914 PC 1926 PC 1914 PC 1926 Vaporizer LEDs
PC 1912
PC 1913
PC 1912
PC 1913
Liquid
650 kPa O2 O2 N2O AIR P57 I/O port “000” Container VI Container VI
I2C-
Onboard P8 Version B and C:
Trends
P217 PC 1927 O2 Flush P216
N2O/O2 Cylinder E
I2C Vap 1
PC 1916 P58 With LED
I2C Vap 2
P56 ADC ”01” Vaporizer
Gas Safety Valve Cylinder Pressure Connection PC 1781 Vaporizer E2Prom ”000” Save End
EMV4 PV5 Injector screen case
From O2 From
N2O connected in diagram P55 P69 E2Prom “111” Injector
AIR/N2O AIR/N2O Liquid Agent P SV2 Liquid Agent P SV2 PC 1925 Display CPU Flush Valve Emergency Power
button
PC 1911
PC 1911
P57 Ventilation
N2O/O2 Cylinder Gas Cylinder Gas
Pressure Pressure
P54 I2C-
Panel
I2C-
Monitor
P50
MOD1 PV3
Filter
Vaporizer Vaporizer Filter Vaporizer Vaporizer P9 P10 Version A: Switch Power
P53 EMV5 PV4 Drain Pressure Safety Valve Drain Pressure Safety Valve Backlight Inverter On LED
Transducer Regulator I2C- Plug Transducer Plug Transducer P29
P68 Version B:
Patient Monitor Control P14
P56 PC 1963 Screen
Menu
Mountings 34 Pin Index

AIR/N2O EMV6
PV1
PV2 PP1 Vaporizer 1
PP1 Locking Device
PP2 Vaporizer 2
P1 P4
Backlight Inverter
config.
P149 P151 P154 P153 P152
REG22 PP2 Locking Device Version C: Boot enable Mains LED
Cylinder Gas 310 kPa P55 Vaporizer 1 Vaporizer 1 Vaporizer 1 Vaporizer 2 Vaporizer 2 PC 1924 Backlight Inverter switch
AIR/N2O In Inlet Filter SV22 P65
Pressure Inlet Valve Outlet Valve Inlet Valve Outlet Valve P2 Display integrated in PC 1924
Connection P3
P259
Pressure Supply Pilot Valves: N30
650 kPa EMV2 = Manual Ventilation Pilot Valve
EMV7 PP1 Valve PC 1928 Power On/Off
AIR/N2O Cylinder EMV3 = System Checkout Pilot Valve
Gas Safety Valve EMV4 = Vaporizer Bypass Pilot Valve P54 EMV9 P81 P30 P82 N1A
Vaporizer 1
AIR connected in diagram EMV5 = Vaporizer 2 Selection Pilot Valve EMV8 PP2 Scavenging PC 1909
2
EMV6 = Vaporizer 1 Selection Pilot Valve P66 Vaporizer Adapter N1B P1B P1A
Valve
AIR/N2O EMV7 = Vaporizer 1 Lock Pilot Valve PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4
EMV8 = Vaporizer 2 Lock Pilot Valve P53
Gas Analyzer Section 10
PV3
PV4
PV1
PV2
CAN 1 P108
EMV10
Vaporizer 2 I2C- I2C-Onboard
To connector P42 on PC 1903 External Connectors PV2 E1 Pressure Water trap CPU E2Prom “000”
P60 Exp.
Valve receptacle Zero calibration chan.
PV5 W2 gas inlet
Instant O2 Supply Pressure T4 I2C-
V2 E2Pot “01”
Lift 27 Gas Distribution Section 1 REG4
200 kPa
Pressure Regulator TestPoint 4 EMV11 Vaporizer 2
Scavenging
PV5
W3
Patient Gas Analyzer AION
ADS
Monitor
Version B P61 Vaporizer Bypass Valve Water 0
Inspiratory
Valve trap
REG3 Pilot Valve Pressure W3 Pressure Pi
Lift O2 200 kPa detector from Patient
Regulators REG2/REG3
Sampling line
actuator E2 NTC
Pressure Test EMV12 Water Patient Cassette
Purge line
PC 1906 Drive Gas Drive Point 2/3 Fresh Gas Filter O2 sensor O2
P111
Gas Block Safety Valve Gas trap P15 Fresh Gas Pf
T2/T3 Pressure
OV7
AC/DC
I2C- ADC ”00”
REG2
Fresh Gas to Vaporizer Vaporizer Valve Fresh Gas from Vaporizer W2 from Fresh
SV3 240 kPa Gas Supply
Monitor E2Prom “101” 200 kPa Pilot Valve Section 5 R3
Return line
Converter PV1
Drive Gas
O2 Out
AIR W1 P31 F I
OV8 Vaporizer Pressure Vaporizer Version A P32 PC 1781 PC 1781
REG1 Regulator Drive Gas E2Prom “011” E2Prom “010”
Cylinder Gas 120 kPa
Supply OV4 V1 Exp. Pressure Insp. Pressure Zero calibration Patient Gas Analyzer AION P50 P50
Pressure Test To PC 1781 on gas inlet MOD2 MOD1
Point 1 To PC 1781 Platinum
T1 on PC 1907 PC 1919/PC 1984 Insp. Pressure
Fresh Gas Pressure
Power 20 O2 In
Gas Inlet Filters
and Backup Gas
Pressure
Transducer Version B
R3
P1 Transducer Transducer
Connection Inlet Filters O2 2 Drive Gas Supply Section P2
P110
PC 1919/PC 1984
0 Exp. Channel
3 22
6A Central Gas Exp.
Pi
AUT. 12 A Supply P OV1 Reflector Gas Insp.
W2
N2A
Sample
Isolation 1 T P Reflector Gas Supply 13
Pe
Filter Sample W3
Transformer Holder Filter O2 Patient N2B P2B P2A

NTC P48 R3 Holder O2 sensor
PC 1938
P225 Mains
AIR Out Reflector Volume Reflector 12 Version B P32
N116
Filter
Connection Gas Module

Cylinder Gas O2/AIR I2C- E2Prom “000”
P223 Valve P103 P45
Supply OV5 E2Pot “0111” ”1111” To con. P70 CAN 1 CPU I2C-Onboard
O2 Flush
N7 on PC 1907 P104
PC 1918 Version B PLD
PV7
N253 P249 Pressure Valve Drivers
Exp. Channel 19 Power Section I2C-
Gas Inlets / Gas Outlets
Transducer Connector LED Lamp 12 V Control 48 MB Flash

AIR In AIR LED Driver
N233 2 Fresh Gas Supply 4 AFGO P46
I2C- I2C 128 MB SDRAM
Central Gas T P
P250
Supply P OV2 Pilot Valve
EMV18 9 Patient LED Lamp 24 V Vap 1 Mux 1 MB SRAM
Oscillation
N235
Fuse F6
Pressure Fresh Gas Filter Fresh Gas
Pressure
AFGO
Valve PV7
28 Additional
Fresh Gas Cassette From connector
P250 on Fuse 6.3 A AC/DC
I2C-
Vap 2
Battery
Filter
Fuse F5 Transducer Module

O2 I2C- To PC 1781 on
AFGO AFGO Outlet Lid PC 1938 Fuse 6.3 A
Power
Inlet PC 1920 Control
N239
Fuse F1 Central N2O
E2Pot “0110” ”1110”
Valve
Pf PC 1919/
PC 1984
Mains connection 23
Gas PC 1903 N3A
N243 Fuse F2 Supply P OV3 N8
Fresh Gas Safety Valve SV1 LED Lamp External Connectors
117 cmH2O 24 V N3B P3B P3A
P247 P222 P43
P6A N6A Barometric
4
P11 12 V CAN 1
N2O In Gas Module Docking P40 NTC pressure
Reflector Cylinder Serial transducer
Control Panel Cable

Mains
220-240 VAC Power
Cylinder Gas
Supply OV6
Socket
7 Pressure
Air/O2/N2O
P42
AC/DC
comm. 2 CPU PLD PS1
100-120 VAC Inlet 3 P ADC “10” Converter RS232-2 E2Prom “000”
P19
T
Safety Valve I2C-
I/O Port" 000" E2Pot “00”
REG 6 Monitor I2C-
To connector P146 on 400kPa E2Prom " 110" Valve I2C I2C-Onboard
PC 1923 Power Control N2O gas supply Fresh Gas
Filter
Module Battery Mux

pressure regulator P38 I2C- 48 MB Flash
To AC/DC Power Inlet P18
OV1-OV3 = Gas Inlet One-way Valves
OV4-OV6 = Backup Gas Inlet One-way Valves
AIR I2C-
Valve
Patient Cassette 8 R3 Pe S1 R1 Pi sense
Monitor
128 MB SDRAM
in External connectors AGSS E2Pot “0011” ”1011”
N9
Battery
P39
Fuse F1 P6B N6B I2C- 2 MB SRAM RTC
(EVAC) N46 I2C- Exp. R3
Valve
Fuse F2 Power
Buzzer Battery
4 P
Exp. chan.
Extra Mains 29
T E2Prom “00X”
PC 1921 Monitoring
Power Outlets
O2 Flush Valve System 16 Exp.
P16 24
30 PC 1917 TE
OV11 Tacho
Fresh Gas O2 + Checkout Exp. Channel Absorber Absorber T Fan sensor
N4
Filter
Cassette Inlet Outlet

1A
AUT. 2 A
Auxiliary O2 Module
N2O I2C- To connector
System
B A
Bypass Bypass N138 P4
Valve Valve
Patient Monitor and E2Pot “0010” ”1010”
Valve P217 on PP4
Checkout
Valve PV6 Expiratory
HA HB
Insp. CAN 1 N139

PC 1927
IEC
Suction N10
O2 Flush Test
and
Actuator PP4
Outlet
One-way APL/PEEP Manual T Valve S1 R1 Pi
CAN 2
120
power Module Plug Valve Valve Ventilation

Valve
Insp.
I2C-
120 CPU
outlets Expiratory Flow
Transducer OV10 Panel
OV12
Exhaust I2C-Onboard
Ejector
Gas RS-232 (FCI 1) N137
Absorber Sensor
Filter
Auxiliary O2 P17
APL/PEEP 11 P = Pressure measuring point:
E2Prom ”000”
Input/Output ports
2A Silencer RS-232 (FCI 2) N136 ADC ”00”
Valve Coil PP3 Pe = Expiratory pressure
AUT. 4 A LVDS
Power Oxygen Pf = Fresh gas pressure N135 64 MB Flash
PGA Gas
OV13 Oxygen Flow
CO2 Pi = Inspiratory pressure Power backup battery
PP3
Outlets Connector analyzer 128 MB SDRAM
Block One-way Valve Pr = Reflector pressure FLOW-i VGA N134
RJ45
Suction
zero calibr.
gas intake Manual Absorber R = Gas return point Remote
Services USB N133
2 MB SRAM
Mechanical Ventilation S = Gas sampling point
O2 (from O2 Out) AIR (from AIR Out) Valve Adapter Battery
Power Out
10 APL S1-R1 = Not used N132
Power In Emergency To connector
Ventilation
Actuator
P67 on PC 1907
S2-R2 = Not used, not shown
S3-R3 = Patient Gas Analyzer
RJ12 (RJ45)
Ethernet
PC 1922 Panel 25
1 2 1 3 Switch Valve Drivers S3
0 Y-piece measurement
AGS Flow
EVAC 17 0 Emergency T = Temperature measuring point 33 N5A
Indicator APL Actuator W1 - W3 = Water trap connections
I
Oxygen Flow
MSync N5B P5B P5A
O2 l/min. Manual Fresh Gas to

Ventilation Safety Valve ADC “01”
Bag I2C-
Power ADC “00”
12 34 To connector P151 on AFGO R2
Bleed-flow PC 1928 Power On/Off
Transformer outlet (located O2 Flush P144 CPU T
6 Switching
Relay
Transformer
EVAC Reservoir below VAP2)
Bleed-flow Device
Version B
Manual
Ventilation AFGO
PV7
PATIENT +12V RS-232 LAN
From connector P249 on

P142
PLD
Emergency Manual Ventilation Section 15

+12 V LAN P146 PC 1923 Power Control
Section 14 Valve
PV7
Fresh Gas from
Vaporizer To connector N136 or N137
PC 1938 Mains connection
on PC 1922 Panel (RS-232)
© Maquet Critical Care AB 2019 • Getinge Flow-i is a trademark by Maquet Critical Care AB • Subject to modifications • Order no 66 76 980, rev 17 • 2019-09
© Maquet Critical Care AB 2019. All rights reserved. • Maquet reserves the right to modify the design and specifications contained herein without prior notice.
Getinge is a global provider of innovative solutions for operating rooms, intensive care units, sterilization departments and for life
science companies and institutions. Based on our firsthand experience and close partnerships with clinical experts, healthcare
professionals and medtech specialists, we are improving the everyday life for people - today and tomorrow.
Manufacturer: Maquet Critical Care AB · Röntgenvägen 2, SE-171 54 Solna, Sweden
www.getinge.com

FLOW-I Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FLOW-I Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service manual

Flow-i Anesthesia System

2.4.3 Electronic subsystems 29

3.10.9 Liquid agent filter 67

3.15.1 Safety aspects 88

3.24 Power connection (20) 115

3.36.2 Safety valve 143

4.11.4 APL/PEEP valve membrane – removal 161

4.18.8 Power button – removal 201

5.6.1 General 255

5.12.3 Transportation with the Service trolley 298

6.4.7 PC 2063/PC 1923 power control board 327

WARNING! Do not modify this equipment without authorization of the manufacturer.

1.1.1 System version and system software version

1.1.2 Serial number

1.2 Symbols used in this manual

Recyclable material. Recycling must be performed in accordance with appropriate industrial

1.3 Hazard notices

1.5 System checkout

Recyclable material. Recycling must be performed in accordance with appropriate industrial

1.7 To the responsible service personnel

1.8 Conditions for displayed measured values

1.8.2 ATPD, Ambient Temperature and Pressure Dry

1.9 Environmental declaration

1.9.1 Components with special environmental concern

1.9.2 Printed circuit boards

 PC 1918 expiratory channel connector board

1.9.3 Other electronics

 Emergency ventilation switch

1.10 Construction materials

1.10.1 Metal – total 70%

1.10.2 Polymeric material – total 10%

1.10.3 Electronics – total 20%

1.10.4 Others – very small amounts

1.11 Articles of consumption

1 Water trap 1 According to hospital routines or at least

2 Patient suction collection bag. Applicable 1 After each patient.

6 Heat and moisture exchanger (HME) 1 After each patient.

7 Patient tubing 1 According to manufacturer’s instructions

8 Suction unit bacterial/viral filter 1 Once every three months, or according to

9 CO2 absorber 1 When exhausted.

10 Filter in Gas module 4 24 months

11 Nozzle unit in Gas module 4 24 months

12 O-ring in docking 4 24 months

13 Exp. sample filter holder 1 According to hospital routines or at least

14 Insp. sample filter holder 1 According to hospital routines or at least

151 APL/PEEP valve membrane 1 24 months

Item Parts to be replaced Qty Interval

162 Absorber valve 2 24 months

17 Dust filter for fan 1 24 months

18 Rotary encoder 1 24 months

19 Filter set for Yoke. Cylinder gas supply 2 24 months

20 Seal for Yoke. Cylinder gas supply 2 24 months

21 Power backup battery 1 3 or 4 years, depending of model

22 Memory backup battery 3 4 years

23 EVAC filter 1 24 months

1.12 Power consumption

Off Measured mean value 30 VA 25 VA

Standby Measured mean value 81 VA 75 VA

Operational mode with average Measured mean value 87 VA 83 VA

Operational mode with average Measured mean value 107 VA 103 VA

Preheating of a second, not Max. 30 VA 202 VA 198 VA

Max. power backup battery charging Mean: 90 VA 200 VA 200 VA